TALON Firmware User`s Manual

TALON Firmware User`s Manual
TALON Firmware User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Building Technologies
588-580, Rev. FA
Copyright Notice
Copyright Notice
Notice
Document information is subject to change without notice by Siemens Industry, Inc.
Companies, names, and various data used in examples are fictitious unless otherwise
noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by
any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written
permission of Siemens Industry, Inc.
All software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and
may be used or copied only in accordance with license terms.
For further information, contact your nearest Siemens Solution Partner, Authorized
TALON Dealer.
Copyright 2016 Siemens Industry, Inc.
To the Reader
Your feedback is important to us. If you have comments about this manual, please
submit them to: [email protected]
Credits
Staefa and TALON are registered trademarks of Siemens Industry, Inc.
Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
Printed in the USA.
2 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Table of Contents
How to Use This Manual ........................................................................................... 13
How this Manual Is Organized ...................................................................................... 13
Prerequisites .................................................................................................................. 13
Symbols Used in this Manual ........................................................................................ 14
Document Conventions ................................................................................................. 14
New Terminology ........................................................................................................... 15
Procedures .................................................................................................................... 15
Reports .......................................................................................................................... 20
Applications ................................................................................................................... 21
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface ........................................................................... 23
Initial System Tasks....................................................................................................... 23
Accelerator Keys ........................................................................................................... 24
Queries .......................................................................................................................... 25
Wildcards ....................................................................................................................... 27
Commanding Points with Wildcards.................................................................... 28
Using Wildcard Characters in a Query ................................................................ 28
BACnet Object Identification ......................................................................................... 28
What is a BACnet Object? .................................................................................. 28
What is a BACnet Device? .................................................................................. 28
How are BACnet Objects Identified?................................................................... 28
BACnet Field Panel Web Server and Launch Pad ........................................................ 29
BACnet Field Panel Web Server Overview ......................................................... 29
Launch Pad Overview ......................................................................................... 30
Chapter 2—System Setup ........................................................................................ 32
Daylight Saving Time..................................................................................................... 32
Displaying the DST Report .................................................................................. 32
Adding a Date and Time Pair to DST .................................................................. 33
Removing a Date and Time Pair from DST ........................................................ 34
Removing All Date and Time Pairs from DST ..................................................... 34
Adding a Default Set of DST Date and Time Pairs ............................................. 34
BACnet Command Priorities ......................................................................................... 35
Modifying the BACnet Command Priorities ......................................................... 35
Using the BACnet Address Table .................................................................................. 36
Displaying the BACnet Address Table Report .................................................... 36
Configuring a Node on a Remote Network ......................................................... 36
Deleting BACnet Objects from the Address Table .............................................. 37
Configuring the BACnet Address Table .............................................................. 37
System Error Messages ................................................................................................ 40
Displaying Error Message Text ........................................................................... 40
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
3 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Ethernet/IP Procedures ................................................................................................. 41
Displaying the Field Panel IP Settings ................................................................ 41
Enabling or Disabling Telnet in the Field Panel .................................................. 42
Setting or Modifying the Field Panel IP Configuration ........................................ 43
Release and Renew DHCP Settings ................................................................... 46
Displaying the BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD) Address Report ... 47
Adding a Device to the BBMD Address Table .................................................... 48
Deleting or Converting a Device from the BBMD Address Table ....................... 49
Deleting All Entries from a BBMD Address Table ............................................... 50
Backing Up Graphics ........................................................................................... 50
Enabling or Disabling Web Server ...................................................................... 51
Disks Procedures .......................................................................................................... 51
Displaying Workstation Disks .............................................................................. 52
Adding a Workstation Disk .................................................................................. 52
Deleting a Workstation Disk ................................................................................ 53
Field Panels ................................................................................................................... 53
Adding a Field Panel to the ALN ......................................................................... 53
Deleting a Field Panel from the ALN ................................................................... 54
Configuring the BACnet MS/TP Routing ............................................................. 55
Modifying the BACnet MS/TP ALN ...................................................... 55
Modifying MS/TP ALN Settings ........................................................... 56
Configuring the MS/TP FLN ................................................................. 57
Configuring the BACnet MS/TP FLN ................................................... 57
Field Panel Configuration Procedures ................................................................ 59
Configuring a Field Panel HMI Port ..................................................... 59
Displaying or Resetting HMI Port Statistics ......................................... 59
Displaying BACnet IP ALN Settings .................................................... 60
Displaying BACnet Device Settings ..................................................... 60
Modifying BACnet Device Settings ...................................................... 61
Displaying the Field Panel Names ....................................................... 62
Modifying Ethernet Capable Field Panel Names ................................. 63
Autorestore and Database Backup to Flash ........................................ 64
Changing the System Default Language ............................................. 66
Verifying Connection, Communication and Default Switch Mapping .. 67
HOA Module Default Switch Mapping ................................................. 68
Modifying the Default Switch Mapping ................................................. 69
Removing the HOA Switch Mapping ................................................... 71
FLNnode and ALNnode Mode Configuration ...................................... 71
Enabling Auto Save ............................................................................. 72
Field Panel Procedures ....................................................................................... 74
Displaying a Field Panel Log ............................................................... 74
Displaying a Field Panel Configuration Report .................................... 75
Adding a Field Panel to the ALN .......................................................... 77
4 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Deleting a Field Panel from the ALN ................................................... 77
Languages ........................................................................................................... 77
Emulating an International Keyboard .................................................. 78
Field Panel File System Operations .................................................................... 79
Basic File System Operation Commands ............................................ 79
Rename a File...................................................................................... 81
Delete a File ......................................................................................... 82
Move a File .......................................................................................... 83
Copy a File ........................................................................................... 84
Remove a Directory ............................................................................. 86
State Text Commands and Procedures ........................................................................ 90
Displaying a State Text Table Log ...................................................................... 92
Displaying a State Text Table Report ................................................................. 92
Adding a State Text Table ................................................................................... 93
Deleting a State Text Table ................................................................................. 94
Adding States to a State Text Table ................................................................... 94
Modifying a State Text Table .............................................................................. 95
Deleting States from a State Text Table ............................................................. 95
Notifications ......................................................................................................... 96
SNMP Procedures ......................................................................................................... 96
Creating Notification Class .................................................................................. 96
Creating Alarm Messages at the HMI ................................................................. 98
Selecting Points for the MIB for SNMP ............................................................... 98
Generating the MIB File ...................................................................................... 99
Modifying the Log File ....................................................................................... 100
Adding SNMP Manager Information for Traps .................................................. 104
Configuring Password for Traps and Receiving Commands ............................ 105
Back up, Restore, and Autorestore ................................................................... 105
Chapter 3—User Accounts ..................................................................................... 109
What Are User Accounts? ........................................................................................... 109
Default User Accounts ...................................................................................... 109
What Are Access Groups? .......................................................................................... 110
What Are Access Levels? ........................................................................................... 110
Password Security Options—Three-Strikes Lockout and Password .......................... 111
Features of the Password Security Options ...................................................... 111
Password Alarm Messages ............................................................................... 112
User Instructions for Changing the Password ................................................... 112
Guidelines for Managing User Accounts ..................................................................... 113
User Account Attributes ............................................................................................... 113
User Account Procedures ........................................................................................... 115
Adding a User Account ..................................................................................... 115
Modifying a User Account ................................................................................. 118
Copying a User Account ................................................................................... 120
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
5 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Deleting a User Account.................................................................................... 121
Configuring AutoLogin for a User Account ........................................................ 122
Modifying an Access Group Name .................................................................... 124
User Account Reports ................................................................................................. 124
Displaying a System Accounts Log ................................................................... 124
Displaying a User Account ................................................................................ 125
Displaying Access Groups ................................................................................ 127
Chapter 4—Point Database .....................................................................................129
Point Database Basic Concepts .................................................................................. 129
Logical Points .................................................................................................... 129
Physical Points .................................................................................................. 131
Virtual Points ..................................................................................................... 132
Subpoints .......................................................................................................... 132
Local Points ....................................................................................................... 133
Point Characteristics .................................................................................................... 135
Point Name and Point System Name ................................................................ 135
Point Naming Conventions ................................................................ 136
BACnet Point Naming Conventions ................................................... 136
Saving Time When Entering Point Names ........................................ 137
Point Addressing ............................................................................................... 138
Modular Series Point Addressing ...................................................... 138
Compact Series Point Addressing ..................................................... 138
MEC Point Addressing ....................................................................... 139
Point Status ....................................................................................................... 140
Point Priority/Command Priority ........................................................................ 141
BACnet Priority Array ......................................................................... 143
Point Values or State......................................................................................... 144
Point Type Attributes ................................................................................................... 145
Point Name ........................................................................................................ 145
Point Type ......................................................................................................... 145
BACnet Implementation of Logical Point Types ................................................ 146
Point Descriptor ................................................................................................. 146
State Text .......................................................................................................... 146
Engineering Values ........................................................................................... 147
Engineering Units .............................................................................................. 147
Access Groups .................................................................................................. 147
Alarming 148
Totalize 148
Guidelines for Setting COV Limits for Totalized Points ..................... 148
Totalization of Analog Points ............................................................. 149
Totalization for Analog and Multistate Points .................................... 149
Totalized Point Report ....................................................................... 150
Point Address .................................................................................................... 150
6 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Other Digital Point Attributes ............................................................................. 151
Other Analog Point Attributes ............................................................................ 152
Slope and Intercept Calculations ...................................................................... 155
Point Attribute Matrix ......................................................................................... 156
Commanding Points .................................................................................................... 158
Releasing Points ............................................................................................... 158
State Text .......................................................................................................... 158
Monitoring Points ......................................................................................................... 158
Multiple Points ................................................................................................... 159
Keystroke Control .............................................................................................. 159
Point Database Procedures ........................................................................................ 160
Generating Point Logs and Reports .................................................................. 160
Displaying a Point Log ....................................................................... 160
Displaying a Point Log for Points on an FLN Device ......................... 161
Displaying Points by Point Status ...................................................... 162
Displaying Points by Point Priority ..................................................... 163
Displaying Points by BACnet Command Priority ............................... 165
Displaying Points by Type ................................................................. 166
Displaying the Totalized Value of a Point .......................................... 168
Displaying a Point Definition by Point Name ..................................... 169
Displaying a Point Definition by Address ........................................... 170
Displaying Unresolved Points ............................................................ 172
Commanding Point Values ................................................................................ 172
Commanding the Value of Analog Points .......................................... 172
Resetting the Totalized Value of a Point ........................................... 173
Defining Points .................................................................................................. 174
Adding a Physical Point ..................................................................... 174
Adding a Virtual Point ........................................................................ 176
Looking at a Point Definition ............................................................................. 177
Modifying a Point Definition ............................................................................... 178
Copying a Point Definition to a New Point ........................................................ 179
Deleting a Point from the Database .................................................................. 180
Changing the Command Priority ....................................................................... 180
Enabling or Disabling a Point ............................................................................ 181
Monitoring Points............................................................................................... 182
Displaying Points in the Point Monitor ............................................... 182
Starting the Point Monitor .................................................................. 182
Adding a Point to the Point Monitor ................................................... 183
Deleting a Point from the Point Monitor ............................................. 184
Removing All Points from the Point Monitor ...................................... 184
Acknowledging Point Alarms ............................................................................. 185
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices .................................................... 186
Communication on the MS/TP FLN ............................................................................. 186
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
7 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Two MS/TP FLN Connections Supported ......................................................... 187
Supported Network Types ........................................................................................... 187
MS/TP Device Name and MS/TP Device System Name ............................................ 188
BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) .......................................................... 188
BACnet Router Overview ............................................................................................ 189
FLN Device Applications ............................................................................................. 189
Default Output ................................................................................................... 189
Keep Alive Poll Rate .................................................................................................... 190
Initial Values Overview ................................................................................................ 190
Initial Values Example – BACnet TEC .............................................................. 190
Configuration at the FLN Device ....................................................................... 191
Storing the Initial Values at the Field Panel ...................................................... 191
Overriding Initial Values .................................................................................... 191
Restoring the Commanded Values of Points .................................................... 191
Initial Values Procedures................................................................................... 192
Displaying MS/TP Device Initial Values ............................................. 192
Releasing MS/TP Device Initial Values ............................................. 193
Setting MS/TP Device Initial Values .................................................. 193
Updating MS/TP Device Initial Values ............................................... 194
Restoring the Relinquish Default Values of an FLN Device .............. 195
Understanding BACnet TEC and PTEC Initial Values ...................................... 196
TEC Initial Values .............................................................................. 198
TEC Panel Initial Values .................................................................... 201
TEC Panel Update ............................................................................. 202
BACnet TEC Initial Value for EEPROM and RAM Points.................. 203
MS/TP Device Procedures .......................................................................................... 205
Adding a Master MS/TP or BACnet/IP FLN Device to the MS/TP FLN ............ 205
Adding a Slave MS/TP Device to the MS/TP FLN ............................................ 207
Removing an MS/TP Device From the MS/TP FLN .......................................... 208
Copying an MS/TP Device ................................................................................ 209
Modifying an MS/TP Device On the MS/TP FLN .............................................. 210
Discovering FLN Devices .................................................................................. 210
Restarting Device Discovery .............................................................. 212
MS/TP Device Reports ................................................................................................ 213
Displaying an MS/TP Device Report ................................................................. 213
Displaying an MS/TP Look Report .................................................................... 215
Displaying an MS/TP Device Definition Report ................................................. 217
Displaying an MS/TP Log Report ...................................................................... 218
Displaying an MS/TP Device Subpoint Log ...................................................... 219
Chapter 6—Alarm Management ..............................................................................221
Alarm Basics ................................................................................................................ 221
Reporting Alarms with Notification Classes ...................................................... 222
Alarm Priority ..................................................................................................... 223
8 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Alarm Acknowledgement .................................................................................. 223
Alarm Messages................................................................................................ 223
Tokens in Message Text ................................................................................... 224
Why Should I Define Points as Alarmable?................................................................. 225
Types of Alarming........................................................................................................ 226
Supported Events .............................................................................................. 226
CHANGE_OF_STATE ....................................................................... 227
COMMAND_FAILURE ....................................................................... 227
FLOATING_LIMIT .............................................................................. 228
OUT_OF_RANGE .............................................................................. 229
Intrinsic Alarming ............................................................................................... 230
Objects Using Intrinsic Alarming ........................................................ 230
Proof Delay for Unbundled Points ..................................................... 231
Event Enrollment (Algorithmic Alarming) .......................................................... 231
Using Intrinsic Alarming ............................................................................................... 232
Adding an Intrinsic Alarm .................................................................................. 232
Acknowledging Alarms ...................................................................................... 233
Status of a Point ................................................................................................ 234
Displaying an Intrinsic Alarm Report ................................................................. 235
Removing an Intrinsic Alarm ............................................................................. 236
Using Algorithmic Alarming ......................................................................................... 237
Adding Algorithmic Alarms ................................................................................ 237
Acknowledging Algorithmic Alarms ................................................................... 239
Displaying Algorithmic Alarms ........................................................................... 240
Displaying an Event Enrollment Log ................................................................. 242
Displaying an Event Enrollment Report ............................................................ 243
Removing Algorithmic Alarms ........................................................................... 244
Alarm Counters ............................................................................................................ 244
Uploading Alarm Buffer History to the Workstation ..................................................... 245
Setting up Alarm Buffering ................................................................................ 245
Buffer and Send all Alarms to the Workstation ................................................. 245
Chapter 7—License Management........................................................................... 247
License Manager ......................................................................................................... 247
How does License Manager Work? .................................................................. 247
Ordering and Installing Licenses ................................................................................. 247
Displaying the License Manager Report ..................................................................... 248
Installing a License ...................................................................................................... 249
Removing Licenses ..................................................................................................... 250
Chapter 8—Trending .............................................................................................. 251
Background Information .............................................................................................. 251
Why Trend HVAC Devices? .............................................................................. 251
What Devices Can be Trended? ....................................................................... 251
Using BACnet Trend.................................................................................................... 251
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
9 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Local Trending ................................................................................................... 252
Remote Trending ............................................................................................... 252
Trend Log Enable/Disable ................................................................................. 252
BACnet Trend Log Buffer .................................................................................. 252
Trend Log Buffer Reset...................................................................... 252
Trend Log Buffer Notification Threshold ............................................ 253
Unresolved Points .............................................................................. 253
Resetting the Trend Log Buffer for A Trend Record .......................... 253
Trending Best Practices .................................................................................... 253
BACnet Trending and Third-Party Device Limitations ...................................... 254
Off-Node Trending ............................................................................................. 254
Unresolved Points In Off-Node Trend Logs ....................................... 255
Trending Diagram ........................................................................................................ 256
Generating Trending Logs and Reports ...................................................................... 257
Displaying a Trend Log Report ......................................................................... 257
Displaying a Trend Data Report ........................................................................ 258
Displaying a Trend Edit Look Report ................................................................ 261
Trending a Point by Change of Value (COV) .............................................................. 264
Trend Procedures ........................................................................................................ 267
Modifying a Trend .............................................................................................. 267
Deleting Trend Log Objects .............................................................................. 269
Disabling Trend Logging ................................................................................... 270
Enabling Trend Logging .................................................................................... 272
Resetting the Trend Buffer ................................................................................ 274
Copying a Trend ................................................................................................ 275
Trending a Point by Time Interval................................................................................ 277
BACnet COV Poll Period Overview ............................................................................. 280
BACnet Trend Log Enable/Disable ............................................................................. 280
Example - Unresolved Point in Remote Trend Log ..................................................... 280
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor..........................................................................................282
PPCL Editor Concepts ................................................................................................. 282
PPCL Program Attributes .................................................................................. 282
PPCL Program Attributes .................................................................................. 282
Point Names in PPCL Programs ....................................................................... 283
Point Names in PPCL Programs ....................................................................... 283
Comment Lines ................................................................................................. 284
Creating a Notepad at the Field Panel with PPCL Comment Lines .. 285
PPCL Line Status Indicators ............................................................................. 285
PPCL Assist ...................................................................................................... 286
Manual Programming......................................................................... 286
Accelerator Key Refresher ................................................................................ 286
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports ............................................................ 287
Displaying a List of PPCL Programs ................................................................. 287
10 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Displaying a PPCL Program ............................................................................. 288
Displaying Unresolved Points in PPCL ............................................................. 289
The Effects of Program Changes ................................................................................ 292
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures ................................................................... 292
Adding PPCL Program Lines ............................................................................ 292
Modifying PPCL Program Lines ........................................................................ 293
Copying PPCL Programs .................................................................................. 294
Deleting PPCL Program Lines .......................................................................... 295
Searching for Specific Program Code ............................................................... 296
Enabling or Disabling PPCL Program Lines ..................................................... 297
Clearing Program Trace Bits ............................................................................. 297
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) ............................................................. 299
What is PDL? ............................................................................................................... 299
Will PDL Help My Facility? .......................................................................................... 299
Basic PDL Functions ................................................................................................... 300
Principal of Operation ........................................................................................ 300
PDL Specific Attributes ................................................................................................ 301
Meter Inputs ...................................................................................................... 301
Maximum Number of Meters ............................................................................. 301
Meter Areas ....................................................................................................... 301
Type of Load Points Controlled ......................................................................... 301
Shedding and Restoring .................................................................................... 302
Setpoint (Demand Limit) Definition ................................................................... 302
Prediction Method ............................................................................................. 302
Warning Messages............................................................................................ 302
Database Requirements (Per Meter Area) ....................................................... 302
PPCL Statements Required for PDL ........................................................................... 303
Single Field Panel PDL ..................................................................................... 303
Multiple Field Panel PDL ................................................................................... 303
PPCL Commands.............................................................................................. 303
PDL
............................................................................................ 304
PDLDAT ............................................................................................ 304
PDLMTR ............................................................................................ 306
PDLSET ............................................................................................ 306
PDLDPG ............................................................................................ 307
PDL Activity Report ..................................................................................................... 307
Generating a PDL Activity Report ..................................................................... 308
Billing Period Summary Section ........................................................................ 309
24-Hour Summary Section ................................................................................ 309
Demand vs. Time Plot ....................................................................................... 310
Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) ......................................................................... 310
Important Notes and Cautions on PDL Operation ....................................................... 311
Examples of PDL Applications .................................................................................... 312
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
11 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Point List ............................................................................................ 313
Example PPCL Code ......................................................................... 313
Application Notes ............................................................................... 314
Notes for Field Panel 1A .................................................................... 315
Notes for Field Panel 2A .................................................................... 315
Notes for Field Panel 1B .................................................................... 315
Notes for Field Panel 2B .................................................................... 317
Notes for Field Panel 3B .................................................................... 317
Point List ............................................................................................ 319
Additional/Modified for Example PPCL Code in Field Panel 1B ........ 319
Appendix A—Point Types ........................................................................................322
Changes To HMI Prompting For BACnet/IP ................................................................ 322
Changes To HMI Prompting For Super Universal Points ............................................ 322
Adding a Logical Analog Output Point ......................................................................... 322
Adding a Logical Analog Input Point ........................................................................... 324
Adding an LAI Point to a Compact Series Controller ........................................ 327
Adding a Logical Pulsed Accumulator Point ................................................................ 328
Adding a Logical Digital Output Point .......................................................................... 330
Adding a Logical Digital Input Point ............................................................................. 331
Adding a Logical 2-State Latched Point ...................................................................... 332
Adding a Logical 2-State Pulsed Point ........................................................................ 333
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Latched Point ......................................................... 334
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Pulsed Point........................................................... 336
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Latched Point .................................................. 337
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Pulsed Point.................................................... 339
Adding a Logical Enumerated Point ............................................................................ 340
Appendix B—Default State Text Table .....................................................................342
Appendix C—Error Message Types .........................................................................396
Format of E-code and R-code Error Messages ........................................................... 396
Field Panel (E-code) Error Codes ............................................................................... 396
PPCL (R-code) Error Codes ........................................................................................ 401
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units ..........................................402
12 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
How this Manual Is Organized
How to Use This Manual
This manual is for users of TALON building control systems that use the HumanMachine Interface (HMI) to command, configure, and monitor field panels.
How this Manual Is Organized
This manual contains the following sections in the following order:
How to Use this Manual provides an overview of the manual and explains field panel
software conventions and the documentation conventions used throughout the manual.
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface explains how to use the common functions of the
Human Machine Interface (HMI).
Chapter 2—System Setup describes the viewing and setup of system-related
parameters.
Chapter 3—User Accounts describes the attributes and functions of user accounts.
Chapter 4—Point Database describes points, their characteristics, and the procedures
that are used to add, view, modify, and delete them.
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices describes the interaction and
functionality between BACnet capable Compact controllers and MS/TP (FLN) devices.
Chapter 6—Alarm Management describes alarming functions.
Chapter 7—License Management describes the concept of field panel licenses, and
how they are added.
Chapter 8—Trending describes the setup and function of trending points.
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor describes editing of the Powers Process Control Language
(PPCL).
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting describes the use and function of Peak Demand
Limiting (PDL).
Appendix A—Point Types contains samples of entering each point type into the
system.
Appendix B—Default State Text Table Listing contains a list of the default state text
tables.
Appendix C—Error Message Types contains a list of all the error messages in the
system.
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units contains a list of pre-defined
engineering units accepted by BACnet/IP.
Prerequisites
In addition to this user's manual, you should also be familiar with the following
documentation:
● TALON Powers Process Control Language (PPCL) User's Manual (588-583),
describes the Powers Process Control Language (PPCL) used to write the control
programs.
● TALON Wiring Guidelines Manual (588-581), describes general wiring
requirements for installation and communications wiring guidelines for various
network systems and equipment.
● TC Modular Series Owner's Manual (588-781), describes the operation of TC
Modular Controllers.
● TC Compact Series Owner's Manual (588-682), describes the operation of TC
Compact Controllers.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
13 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Symbols Used in this Manual
Symbols Used in this Manual
The following table lists the safety symbols used in this manual to draw attention to
important information.
Symbol
Meaning
Description
NOTICE
CAUTION
Equipment damage may occur if a procedure or instruction is not
followed as specified. (For online documentation, the NOTICE displays
in white with a blue background.)
CAUTION
Minor or moderate injury may occur if a procedure or instruction is not
followed as specified.
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage may occur if a procedure or
instruction is not followed as specified.
DANGER
Electric shock, death, or severe property damage may occur if a
procedure or instruction is not followed as specified.
Document Conventions
The following table lists conventions to help you use this manual in a quick and
efficient manner.
Convention
Examples
Numbered Lists (1, 2, 3…) indicate a
procedure with sequential steps.
1. Turn OFF power to the field panel.
2. Turn ON power to the field panel.
3. Contact the local Siemens Solution Partner, Authorized
TALON Dealer.
Conditions that must be completed or met
before beginning a task are designated with a
⊳.
Intermediate results (what will happen
following the execution of a step), are
designated with a ⇨.
Results, which inform the user that a task was
completed successfully, are designated with a
⇨.
⊳Composer software is properly installed.
⊳A Valid license is available.
1. Select Start > Programs > Siemens > GMS >
Composer.
⇨The Project Management window displays.
2. Open an existing project or create a new one.
⇨The project window displays.
Actions that should be performed are specified Type F for Field panels.
in boldface font.
Click OK to save changes and close the dialog box.
Error and system messages are displayed in
Courier New font.
14 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
The message Report Definition successfully
renamed displays in the status bar.
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
New Terminology
Convention
Examples
New terms appearing for the first time are
italicized.
The field panel continuously executes a user-defined set
of instructions called the control program.
This symbol signifies Notes. Notes provide additional
information or helpful hints.
Cross references to other information are
indicated with an arrow and the page number,
enclosed in brackets: [→92]
For more information on creating flowcharts, see
Flowcharts [→92].
Placeholders indicate text that can vary based Type A C D H [username] [field panel #].
on your selection. Placeholders are specified
by italicized letters, and enclosed with brackets
[ ].
Convention
Example
Sample screens and reports are displayed in Courier Report names and any information presented in
New font.
screen shots.
New terms appearing for the first time in the manual
are italicized.
A background graphic is the basic drawing of the
building control system.
Short cut keys are specified as <key> + <key>
Move to previous prompt by pressing CTRL+L.
Angle brackets <placeholder> indicate text that can
vary based on your selection.
If you select Hours, Days, Weeks or Months from
the Time Period list, specify a parameter in the # of
<units> box.
New Terminology
To more closely reflect current technology, the following new terms are used in this
document:
Automation Level Network (ALN)
The Building Automation Level Network (BLN) is now called the Automation Level
Network. However, all firmware prompt strings continue to use the BLN abbreviation.
Field Level Network (FLN)
The Floor Level Network (FLN) is now called the Field Level Network.
Procedures
Field panel procedures are performed by the user to complete specific tasks when
working with field panel(s). In this manual, all procedures begin with a brief description
and end with a screen shot showing the HMI commands used to execute the
procedure.
Most procedures include a special table designed to aid the user in completing the
steps. Procedures with fewer steps may be shown in a simplified format.
Example - Simple Procedure
This example shows the simplified procedure format. The procedure does not require
additional instructions.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
15 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Procedures
Displaying a Trend Log Report
This procedure allows the selection of points for inclusion in a trend log. If no points are
being trended, the report is blank.
To access the report, follow the prompts.
HMI
P, T, L (Point, Trend, Log)
Example
>Point name : -------------------------------------------09/15/1997 MON TREND LOG REPORT 08:56pm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:*>
Point name
:Suffix (Description) Trend every Samples
------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.MAT (MIXED AIR TEMP) Point COV 100
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP) 2.0 DEG F COV 100
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN) 10 Minutes 10
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? –
Example - Long Procedure
This procedure contains many steps and requires numerous entries. You may benefit
from additional information provided in the table that contains the steps.
Trending a Point by Change of Value (COV)
This procedure adds a point to trending and records data by change of value (COV).
Before you start this procedure, determine the points to trend, as well as the maximum
number of samples.
To trend a point by COV, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, T, E, A (Point, Trend, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the point name.
Description
Type ?, and then type the point
name with wildcard(s).
16 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
To query available points.
NOTE: For ALN points only, type ?.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in a list. If the
item (point name/trend) you want is not in the list,
press ENTER again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the corresponding number
from the list.
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Procedures
To select multiple points for the same trend
CAUTION: When wildcards are used for multi point
trend addition, the trend add operation occurs globally
across the network on every point matching the
description.
Specify a point range using
wildcards.
NOTE: If you select a multi-point trend, you must verify
that you want to perform a multi-point trend by typing Y
(Yes) at the Multi point trend. Are you sure (Y/N)
prompt.
COV, Time
C
For COV.
Maximum number of samples
Specify the maximum number of
samples you want collected.
NOTE: The maximum number of samples limit is 2,500
if trending one point, and 100 if trending two or more
points. If you exceed the maximum number of
samples, the prompt displays again.
Trend log instance number
Type a BACnet object instance
number between 0 through
4194303.
Press ENTER to automatically assign the next
available instance number to this trend log object.
Trend log name
Type a name for the trend log.
Press ENTER to automatically assign a name in the
following format:
APO_<DeviceInstance>_TL_<ObjectInstance>
Trend log description
Type a description for the trend
log.
Enable start date/time (Y/N)
Y
To set a starting date and time for this trend and then
continue with next step.
N
To start the trend immediately and then proceed to the
Enable stop date/time (Y/N) prompt.
Start date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter a starting date for this trend
in the MM/DD/YYYY format
Start time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter a starting time for this trend
in the HH:MM:SS format
Enable stop date/time (Y/N)
Y
To set an ending date and time for this trend and then
continue with next step.
N
To let the trend run continuously after the starting
date/time and then proceed to Notification threshold
count prompt.
Stop date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter an ending date for this
trend in the MM/DD/YYYY format.
Stop time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter an ending time for this
trend in the HH:MM:SS format.
Trend log enabled (Y/N)
Y
Enable trend log.
N
Disable trend log.
Y
To stop trending once the maximum number of
samples is reached.
N
To continue trending after the log is full by writing over
existing trend samples.
Stop when full (Y/N)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
17 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Procedures
Notification threshold count
Type a value between 1 and the
maximum number of samples for
this trend.
Press ENTER to accept the default (80 percent of the
maximum number of samples).
Notification class number
Type a value between 0 through
4194302
or press ENTER to accept the
default (0).
Specify the field panel that will receive the notification
threshold alarm.
NOTE: The Notification Class number must be
assigned to a field panel.
Field panel
Press ENTER.
Accept the field panel name supplied by the system.
Type a different field panel name. Specify the name of the field panel that will store the
trend log object
NOTE: The default field panel location is the field
panel that owns the point (or FLN of the device
subpoint) to which you are adding the trend.
The message <Point Name> is now trending by Change-Of-Value
successfully in field panel <field panel name> is displayed.
18 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Procedures
Example
>Point name : ? btec1:*---------------------------------> 1) BTEC1:CTLR ADDRESS
> 2) BTEC1:APPLICATION
> 3) BTEC1:RMTMP OFFSET
> 4) BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 5) BTEC1:HEAT.COOL
> 6) BTEC1:DAY CLG STPT
> 7) BTEC1:DAY HTG STPT
> 8) BTEC1:NGT CLG STPT
> 9) BTEC1:NGT HTG STPT
> 10) BTEC1:RM STPT MIN
> 11) BTEC1:RM STPT MAX
> 12) BTEC1:RM STPT DIAL
> 13) BTEC1:STPT DIAL
> 14) BTEC1:AUX TEMP AI3
> 15) BTEC1:FLOW START
> 16) BTEC1:FLOW END
> 17) BTEC1:WALL SWITCH
> 18) BTEC1:DI OVRD SW
> 19) BTEC1:OVRD TIME
> 20) BTEC1:NGT OVRD
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 4>Cov, Time : c
>Maximum number of samples : --->Trend log instance number : 123--->Trend log name : abc-------------------------->Trend log description : def------------>Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 4----->Notification class number : 0----->Field panel : 7020--BTEC1:ROOM TEMP is now trending by Change-Of-Value successfully in Field panel
<7020>
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
19 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Reports
Example - Multi-Point Trend Add
>Point name : btec*:room temp--------------------------->Multi point trend. Are you sure (Y/N): y
>Cov, Time : c
>Maximum number of samples : -->Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 4----->Notification class number : 0-----BTEC1:ROOM TEMP is now trending by Change-Of-Value successfully in Field panel
<7020>
BTEC2:ROOM TEMP is now trending by Change-Of-Value successfully in Field panel
<7020>
End of commanding
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Field Panel Identifier
The field panel identifier is a number or alphanumeric string that uniquely identifies a
field panel on the network(s). The format varies according to network type.
When specifying a field panel during a procedure, the correct identifier format must be
used.
BACnet field panels use a device instance number (0 to 4,194,302)
Reports
Many types of reports can be generated by the system. All share a basic format.
Following is an example of a Trend Log report. The header contains the date stamp,
the title of the report, and the timestamp:
09/15/1997 MON TREND LOG REPORT 04:42pm
------------------------------------------------------------------------
After the header, the criteria used to control the report output displays. In this example,
a wildcard was used to search for points.
Search for <*:>
20 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Applications
Following the criteria is the report data header, which identifies the type of data shown.
The field panel identifies the subpoints in applications as suffixes.
Point name
:Suffix (Description) Trend every Samples
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
The complete report looks like this:
12/01/2003 MON TREND LOG REPORT 04:42pm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:*>
Point name
:Suffix (Description) Trend every Samples
------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:ROOM TEMP (RM101 TEC RM TMP) 2.0 DEG F COV 100
5 Minutes 100
End of report
To Pause a Report Display
Some reports contain more information than can fit on the screen.
● To pause a report as it scrolls down the screen, press CTRL+S.
● Press any key to resume scrolling.
Applications
An application is a control sequence that performs one or more specific control
operations. Field panel applications include:
● PPCL programs
● FLN devices
● Equipment scheduling zones
PPCL programs can be applied to functions such as running an air handler, tuning a
loop, and controlling duty cycling equipment. These control sequences can reside as
individual PPCL programs and be viewed as independent applications, or they can be
grouped as parts of one PPCL program and viewed as a single application.
FLN devices provide control according to the program (application) loaded into a
particular device. Equipment scheduling provides time-based mode control for
specified areas (zones) in a facility.
Applications are different from other system functions, such as trending or point
monitoring, because they have specific attributes. Applications:
● Control points and subpoints.
● Maintain a unique set of points/subpoints related to the type of control performed.
● Use specific reports and editors in the field panel interface.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
21 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
How to Use This Manual
Applications
Default Value (DAY.NGT Point)
Many TEC applications have the subpoint DAY.NGT which corresponds to the
operating status of the application (whether it is in day mode or night mode). If you
query the system for a TEC point log report—without specifying any subpoint(s)—the
system returns the value of DAY.NGT. In this way, the status of DAY.NGT represents
the default value of the application.
22 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
Initial System Tasks
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
For information about the BACnet Field Panel Web Server and Siemens Launch Pad,
see the BACnet Field Panel Web Server User Guide (125-3584T) and Launch Pad
(145-1005T).
Chapter 1 explains how to use the common functions of the Human-Machine Interface
(HMI) and discusses the following topics:
● Initial System Tasks
– Displaying the System Time
– Sending a Message to Another Network Node
– Logging On to the Network
– Logging Off the Network
● Accelerator Keys
● Queries
– Query for Specific Point Type
● Wildcards
– Examples
– Commanding Points with Wildcards
– Using Wildcard Characters in a Query
● BACnet Object Identification
Initial System Tasks
You communicate with a field panel by connecting a terminal or a computer with
terminal emulation software to the human-machine interface (HMI) port.
When you first communicate with the field panel, the following menu is displayed:
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? –
The functions available from this menu allow you to display the current system time,
send a message to another node on the network, cancel a report, and log on to the
field panel.
Displaying the System Time
Use this procedure to verify the current system time and date. Type the letters T, D
(Time, Display). The field panel number, system time, and system date are displayed.
Example
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? T
>Display? D
Field panel 22055 15:53:26 12-04-03 WED
Sending a Message to Another Network Node
To send a message, type M, then the field panel identifier of the device to which you
want to send a message, and the message. (68 characters maximum, excluding [ ]*?:")
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? M
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
23 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
Accelerator Keys
>Send to : 5------------->Message : Hi there! This is a message for field panel 5-Command successful
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, Bye? –
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? M
>Send to : 13934------------------------>Message : This is a message for field panel 13934Command successful
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? –
Logging on to the Network
To log on, type H, the user initials for the account, and password (password keystrokes
are not echoed onscreen).
A time-stamped message indicates a successful login. Available functions are based
on the user’s level of access. User initials, user accounts, and access are described in
User Accounts.
Example
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? H
>Enter user initials : TAS>Enter user password : ???-----------14:20:04 07/09/2008 WED Logged on successfully Field panel
<13933>
User: <TAS> <System administrator user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? -
Logging Off the Network
To log off, type B, Y.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? B
>Are you sure (Y/N) : Y
14:20:04 07/09/2008 WED Logged on successfully Field panel
<13933>
User: <TAS> <System administrator user account>
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? –
Accelerator Keys
The term Accelerator Key is synonymous with keyboard shortcut.
24 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
Queries
To display a list of shortcuts, type ? at the HMI main menu:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye?
Accelerator Key Quick Reference
Task
Keys
Definition
Next line
ENTER
Accept default or selected entry
Previous line
CTRL+L
Move to previous prompt
Cancel
# (SHIFT+3)
Cancel current operation
Help
?
Access user help
Singlewild
?
Single character wildcard
Multiwild
* (SHIFT+8)
Multiple character wildcard
Home
CTRL+D
Move cursor to start of current field
End
CTRL+F
Move cursor to end of current field
Cursor left
CTRL+Q
Move cursor one character left in current field
Cursor right
CTRL+W
Move cursor one character right in current field
Delete left
CTRL+H
Delete character to the left of the cursor
Delete right
CTRL+J
Delete character to the right of the cursor
Delete to EOL
CTRL+K
Delete from current position to end of line
Delete field
CTRL+U
Delete current field’s input
Redisplay
CTRL+R
Redisplay current line
Toggle overstrike
CTRL+T
Toggles the overstrike/insert
Define string
CTRL+P
Define string in paste buffer
Insert string
CTRL+I
Insert paste buffer at current position
Pause
CTRL+S
Pause screen
Resume
any key
Resume screen scrolling
Hold alarms
CTRL+A
Stop alarms for 30 seconds
Autodial bye
CTRL+B
Disconnect from Autodial
Autodial extend
CTRL+X
Extend Autodial time out to 20 minutes
Queries
To query the system, type ? and then press ENTER. The system returns the results in
the form of a numbered list.
Example
In this example, a query is used at the Point name prompt. At the end of this example,
the user would type 1 or 2 to select their choice from the list.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? P
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? D
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
25 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
Queries
>Value, Total, Priorityarray, Definition, Unresolvedname? T
>Point name : ?-----------------------------------------1) BLD990.AHU01.RFN
2) BLD990.AHU01.SFN
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> -Queries can also be used in conjunction with a wildcard character (*).
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? P
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? L
>Point name : ? BLD990.FLR01.ZON*-----------------------1) BLD990.FLR01.ZON:MODE
2) BLD990.FLR01.ZON.OCS
3) BLD990.FLR01.ZON.OHS
4) BLD990.FLR01.ZON.TMP
5) BLD990.FLR01.ZON.VCS
6) BLD990.FLR01.ZON.VHS
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> --
NOTE:
Queries can only display up to 20 items at a time on the screen. If the item you need
is not in the list, you can press ENTER again to display the next 20 items.
Query for a Specific Point Type
NOTE:
Not all prompts provide a query option.
In some cases, the exact name of a point might be unknown, but another attribute,
such as the state or priority, is known. The following example uses a query to display
all points in the HAND state:
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? P
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? D
>Value, Total, Priorityarray, Definition, Unresolvedname? V
>Any, aLarm, Unacked, Hand, Failed, Disabled, Priority, tYpe,
tRouble? H
>Point name : ?-----------------------------------------1) !MOD220-55:Address
26 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
Wildcards
2) BLD990.AHU01.OAD
3) BLD990.AHU01.RFN
4) BLD990.AHU01.SFN
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> --
Wildcards
A wildcard is used to represent one or more characters. Use wildcards when you want
to allow any character in their place (for example, during a filename search). Wildcards
provide versatility when searching for, displaying, or commanding more than one point.
The two wildcard characters available are:
● The asterisk (*), which can represent multiple characters.
● The question mark (?), which represents a single character.
NOTE:
In order for wildcarding to be effective, it is important for a point naming convention to
be used consistently throughout the system. Point naming conventions are described
in the Point Database section.
Wildcard Examples
If used appropriately, wildcards can improve the effectiveness of point displays and
commands.
Using the Asterisk Wildcard
To specify all points, enter the following:
>Point name : *----------------------------------------To specify all points starting with BLD990.AHU01, enter the following:
>Point name : BLD990.AHU01.*---------------------------To specify all points ending with SENSOR, enter the following:
>Point name : *sensor----------------------------------Using the Question Mark Wildcard
To specify all outside air damper points in any AHU (such as AHU01 through AHU09),
you can type the following:
>Point name : AHU??-----------------------------------To specify all day setpoints on seven different floors in building 12 (such as
BLD12.FLR05.DAYSP), you can type something like the following:
>Point name : BLD12.FLR0?.DAYSP--------------------------
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
27 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
BACnet Object Identification
Commanding Points with Wildcards
CAUTION
Exercise caution when using wildcards.
An incorrectly specified wildcard operation can affect points globally across the
network and may cause serious unintended consequences.
In some cases, a wildcard command can save time. For example, when the points in a
field panel have been configured, all those points can be released to NONE priority
using a wildcard.
Using Wildcard Characters in a Query
Queries and wildcards are mixed together to further define points to display or
command. Enter the query character ?, followed by a space, followed by the wildcard
character(s).
Example
The following query will display all points ending with “TEMP”:
>Point name : ? *TEMP-----------------------------------
BACnet Object Identification
What is a BACnet Object?
A BACnet object is a set of properties, behaviors and requirements that represent a
physical or virtual entity in the controlled system. In the TALON Automation System, a
BACnet object may represent a point, a schedule, a field panel, or a TALON View
workstation, among others.
What is a BACnet Device?
A BACnet device is a special class of BACnet object that contains other BACnet
objects and represents a physical device on the BACnet network. In the TALON
Automation System, a BACnet device will not represent a point, but may represent a
field panel, TALON View workstation, or third-party device.
How are BACnet Objects Identified?
Each BACnet object is uniquely identified within the device that contains it.
A BACnet device is identified uniquely throughout the BACnet network.
Every BACnet object has:
● A unique object name within the device that contains it
● An object type
● A unique object instance number within the device that contains it
28 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
BACnet Field Panel Web Server and Launch Pad
Object Name
Each object within a BACnet device must have a name that is unique within the device.
Object names are case-sensitive.
Object Type
The object type identifies the set of properties, behaviors, and requirements for an
object. Many object types correspond directly with points. See the BACnet
Implementation of Logical Point Types [➙ 146] section in Chapter 4 – Point Database
for the available object types.
Object Instance Number
An identifying number that is unique:
● Throughout the BACnet network (for a device), or
● For one object type within the host device (for other objects).
Object Identifier
Each object within a BACnet device must have an identifier that is unique within the
device, consisting of its object type and object instance number.
Example
An Analog Output object in a device might have the following identifiers:
● Object Type: AO (01)
● Object Instance Number: 0002
In this case, the encoded name is BAC_xx_AO_2, (where xx is the device ID).
BACnet Field Panel Web Server and Launch Pad
The BACnet Field Panel Web Server is enabled by using one of the following licenses:
● License to enable BACnet Web Server (TC-36) or Web Services (TC-16/24), LSMFPWEB.T.
● License to enable any Siemens ALN controller to supply the host controller with
data for FIN Builder graphics, LSM-FPWEBPL.T.
● License to enable a TC Modular or TC-36 to host FIN Builder graphics, LSMFPWEBPLHST.T.
See the BACnet Field Panel Web Server User Guide (125-3584T) and the Siemens
Launch Pad User Guide (145-1005) for more detailed information.
BACnet Field Panel Web Server Overview
BACnet Field Panel Web Server User Interface (Web Server or FPWeb UI) includes all
the applications a facility operator needs to easily configure, monitor, and control the
TALON® Automation System.
All of the files that make up the FPWeb UI are loaded onto a field panel (TC Modular or
TC-36) and accessed through a browser running Adobe Flash. The files can also be
loaded onto a computer and accessed through Launch Pad, which is an Adobe AIRbased application. Because the same files are accessed either through the Web
browser (if deployed to a Siemens TC Modular or TC-36) or when installed on a
computer with Launch Pad (the files are installed automatically with the installation of
Launch Pad) the FPWeb UI accessed through Launch Pad is identical to the FPWeb
UI accessed through a browser.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
29 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
BACnet Field Panel Web Server and Launch Pad
In order to access the BACnet Field Panel Web Server User Interface through a
browser, the files must be deployed to a TC Modular or TC-36 controller. Due to space
constraints, the Web Server User Interface cannot be deployed to a TC‑16 or TC‑24
Compact controller.
However any TC controller can be accessed directly using the Launch Pad software,
without the need to deploy the Web UI user interface to the controller. See the
Siemens Launch Pad User Guide (145-1005) for information on installing or upgrading
the BACnet Field Panel Web Server Embedded User Interface (UI) Client Application
using the Launch Pad Web Server Deployment feature. Once deployed to a panel on
the network, the user interface can be accessed from any compatible Web browser
(see the Browser Requirements section).
Through the User Interface, you can access and interact with any BACnet IP-enabled
controller in the network that is Web-enabled, including TC‑16 and TC‑24 controllers.
Siemens FINlite Graphics Tool
The Siemens FINlite Graphics Tool is a graphic utility program that can be used to
create, modify, animate, and save graphics files for field panels, which are Web
licensed (LSM-FPWEB.T, LSM-FPWEBPL.T, or LSM-FPWEBPLHST.T), and are used
with the Web Server Graphics View.
For more information, see Chapter 12 - FINlite Graphics Tool.
Launch Pad Overview
Launch Pad provides easy access to the applications required for configuring,
monitoring, and controlling the Building Automation System. It includes the BACnet
Field Panel Web User Interface (FPWeb UI) as standard. During the installation of
Launch Pad (an Adobe AIR application), the FPWeb UI files are automatically installed
on the hard drive.
If the FPWeb UI files are deployed to a field panel (Siemens Modular or Compact 36),
the same FPWeb UI files are loaded onto the field panel and can be accessed through
a Web browser. Hence the FPWeb UI is identical when accessed through Launch Pad
or through a browser. Accessing the FPWeb UI through Launch Pad does provide a
cleaner look. For more information about the FPWeb UI functionality (managing trends,
schedules, points, PPCL programs, and more), see the BACnet Field Panel Web
Server User Guide (125-3584T).
The Launch Pad also allows you to deploy the Application MC tool to a field panel, load
licenses, add shortcuts to other applications, and access user documentation.
General Description
The Siemens Launch Pad is an Adobe AIR-based application that allows you to do the
following:
● Launch Adobe AIR-based FPWeb UI which allows you to interact with Siemens
Ethernet BACnet Field Panels with Web Services enabled, and provides a more
intuitive user interface for database interaction in comparison to line-by-line
command prompts.
● Deploy browser-based FPWeb UI to field panels.
● Deploy browser-based Application MC to field panels.
● Deploy licenses to field panels.
● Add shortcut buttons so that other commonly-used Building Automation System
applications are easily accessible and can be launched from Launch Pad.
30 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 1—The Operator Interface
BACnet Field Panel Web Server and Launch Pad
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
31 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Daylight Saving Time
Chapter 2—System Setup
Chapter 2 describes the functionality of:
● Daylight Saving Time (DST)
● Using the BACnet Address Table
● BACnet Command Priorities
● System Error Messages
● Field panels
● Ethernet/IP Procedures
● Disk Commands and Procedures
● State Text Commands and Procedures
● Notifications
NOTE:
System privilege levels determine the functionality available to each user. Many
commands and menu branches documented as part of the HMI are only available to
higher levels of user access or in specific firmware revisions.
Before You Begin
Before using the information in this section, you should have a working understanding
of the following concepts:
● HVAC equipment of the facility.
● Point database.
● General knowledge of the TALON Automation System.
● Familiarity with the BACnet protocol.
Daylight Saving Time
The Daylight Saving Time (DST) functionality adjusts the system time to match the
Daylight Saving Time changeover. If your area uses Daylight Saving Time, this feature
offers a convenient method to automatically adjust the system clock. To set up the
DST functionality, the changeover date and times must first be defined. The field panel
can set up these dates automatically, or you can choose to define these entries
separately.
HMI
S, S (System, dSt)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? s
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? -
Displaying the DST Report
This procedure displays the Daylight Saving Time (DST) change-over time/date pairs.
32 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Daylight Saving Time
HMI
S, S, D (System, dSt, Display)
Example
12/03/2003 WED
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
REPORT
07:06pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Start Date
End Date
----------------------------------------------------------------------------02:00am 04/06/1997
02:00am 10/26/1997
02:00am 04/05/1998
02:00am 10/25/1998
02:00am 04/04/1999
02:00am 10/31/1999
02:00am 04/02/2000
02:00am 10/29/2000
02:00am 04/01/2001
02:00am 10/28/2001
02:00am 04/07/2002
02:00am 10/27/2002
02:00am 04/06/2003
02:00am 10/26/2003
02:00am 04/04/2004
02:00am 10/31/2004
02:00am 04/03/2005
02:00am 10/30/2005
02:00am 04/02/2006
02:00am 10/29/2006
End of report
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? –
Adding a Date and Time Pair to DST
This procedure adds a Daylight Saving Time (DST) change-over date and time pair to
the system calendar.
HMI
S, S, A (System, dSt, Add)
The system prompts for date and time information to define the DST parameters. All
prompts use the date and time formats as defined in the user account.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? A
>Calendar, Dst, Quit? D
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? A
>Start Date (MM/DD/YYYY)
: 4/7/2003-->Start Time (HH:MMAP)
: 2:00AM--->End Date (MM/DD/YYYY)
: 10/26/2003>End Time (HH:MMAP)
: 2:00AM----
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
33 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Daylight Saving Time
Command successful
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? –
Removing a Date and Time Pair from DST
This procedure removes a specific Daylight Saving Time (DST) change-over date and
time pair from the system calendar.
HMI
S, S, R (System, dSt, Remove)
The following example shows how to remove the DST date/time pair for the year 2003:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? A
>Calendar, Dst, Quit? D
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? R
>Year (1959 - 2048)
: 2003
Command successful
Removing All Date and Time Pairs from DST
This procedure removes all specific Daylight Saving Time (DST) change-over
time/date pairs from the system calendar. By using this procedure, Daylight Saving
Time is removed from the system.
HMI
S, S, M (System, dSt, reMoveall))
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? A
>Calendar, Dst, Quit? D
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? M
>Are you sure (Y/N)
: Y
Command successful
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? –
Adding a Default Set of DST Date and Time Pairs
This procedure adds a set of Daylight Saving Time (DST) change-over date/time pairs.
The effective dates are calculated for the ten years following the current system date.
34 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
BACnet Command Priorities
HMI
S, S, F (System, dSt, deFault))
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? A
>Calendar, Dst, Quit? D
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? F
>Are you sure (Y/N)
: Y
Command successful
>Display, Add, Remove, reMoveall, deFault, Quit? –
BACnet Command Priorities
Modifying the BACnet Command Priorities
Use this procedure to modify a command priority setting (Operator, Smoke,
Emergency, Schedule, PDL, or PPCL). For more information on BACnet command
priorities, see the Point Database [➙ 129] chapter of this manual.
HMI
S, B, P, M (System, Bacnet, Priorities, Modify)
From the Oper, Smoke, Emer, PDL prompt, select a command priority to modify (by
typing the desired letter), then enter the new value (or press ENTER to retain the
current value).
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? b
>Priorities, Addresses, objectId, Rpm, Quit? p
>Modify, Display, Quit? M
>Oper, Smoke, Emer, PdL
: s
>SMOKE priority slot (OPER-EMER): 11
>Are you sure (Y/N)
: y
Command successful
>Modify, Display, Quit? -
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
35 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Using the BACnet Address Table
Using the BACnet Address Table
The BACnet Address Table helps to identify third-party BACnet devices that don’t
properly respond to Who-Is or Who-Has queries on the BACnet network. These
devices must be manually added to the local field panel Address Table. See Adding an
Object to the BACnet Address Table in this section.
NOTE:
There are two possible BACnet/IP addressing systems: Fixed IP addressing
(manually assigned IP addresses) and Dynamic IP addressing (IP addresses
automatically assigned by a host database).
Displaying the BACnet Address Table Report
This procedure displays the local Address Table report, which contains the BACnet
address settings of all objects in the global Address Table.
HMI
S, B, A, D (System, Bacnet, Addresses, Display)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? b
>Priorities, Addresses, objectId, Rpm, Quit? a
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? d
01/16/2006 MON
ADDRESS TABLE
REPORT
06:25pm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------->Device Instance Number : 7200
>Device Name
: BLDG1:West:BBLN2
>Object Instance Number : 3
>Object Type
: AI
>Object Name
: BBLN2:LAI3
>MAC Address
: 199.249.3.12
>Network number
:
>Advanced settings
:
End of report
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? –
Configuring a Node on a Remote Network
Use this procedure to add a remote BACnet device to the node table.
36 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Using the BACnet Address Table
To configure a node on a remote network, add the device to the node table. If the local
field panel cannot receive an I-Am from the node, add the corresponding address to
the address table and be sure to specify:
● The same device instance number you used in the previous step.
● The remote network number where the device resides.
Deleting BACnet Objects from the Address Table
Use this procedure to delete a BACnet object from the Address Table.
HMI
S, B, A, E (System, Bacnet, Addresses, dElete)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? b
>Priorities, Addresses, objectId, Quit? a
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? e
>Device Instance Number : 7200
>Object Instance Number : 7049
>Object Type
: AO
Command successful
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? -
Configuring the BACnet Address Table
The BACnet Address Table integrates with third-party BACnet devices that are not BTL
compliant in one or more of the following ways. The third-party device does not:
● Support Who-Is/I-Am (or does this incorrectly)
● Respond with the APDU timeout specified in its device object (or does not respond
when reading the APDU timeout)
● Support Who-Has/I-Have (or does this incorrectly)
This procedure adds one object reference to the BACnet address table, which allows
devices to share object information with non-standard third-party BACnet devices. The
APDU timeout value is also configurable.
Adding an Object to the Address Table
Use this procedure to add an object to the device Address Table.
HMI
S, B, A, A (System, Bacnet, Addresses, Add)
Example
An AI object is added to the Address Table of device 7200 in this example.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
37 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Using the BACnet Address Table
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? b
>Priorities, Addresses, objectId, Rpm, Quit? a
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? a
>Device Instance Number : 7200
>Device Name
: BLDG1:West:BBLN2
>Object Instance Number : 3
>Object Type
: AI
>Object Name
: BBLN2:LAI3
>MAC Address
: <press enter>
>Network number
: <press enter>
>Advanced settings
: <press enter>
Command successful
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? –
Adding an Entry for Who-Is/I-Am
HMI
S, B, A, A (System, Bacnet, Addresses, Add)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? b
>Priorities, Addresses, objectId, Rpm, Quit? a
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? a
>Device Instance Number : 7010-->Device Name : ------>Object Instance Number : -------(leave blank*)
>MAC Address : -------(a unique address; numbers separated by
periods)
>Network Number : -------(enter network number)
>Advanced Settings : -------(**)
Command successful
*Object Instance Number is not required for who-is.
**The Advanced Settings prompt allows you to change the APDU time-out to the node.
You may either press ENTER to skip this step or you may enter the APDU time-out
value as ATO=xxx where xxx = milliseconds for the APDU time-out.
To Add an Entry for Who-Has/I-Have:
Same as above except skip Device Name by pressing ENTER, then provide the point
Object Instance number, the two-character point Object Type abbreviation, and the
point Object Name.
38 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Using the BACnet Address Table
Example
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? >Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? b
>Priorities, Addresses, objectId, Rpm, Quit? a
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? a
>Device Instance Number : 1----->Device Name : --(leave blank)
>Object Instance Number : 82---->Object Type : AI (two character point type abbreviation)
>Object Name : AUX TEMP AI5----------------------->MAC Address : --(leave blank)
>Network Number : --(leave blank)
>Advanced Settings : --(leave blank)
Command successful
>Display, Add, dElete, Quit? ->
Point Type abbreviations can be found in the following table:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Type Number
Abbreviation
Object Type
TALON Equivalent
00
AI
Analog Input Object
LAI
01
AO
Analog Output Object
LAO, LPACI
02
AV
Analog Value Object
Virtual LAI, LAO or LPACI
03
BI
Binary Input Object
LDI
04
BO
Binary Output Object
LDO, L2SL, L2SP
05
BV
Binary Value Object
Virtual LDI, LDO, L2SL, L2SP
06
CA
Calendar Object
Replaces Global Data: Calendar
07
CO
Command Object
Replaces Eqsched Command
Table
10
FI
File Object
Used for upload/download
13
MI
Multistate Input Object
Reports on third-party MIs of this
type.
14
MO
Multistate Output Object
LFSSL, LFSSP, LOOAL, LOOAP
19
MV
Multistate Value Object
LENUM
15
NC
Notification Class Object
Replaces Global Data:
Destinations
17
SC
Schedule Object
Replaces Eqsched Mode
Schedules
20
TL
Trend Log Object
Replaces TALON Trend
definition and data
User's Manual
39 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
System Error Messages
System Error Messages
A system error message is a notification from the system that an event has occurred in
one of the field panels. System error messages identify events such as a device on a
network failing or a user signing on or off the network.
Settings for Error Messages
Each error message has two settings. The first setting identifies the destination where
the error message displays. As a default, error messages display at field panels
defined in destination 0. The second setting concerns the dial-out status of the error
message, relevant only when the field panels in the destination have a modem. To
enable/disable dialing of system error messages, type S, E, and then E (Enable) or I
(dIsable) from the HMI main menu.
Displaying Error Message Text
This procedure displays the list of system error messages. This report also displays the
associated destination and dialing status for each system error message.
HMI
S, E, D (System, Error_msgs, Display)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Display, Replace, Quit? d
>Here, Printer
:
H
07/17/2008 THU
ERROR MESSAGE
REPORT
19:05
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Notification ID
Message
1
0 (YES)
Field panel FAILURE
2
0 (YES)
Field panel RETURN from failure
3
0 (YES)
DEVICE FAILURE in field panel
4
0 (YES)
DEVICE RETURN from failure in field
panel
5
0 (NO)
PPCL statement FAILURE
6
0 (NO)
PPCL statement RETURN from failure
7
0 (NO)
User login at field panel
8
0 (NO)
User logout at field panel
9
0 (NO)
Unsuccessful login attempt at field
panel
10
0 (NO)
Predicted demand above 90% for meter
area
40 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
11
0 (NO)
area
12
0 (NO)
area
13
0 (NO)
area
14
0 (NO)
15
0 (NO)
state
16
0 (NO)
17
0 (NO)
memory, try again
18
0 (NO)
variable
19
0 (NO)
20
0 (NO)
variable
21
0 (NO)
End of report
Predicted demand below 90% for meter
Predicted demand above 100% for meter
Predicted demand below 100% for meter
Loop Tuning finished
Tuning failed; could not reach steady
Auto tuning failed, check results
Tuning failed; check available
Tuning failed; constant process
Tuning failed; retry disturbance
Tuning failed; constant control
Loop Tuning started
>Display, Replace, Quit? -
Ethernet/IP Procedures
Procedures in this section are under the following HMI menu:
S, H, E (System, Hardware, Ethernet)
Displaying the Field Panel IP Settings
HMI
S, H, E, S, D (System, Hardware, Ethernet, ipSettings, Display)
Example
Ethernet Setup report for a BACnet/IP field panel
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? s
>Display, Modify, dhcpRelease, reNew, Quit? d
07/17/2008 THU
Ethernet Setup
Report
12:53
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Talon Names
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
41 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
Node name
: MOD220-55
Site name
: ZONE_2
BLN name
: BACBLN
IP Settings
DNS Suffix
:
DHCP
: Disabled
IP Address
: 172. 16. 19. 49
Netmask
: 255.255.254. 0
Gateway Address
: 172. 16. 19.254
DNS 1
:
0. 0. 0. 0
DNS 2
:
0. 0. 0. 0
DNS 3
:
0. 0. 0. 0
DNS 4
:
0. 0. 0. 0
Telnet Enabled
: Enabled
BACnet Device Settings
Device Instance Number
: 22055
Device Location
: ARCHIVES BASEMENT
Device Description
: BACnet PXC-Modular
Device Reserved Instance Base
: 10000
COV Resubscribe Period (min)
: 60
COV Poll Rate (sec)
: 60
BACnet IP ALN Settings
: Enabled
BACnet IP Network Number
: 1
UDP Port
: 47808
Act as a Foreign device
: NO
BACnet MSTP ALN Settings
: Disabled
(Note When FLN is MS/TP, and MS/TP ALN is enabled,
MS/TP ALN may also be used as second MS/TP FLN)
FLN Settings
Fln Type
: MS/TP
FLN1 Baud rate
: 4800 bps
Wireless Enabled
: N
End of report
>Display, Modify, dhcpRelease, reNew, Quit? -
Enabling or Disabling Telnet in the Field Panel
HMI
S, H, E, T (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Telnet) then E or D to enable/disable
Example (enable)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
42 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? t
>Enable, Disable? e
Command successful
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? -
Setting or Modifying the Field Panel IP Configuration
NOTE:
The field panel coldstarts during this procedure.
HMI
S, H, E, S, M (System, Hardware, Ethernet, ipSettings, Modify)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Node name
Alphanumeric field
Object name of the panel - must be
unique on the entire system.
Site name
Alpha-numeric field
BACnet panels and Insight software on
same IP subnet should have the same
site name. The site name affects which
discovery and replication times are used.
BLN name
Alpha-numeric field
This must be identical to the System
Name of the BACnet ALN in System
Profile.
DNS suffix
Press ENTER to continue without
entering data
BACnet field panels do not use naming
resolution.
DHCP
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Y
DHCP is enabled
DHCP server is to assign the field panels
IP addresses.
N
DHCP is disabled
If using fixed IP addresses.
IP address
Numeric field
If DHCP = N, you are prompted for an IP
setting. Enter the IP setting.
If DHCP = Y, you are not prompted for
the IP setting.
Netmask
Numeric field
Gateway address
IP address for the assigned gateway
If there is no IP gateway, enter 0.0.0.0.
User's Manual
43 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
DNS 1
Enter the address of the DNS server.
This can be obtained from the site’s IT
department. If you do not need to specify
DNS addresses, enter 0.0.0.0 for each
of these.
DNS 2
DNS 3
DNS 4
Telnet Enabled
Configure BACnet
Configure BACnet device
Enable BACnet IP ALN
44 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Y
Telnet is enabled to allow remote HMI
sessions using Telnet and to enable
FTP.
N
Telnet is disabled Remote HMI and FTP
are blocked.
Y
BACnet configuration options are
displayed.
N
Exit configuration and save or discard
changes.
Y
Configure BACnet Device.
Device Instance Number
Numeric field.
Valid values are 0 through 4,194, 302.
Must be unique on the entire BACnet
site.
Recommended values for Siemens
panels: 7000 though 7999 for Siemens
panels.
Device Location
Alpha-numeric field
Specify a descriptive location so the
customer or other Siemens employee
can locate the device.
Device Description
Press ENTER to accept existing value
Enter a device description.
Device Reserved Instance Base
Press ENTER to accept the default of
10,000
Enter the instance number where the
field panel starts creating BACnet points
for FLN devices; this must be at least
10000.
COV Resubscribe Period (min)
Press ENTER to accept default of 30
Enter a number that identifies how often
the field panel and the system will reregister for COVs.
COV Poll Rate (sec)
Press ENTER to accept default of 60
Enter a number, in seconds (10 to 3600)
that identifies how often the field panel
and the system will poll devices that do
not support the Subscribe COV BACnet
service.
N
Press ENTER to default value of 10000.
Y
Configure the IP ALN
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
Act as a Foreign Device
BACnet IP Network Number
Specify a network; valid values are 1
through 65534.
This network must be unique for the
entire BACnet site.
No other BACnet MS/TP ALN or BACnet
MS/TP FLN or third-party network
number may be the same.
UDP Port
Accept the default BACnet UDP port,
47808. Other port may be used if
required.
N
No IP ALN.
Y
A foreign device is a BACnet device
(workstation or field panel) that has an
IP connection but does not have a
BBMD or multicast router on its subnet
to allow it access to BACnet broadcast
messages. A foreign device enables
itself to send and receive both directed
and broadcast messages.
Foreign devices are only used when a
BACnet device is joining a network that
spans multiple IP subnets and it is only
going to be on that network for a short
time.
Enable MSTP ALN
N
If the BACnet network does not span
multiple Networks, enter N.
Y
If MS/TP ALN is used, enter Y and
configure the next three parameters.
MSTP ALN Baud Rate
Enter the desired baud rate. 38400 is
recommended.
MSTP ALN Network Number
Specify a network. Valid values are 1
through 65534.
This network must be unique for the
entire BACnet site. No other BACnet/IP
ALN, BACnet MS/TP ALN or BACnet
MS/TP FLN or third-party network
number may be the same.
MSTP ALN Node Address
Enter a MAC address. Valid values are 0
through 127. Address 0 is
recommended.
This address is the MAC address of the
BACnet/IP to BACnet MS/TP ALN
router. No other device on the BACnet
MS/TP ALN may have the same MAC
address. Other MS/TP FLNs or MS/TP
ALNs may use this address.
P1, Mstp
N
Enter N unless MS/TP ALN is being
used.
P
Select P for p1.
FLN1 Baud Rate
A typical baud rate is 4800 for TECs and
VFDs. If you are using P1 BIM, PXC on
P1, PXMs, you can specify another baud
rate.
On a PXC Modular, you will be prompted
for the baud rates of all three FLNs.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
45 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
FLN2 Baud Rate
FLN3 Baud Rate
Wireless Enabled (Y/N)
If the FLN will be Wireless, specify Y.
Otherwise, specify N.
M
Select M for MS/TP FLN.
Enable MSTP FLN (Y/N)
Select Y to enable the MS/TP FLN.
MSTP FLN Baud Rate
Enter the desired baud rate. 38.4k is
recommended
MSTP FLN Network Number
Specify a network. Valid values are 1
through 65534. This network must be
unique for the entire BACnet site.
No other BACnet/IP ALN, BACnet
MS/TP ALN or BACnet MS/TP FLN or
third party network number may be the
same.
MSTP FLN Node Address
Enter a BACnet Media Access Control
(MAC) address. Valid values are 0
through 127. Address 0 is
recommended. This address will be the
MAC address of the BACnet/IP to
BACnet MS/TP FLN router.
No other device on the BACnet MS/TP
FLN may have the same MAC address.
Other MS/TP FLNs or MS/TP ALNs may
use this address.
MSTP Keep Alive Poll Rate
Enter desired time between live node
scans (10 to 300 seconds) if different
than the default setting.
Press ENTER to accept the default of
60.
OK to coldstart (Y/N)
MSTP FLN Discovery Poll Rate
Enter the desired time between dead
node scans (10 to 300 seconds) if
different than default setting.
Press ENTER to accept the default of
60.
Y
Coldstart the field panel and save the
configuration.
N
Do not coldstart. Discard any changes.
Release and Renew DHCP Settings
Perform both parts of this procedure to cause the DHCP server to assign a new IP
address to the field panel.
HMI
S, H, E, S, R (System, Hardware, Ethernet, ipSettings, dhcpRelease)
Example (Release)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
46 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? s
>Display, Modify, dhcpRelease, reNew, Quit? r
Command successful
>Display, Modify, dhcpRelease, reNew, Quit? n
Example (reNew)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? s
>Display, Modify, dhcpRelease, reNew, Quit? n
Command successful
>Display, Modify, dhcpRelease, reNew, Quit? n
Displaying the BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD)
Address Report
This procedure generates a BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD) Address
report for a specific BACnet device. The report contains the IP address settings of all
BBMDs entered in the BBMD Address Table of that device.
NOTE:
To allow BACnet broadcast messages to reach every subnet on the network, each
BBMD on the network must be entered in the BBMD Address Table for every other
BBMD on the network.
HMI
S, H, E, B (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Bbmd)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? b
>Field panel
: 1-----> Display, Edit, Quit? d
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
47 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
07/17/2008 THU
BACnet BBMD Address
Report
14:06
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------<9005>
IP Address
Netmask
UDP Port
---------------------------------------------------------------192.168.0.101
255.255.255.255
47808
192.168.1.102
255.255.255.255
47808
192.168.2.13
255.255.255.0
47808
End of report
>Display, Edit, Quit? -
Adding a Device to the BBMD Address Table
Use this procedure to enter BACnet Broadcast Message Device (BBMD) information in
the BACnet BBMD Address Table of the local field panel, or to configure the local
device as a BBMD and add it to the local table.
NOTE:
This procedure must be performed once for each BBMD on the network at every
BBMD on the network.
NOTE:
To configure the field panel you are connected to as the BBMD for the local
BACnet/IP subnet, add that field panel to its own BBMD Address Table.
Adding a Device to the BBMD Address Table
HMI
S, H, E, B (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Bbmd)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? b
>Field panel
: 771----->Display, Edit, Quit? e
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? a
>IP Address
: 172.16.5.71
48 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
>Netmask
>UDP Port
Command successful
: 255.255.255.255
: 47808
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? The UDP port default value is 47808 for the BBMD device.
The field panel is now added to the BACnet BBMD Address Table. If you added the
local field panel to its own table, it is now configured as a BBMD.
NOTE:
Siemens Industry, Inc. recommends 2-hop configuration for all BBMDs. A 2-hop
BBMD netmask is configured as follows: 255.255.255.255. Any other netmask will
result in 1-hop configuration.
Deleting or Converting a Device from the BBMD Address
Table
Use this procedure to delete a BBMD from the local BACnet BBMD Address Table,
which contains the IP address settings of all BACnet Broadcast Message Devices
(BBMDs) on the network. This converts the BBMD to a standard BACnet field panel.
NOTE:
All BBMD tables must be identical. You must delete this BBMD entry from the
Address Table of every BBMD on the network.
HMI
S, H, E, B (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Bbmd)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? b
>Field panel
: 771----->Display, Edit, Quit? e
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? d
>IP Address
: 172.16.5.71
Command successful
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? -
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
49 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Ethernet/IP Procedures
Deleting All Entries from a BBMD Address Table
Use this procedure to delete all entries from the local BACnet BBMD Address Table,
which contains the IP address settings of all BACnet Broadcast Message Devices
(BBMDs) on the site network.
HMI
S, H, E, B (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Bbmd)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Quit? b
>Field panel
: 771----->Display, Edit, Quit? e
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? e
>Are you sure
: y
Command successful Field panel name 771
>Add, Delete, dElete_all, Look, Quit? -
Backing Up Graphics
Use these procedures to back up graphics files using the HMI.
HMI
S, H, E, W, G (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Webserver, Graphicsbackup
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel
<40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? w
>Display, Modify, Uiupgrade, Graphicsbackup, Quit? g
>Are you sure : y
DONE
50 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Disks Procedures
Enabling or Disabling Web Server
Use these procedures to enable or disable the Web Server.
HMI
S, H, E, W, M (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Webserver, Modify
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel
<40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? w
>Display, Modify, Uiupgrade, Graphicsbackup, Quit? m
>Webserver Enabled (Y/N) : y
>Ok to coldstart (Y/N) : y
Use these procedures to check the enabled/disabled status of the Web Server.
HMI
S, H, E, W, D (System, Hardware, Ethernet, Webserver, Display
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel
<40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? w
>Display, Modify, Uiupgrade, Graphicsbackup, Quit? d
Webserver Enabled : Enabled
Disks Procedures
The main disk defines the ALN address numbers of the main and backup TALON View
workstations. In the case of a field panel failure, the main TALON View workstation will
attempt to reload the field panels. The backup ALN address number identifies a
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
51 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Disks Procedures
secondary TALON View workstation used if the main TALON View workstation is
unavailable.
When Desigo CC discovers a TALON Field Panel, Desigo CC will auto-add itself as
the field panel’s main disk or backup disk, if a slot is available (and the field panel is in
ready state), in order to receive database change notifications. However, Desigo CC
separates the concept of field panel main disk/backup disk from Desigo CC’s feature
of Backup/Restore. The Backup/Restore feature of Desigo CC, which uses native
BACnet services, can be enabled or disabled independently. See the Desigo CC user
documentation for more information.
Displaying Workstation Disks
This procedure displays the ALN address or name of the main and backup TALON
View disks.
HMI
S, H, D, L (System, Hardware, Disk, Log)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? d
>Log, Add, Delete, Quit? l
07/17/2008 THU
SYSTEM HARDWARE DISK
REPORT
18:44
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Main disk
: 13933
Backup disk
: <Not defined>
End of report
Adding a Workstation Disk
This procedure defines the ALN addresses or node names of the main or backup
TALON View disks.
HMI
S, H, D, A (System, Hardware, Disk, Add) then type M for main or B for backup
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
52 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? H
>Fieldpanels, Disks, Partners, Quit? D
>Log, Add, Delete, Quit? A
>Main, Backup
: B
>Are you sure (Y/N)
: Y
Backup disk added in field panel 98
>Log, Add, Delete, Quit? –
Deleting a Workstation Disk
This procedure deletes a main or backup TALON View disk from the ALN.
HMI
S, H, D, D (System, Hardware, Disk, Delete) then type M for main or B for backup
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? H
>Fieldpanels, Disks, Partners, Quit? D
>Log, Add, Delete, Quit? D
>Main, Backup
: B
>Are you sure (Y/N)
: Y
Backup disk deleted in field panel 98
>Log, Add, Delete, Quit? –
Field Panels
This section discusses the major topics of the field panel and their interaction with the
ALN.
Adding a Field Panel to the ALN
In order for a field panel to operate as part of a networked system, it must not only be
physically connected to the network, but it must also be defined as part of that network.
A field panel is defined as part of a network through the procedure Adding a Field
Panel to the ALN [➙ 77]. This procedure is normally done only once per field panel
and is not usually required on an installed system.
ALN Information
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
53 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
1. From the HMI at the field panel you are adding, specify the baud rate and field
panel address or device instance number on the ALN for that field panel.
2. From the HMI at a different field panel, add the new field panel to the network. For
specific information, see the procedure Adding a Field Panel to the ALN [➙ 77] in
this chapter.
3. When the field panel is added to the network (from another field panel), you must
specify:
–
–
–
The field panel address number or device instance number.
Whether a remote or hardwire connection is used.
Whether a normal or extended timeout is needed.
Hardware Configuration, Baud Rates
While connected to the newly added field panel, using the operator interface, the
remaining configuration information is entered. This information can be grouped into
three categories.
For the ALN network:
● The ALN speed
● Network status (should it be modified)
● device instance number
For the field panel:
● HMI port configuration (includes the baud rate, alarm, report, and dialing
capabilities)
● Check the status of the battery
Open IP Ports in Firmware Revision 3.4.
Port
Usage
21
FTP
23
Telnet
50
Second Telnet (for Integration Drivers only)
69
Diagnostic*
80
HTTP
100
Diagnostic*
* Diagnostic ports are disabled by default and should only be enabled with instructions from Technical Support.
Deleting a Field Panel from the ALN
Deleting a field panel clears the point database and any existing control information
stored within that field panel.
A field panel can be completely deleted from communication and other network
operations. This procedure is normally used in troubleshooting situations. Deleting a
field panel causes the network to ignore it. Control programs in other field panels that
reference points in the removed field panel become unresolved (undefined in the
database). In addition, as soon as the field panel accepts the command to delete itself,
it automatically coldstarts (that is, the contents of its memory are erased).
54 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
This process should not be confused with ostracizing a field panel, where the field
panel does not coldstart.
Configuring the BACnet MS/TP Routing
This section explains how to enable routing for BACnet MS/TP ALN and/or FLN.
BACnet field panels with firmware revision 3.1 or later can route BACnet messages
between devices on a:
● BACnet/IP ALN and a BACnet MS/TP FLN, or
● BACnet MS/TP ALN and a BACnet MS/TP FLN
Modifying the BACnet MS/TP ALN
HMI
S, H, F, C, A, M, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Congig, Aln, Mstp, Modify)
NOTE:
When the FLN is configured as MS/TP, and the MS/TP ALN is enabled, then the
MS/TP ALN may also be used as a secondary MS/TP FLN port (Modular and
Compact 36 panels only).
NOTE:
If the current panel does not support MS/TP ALN, the system will prompt for a remote
field panel address.
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Enable MSTP ALN (Y/N)
Y
Enables the RS-485 MS/TP port.
N
Disables the RS-485 MS/TP port.
If you did not change the Enable/Disable status
of the MS/TP ALN, Command successful
displays. MS/TP ALN configuration is complete.
MSTP ALN Baud Rate
Enter the Baud rate for this
port, or press ENTER to
accept the default value
(9600).
MSTP ALN Network Number
Enter the network number
for this port, or press
ENTER to accept the
default value.
MSTP ALN Node Address
Enter the node address for
this port, or press ENTER
to accept the default value.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
55 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
●
●
If the Enable/Disable status of the MS/TP ALN did not change, Command
successful displays.
If the Enable/Disable status did change, type Y to accept the changes and coldstart
the panel.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? a
>Alnsettings, Ip, Mstp, nodeType, Quit? m
>Display, Modify, Quit? m
>Enable MSTP ALN (Y/N)
: y
>MSTP ALN Baud Rate
: 76800-->MSTP ALN Network Number
: 65535
>MSTP ALN Network Number
: 65532
>MSTP ALN Node Address
: 127
>Ok to coldstart (Y/N)
: y
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? -
Modifying MS/TP ALN Settings
NOTE:
The field panel coldstarts during this procedure.
For more information on ALN port configuration, see TC Modular Port Configuration
and TC Compact Port Configuration.
Modifying MS/TP ALN Settings
HMI
S, H, F, C, A, M, M (System, Hardware, Field Panel, Config, Aln, Mstp, Modify)
NOTE:
If the MS/TP ALN is already enabled, and the BACnet/IP ALN port is either disabled
or not present on this device, the following prompt is not displayed. Under these
conditions, continue this procedure with the following step (MS/TP ALN Baud Rate
prompt).
56 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Enable MSTP ALN (Y/N)
Y
Enables the MS/TP ALN port.
N
Disables the MS/TP ALN port.
MSTP ALN Baud Rate
Enter the Baud rate for this port.
MSTP ALN Network Number
Enter the network number for this port,
or press ENTER to accept the current
value, if other than 65535.
MSTP ALN Node Address
Enter the node address for this port.
If you made any changes from existing
values during this procedure, OK to
coldstart (Y/N) displays.
Y
Coldstarts the device and saves your
configuration changes.
N
Cancels the configuration.
The network number must be changed
from the system default of 65535.
Example
>MSTP ALN Network Number : 55-->MSTP ALN Node Address : 127
>MSTP ALN Baud Rate : 9600--->OK to coldstart (Y/N) : y
Configuring the MS/TP FLN
NOTE:
When the FLN is configured as MS/TP, and the MS/TP ALN is enabled, then the
MS/TP ALN may also be used as a secondary MS/TP FLN port (Modular and
Compact 36 panels only).
Before implementing an MS/TP FLN network, you should familiarize yourself with the
BACnet protocol.
BACnet field panels can support up to 96 devices on FLN 1 (assuming 1/8 load
devices; 1/4 load devices need trunk extenders every 31 devices).
Device Reserved Instance Base
The Device Reserved Instance Base is a value that determines the range of instance
numbers reserved for use by the controller. Range is set between this configurable
starting instance number and the fixed end value of 4,194,302. The default starting
value for the Device Reserved Instance Base is 10,000.
Configuring the BACnet MS/TP FLN
Before configuring the FLN as a BACnet MS/TP network, run a Field Panel
Configuration report to determine the present field panel FLN type. See Displaying a
Field Panel Configuration Report [➙ 75].
HMI
S, H, F, C, F, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Fln, Mstp)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
57 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Enable MSTP FLN (Y/N)
Y
Enter baud rate
Enter the BACnet MS/TP baud rate
(9600, 19200, 38400, or 76800), or
press ENTER to accept the current
value.
Network number
Unique network number assigned for Reserve network number 1, as this may be
this FLN (1 to 65534), or press
used by the BACnet/IP network.
ENTER to accept the current value.
MSTP Device Mac Address
Enter the node address (0 to 127), or
press ENTER to accept the current
value.
Keep Alive Poll Rate
Enter the desired time between live
node scans (10 to 300 seconds), or
press ENTER to accept the current
value.
Discovery Poll Rate
Enter the desired time between dead Default = 60.
node scans (10 to 300 seconds), or
press ENTER to accept the current
value.
●
●
Description
For optimal performance, Siemens
recommends an MS/TP FLN baud rate of
38,400 bps.
Default = 60.
If the FLN type is MS/TP and either the network number or node address is
changed, OK to coldstart (Y/N) displays.
– Type Y to coldstart the device and save your configuration changes.
– Type N to cancel the configuration.
If only the baud rate is changed, Command successful displays. No coldstart is
required.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Qui
t? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? f
>fln1, fln2, fln3, Wireless, Mstp, flnType, Quit? m
>Enable MSTP FLN (Y/N)
: Y
>Enter baud rate
: 19200-->Network Number
: 22054
>MSTP Device Mac Address
: 48>Keep Alive Poll Rate
: 60-->Discovery Poll Rate
: 60--Command successful
>fln1, fln2, fln3, Wireless, Mstp, flnType, Quit? –
58 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Field Panel Configuration Procedures
Procedures in this section are under the following HMI menu:
S, H, F, C (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config)
Configuring a Field Panel HMI Port
This procedure changes the baud rate and message display of the HMI port. If you
change the port baud rate, you should also know how to change the baud rate of the
interface terminal.
Configuring a Field Panel HMI Port
HMI
S, H, F, C, H (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Hmi)
After typing S, H, F, C, H, select I (for HMI).
Example
>Baud rate : 115200->Alarm printing enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Report printing enabled (Y/N) : Y
Port 1 Modified
>hmI, telNet, usbTool, Look, Statlog, Resetlog, Quit? -
Displaying or Resetting HMI Port Statistics
Use these procedures to display or reset communication statistics for the HMI ports.
These procedures can be used for diagnostic purposes due to the type of information
identified.
HMI
S, H, F, C, H, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Hmi)
Type S (to display the Statlog) or R to reset all communication counters to zero.
Example
07/12/2008 SAT
HMI STATUS
REPORT
11:52
------------------------------------------------------------------------Field panel name
: 22054
HMI1 port
Transmitted bytes
: 808
Received bytes
: 0
Total calls
: 1
Dial out connect time
: 0
Dial in connect time
: 0
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
59 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
HMI port
Transmitted bytes
Received bytes
Telnet port
Transmitted bytes
Received bytes
End of report
: 213487
: 158242
: 808
: 0
>Hmi/modem, hmI, telNet, Look, Statlog, Resetlog, Quit? -
Displaying BACnet IP ALN Settings
HMI
S, H, F, C, A, I, D (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Aln, Ip, Display)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? a
>Alnsettings, Ip, Mstp, nodeType, Quit? i
>Display, Modify, Quit? d
07/17/2008 THU
BACnet IP ALN
Report
18:04
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet IP ALN Settings: Enabled
BACnet IP Network Number
: 1
UDP Port
: 47808
Act as a Foreign device
: NO
End of report
>Display, Modify, Quit? -
Displaying BACnet Device Settings
HMI
S, H, F, C, V, D (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, deVice, Display)
The BACnet Device report displays.
60 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? v
>Display, Modify, Quit? d
07/21/2008 MON
BACnet Device
Report
15:01
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet Device Settings
Device Instance Number
: 22055
Device Location
: ARCHIVES BASEMENT
Device Description
: BACnet PXC-Modular
Device Reserved Instance Base
: 10000
COV Resubscribe Period (min)
: 60
COV Poll Rate (sec)
: 60
End of report
>Display, Modify, Quit? -
Modifying BACnet Device Settings
CAUTION
If the Device Instance Number or Device Reserved Instance Base are changed, the
field panel coldstarts at the end of this procedure.
NOTE:
To accept the existing value and advance to the next entry field at any step of BACnet
configuration, press ENTER.
Modifying BACnet Device Settings
HMI
S, H, F, C, V, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, deVice, Modify)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
61 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Device Instance Number
Enter the device instance
number.
(0 through 4,194,302).
Recommended values are 7000 through
7999; must be unique throughout the
BACnet network.
Device Location
Enter the device location.
Device Description
Enter the device description.
Device Reserved Instance Base
Enter the starting reserved
instance number.
COV Resubscribe Period (min)
Enter the COV resubscribe
period in minutes.
COV Poll Rate (sec)
enter the COV poll rate in
seconds.
OK to coldstart (Y/N)
For more information on this parameter,
see Device Reserved Instance Base in
this section.
This prompt only displays if you change
the Instance Number or Device Reserved
Instance Base.
Y
Coldstart the device and save your
configuration changes.
N
Cancel the configuration.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? v
>Display, Modify, Quit? m
>Device Instance Number
: 13933->Device Location
: BIERMAN SUB BASEMENT-------->Device Description
: ABSORPTION CHILLER---------->Device Reserved Instance Base : 10000->COV Resubscribe Period (min) : 30->COV Poll Rate (sec)
: 60-Command successful
>Display, Modify, Quit? -
Displaying the Field Panel Names
HMI
S, H, F, C, N, D (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Names, Display)
62 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? n
>Display, Modify, Quit? d
07/17/2008 THU
Field Panel Name
Report
13:23
------------------------------------------------------------------------BLN name
: BACBLN
Site name
: ZONE_2
Node name
: MOD22-055
End of report
>Display, Modify, Quit? -
Modifying Ethernet Capable Field Panel Names
This procedure modifies the Node name, Site name, or ALN name of an Ethernet
capable field panel.
CAUTION
If you modify the node name or ALN name, the field panel will coldstart.
HMI
S, H, F, C, N, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Names, Modify)
Example (Site name)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? n
>Display, Modify, Quit? m
>Nodename, Sitename, Blnname, Quit? s
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
63 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
>Site name
: BLD3.MAINT-------------------Command successful
>Nodename, Sitename, Blnname, Quit? –
Autorestore and Database Backup to Flash
●
The field panel may be configured to automatically restore the database from flash
memory after a coldstart.
– When auto-restore is enabled, a coldstart does not result in the same downtime
as with earlier revisions of TALON firmware. Because there is no waiting on a
full download from the backup system, the database is restored from flash so
quickly that there is little to no downtime. However, the accumulated trend data
is deleted from memory.
– Database restoration from flash is disabled by default.
If you choose to enable auto-restore, the method of restoring the database is
determined by the status of the network (active or inactive) at the moment the
database was saved.
If the database was saved when the network was active:
Typically, the Insight software will restore the database. The field panel will perform an
auto-restore if Insight is failed or if Insight is available, but has not begun downloading
the database within three minutes of a request. However, if the Insight Loader Service
is not running, but the Mass Storage device is defined at the field panel, the panel will
not restore the database.
NOTE:
By design, the field panel loses its Mass Storage device definition after a coldstart.
The Insight workstation that is defined as the Mass Storage device is responsible for
setting the field panel’s Mass Storage definition device after a coldstart. If the Insight
workstation sets the Mass Storage device Definition, but the Insight Loader Service is
not running the field panel can get into a situation as described above.
If the database was saved when the network was not active:
The field panel will perform an immediate auto-restore of its saved database.
HMI
S, H, F, C, L (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, db_fiLe)
Next Sub-menu Option
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Save,
Field panel
Enter field panel name.
Clear
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Save, Clear, or Restore the database.
N
Do not Save, Clear, or Restore the database.
Restore_db
Description
Autorestore
Field panel
Enter field panel name.
●
Enable
●
Disable
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Enable Autorestore.
N
Disable Autorestore.
Enter field panel name.
Display the DB File settings.
Display
64 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Field panel
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
In order to support autorestore and database backup to flash, the following new HMI
prompts (bolded below) have been added.
NOTE:
When files are added to or deleted from the panel’s Internal Flash Drive (IFD), the
panel’s performance is impacted. All other field panel processes are interrupted and
the panel may temporarily drop off of the network and not provide COV updates.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Partners,
Licensemanager, Vaem, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Ostracize, Quit? c
>Hmi, alnSettings, db_fiLe, Fln, mOdem, Names, Defaultlanguage,
Quit? l
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? s
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Database Backed Up to Flash
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? c
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Flash Backup Erased
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? r
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Command successful
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? a
>Enable, Disable, Quit? e
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Autorestore enabled
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? a
>Enable, Disable, Quit? d
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Autorestore disabled
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
65 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? d
>Field panel : --01/01/2006 SUN DB File Report 00:16
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Field panel : 6
Flash backup : Present
Database size : 2482 bytes
Last saved : 00:16:43 01/01/2006 SUN
Result of last backup : Success
Autorestore : Disabled
File manager status : Idle
End of report
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? a
>Enable, Disable, Quit? e
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Autorestore enabled
>Enable, Disable, Quit? Q
Changing the System Default Language
This procedure changes the System Default Language (SDL) of the field panel. Prior to
user log on, all firmware prompting and messaging appears in the SDL. Changes to
the SDL are implemented at the next user log on.
HMI
S, H, F, C, D (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Defaultlanguage)
Example
At the Language ID prompt, enter a valid language ID.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware,
Text, Quit? >Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks,
Reportprinter, Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? d
>Language ID
: 0409
Command successful
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, db_fiLe, Fln, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? -
66 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Verifying Connection, Communication and Default Switch
Mapping
The field panel with Firmware Revision 3.2 and later recognizes the HOA within two
seconds of connection; prior to that the HOA switches are not operational.
The HOA Switch to TC Point Mapping report, provides the following information:
● HOA device type connected along with its firmware revision
● List of the HOA switches and its respective number
● List of all of the TC Modular Controllers onboard points
● Snapshot of the current values associated with each point
● Corresponding point type that has been defined
● Corresponding point name that has been defined
Use the following keystrokes to display the HOA Switch to TC Point Mapping AP2
report and to verify the HOA is properly communicating.
HMI
S, H, F, C, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, hoaMap)
Prompt/Field Entry
Option
Field panel name
Display, Modify, Remove,
Setdefault, Quit
Description
Alphanumeric value, 30 character limit.
D
The HOA Switch to Point Mapping report displays.
Example
Sample report of a 16 switch HOA module connected to TC Modular displays. Verify
HOA type displays 8 Keys or 16 keys.
Before Connection
01/01/2009 THU HOA Switch to Point Mapping 00:00
--------------------------------------------------------Panel name <TCC>
HOA Type: not detected or unknown
Switch Point
% Value
Point Type
Point Name
--------------------------------------------------------1
DO14
0
Not defined
Not defined
2
DO15
0
Not defined
Not defined
3
DO16
0
Not defined
Not defined
4
AO9
0
Not defined
Not defined
5
AO10
0
Not defined
Not defined
6
AO11
0
Not defined
Not defined
7
UNUSED
0
8
UNUSED
0
9
UNUSED
0
10
UNUSED
0
11
UNUSED
0
12
UNUSED
0
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
67 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
13
14
15
16
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
0
0
0
0
End of report
After Connection
01/01/2009 THU HOA Switch to Point Mapping 00:03M:Addressc
-----------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:
HOA Type: 16 Keys Roof Top Firmware revision: 1.0 0004E Apr 22
2009 14:10:17
Switch Point
% Value
Point Type
Point Name
-----------------------------------------------------------1
DO14
0
Not defined
Not defined
2
DO15
0
Not defined
Not defined
3
DO16
0
Not defined
Not defined
4
AO9
0
Not defined
Not defined
5
AO10
0
Not defined
Not defined
6
AO11
0
Not defined
Not defined
7
UNUSED
0
8
UNUSED
0
9
UNUSED
0
10
UNUSED
0
11
UNUSED
0
12
UNUSED
0
13
UNUSED
0
14
UNUSED
0
15
UNUSED
0
16
UNUSED
0
End of report
HOA Module Default Switch Mapping
Displaying the HOA Switch to TC Point Mapping AP2 report.
HMI
S, H, F, C, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, hoaMap)
68 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Field panel name
Display, Modify, Remove,
Setdefault, Quit
Description
Maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
D
The Point Mapping AP2 report displays.
Modifying the Default Switch Mapping
The HOA switch mapping can be modified from its default mapping using TALON View
software or the TALON Commissioner.
See the TALON View or the TALON Commissioner online help for more information.
Modifying the Default Switch Mapping
HMI
S, H, F, C, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, hoaMap)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Field panel name
Description
Maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Display, Modify, Remove,
Setdefault, Quit
M
Switch number
1 through 8 or 16.
Physical switch on HOA.
Point number
1 through 36.
Field panel point mapped to HOA switch.
Command successful displays.
Example
Assigning switch 4 to logical point 14.
>Field panel : ------->
Display, Modify, Remove, setdEfault, Quit? M
>Switch number : 4>Point number : 14Command successful
Example
Sample report of a 16 switch HOA module connected to TC Modular. Verify HOA type
displays 8 Keys or 16 keys.
03/26/2009 THU
HOA Switch to Point Mapping
10:41
------------------------------------------------------------Panel name <EPXC30>
HOA Type: 16 Keys
Firmware revision: 1.0 0003b Jan 09 2009
14:37:31
Switch Point
% Value
Point Type
Point Name
------------------------------------------------------------1
DO21
*100*
LDO
sw1_DO21
2
UI12
100
LDI
sw2_DI12
3
X13
*50*
LAO
sw3_AOVoltage13
4
X14
49
LAI
sw4_AIVoltage14
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
69 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X15
X16
U7
U8
DO20
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
*90*
87
72
0
*100*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LAO
LAI
LAI
LPACI
Not defined
sw5_AOCurrent15
sw6_AICurrent16
sw7_AITemperature7
sw8_LPACI8
Not defined
End of report
NOTE:
If the default mapping is sufficient print labels. For more information see Using
TALON View/ TALON Commissioner to Map HOA Switches.
NOTE:
Perform a backup using MMI Database Transfer when all settings are complete.
If modifications are necessary continue to Modifying the Default Switch Mapping
[➙ 69].
Resetting the Default HOA Switch Mapping
Use HOA editor to restore default HOA switch mapping.
HMI
S, H, F, C, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, hoaMap)
Prompt/Field Entry
Option
Description
Field panel name
Maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Display, Modify, Remove,
Setdefault, Quit
S
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Y
Resets the HOA switch mapping back to default.
N
No changes are made to HOA switch mapping
Command successful displays.
Example
>Field panel : ------->
Display, Modify, Remove, Setdefault, Quit? S
>Are you sure?(Y/N) : y
Command successful
70 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
The host TC Modular will retain the reconfigured HOA switch mapping. In the event the
HOA module was removed and plugged back into the host panel, you are not required
to reconfigure the HOA mapping.
Removing the HOA Switch Mapping
Use HOA editor to remove the HOA switch mapping.
HMI
S, H, F, C, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, hoaMap)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Field panel name
Description
Maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Display, Modify, Remove,
Setdefault, Quit
R
Remove All (Y/N)
Y
Removes all HOA switch mapping.
Switch number.
1 to HOA maximum.
N
Command successful displays.
Example
>Field panel : ------->
Display, Modify, Remove, Setdefault, Quit? R
>Remove All (Y/N) : N
>Switch number : 7Command successful
FLNnode and ALNnode Mode Configuration
The TC Unitary Equipment Controller (UEC) is an MS/TP device, that can be
configured as a programmable, stand-alone device or as a networked device on the
BACnet MS/TP ALN (Automation Level Network) or FLN (Field Level Network).
TC UEC-16
The TC UEC-16 provides control for 16 points, including 8 software-configurable
universal points.
Point count includes: 3 Universal Input (UI), 5 Universal I/O (U), 2 Digital Input (DI), 3
Analog Output
(AOV), and 3 Digital Output (DO).
TC UEC-24
The TC UEC-24 provides control for 24 points, including 16 software-configurable
universal points.
Point count includes: 3 Universal Input (UI), 9 Universal I/O (U), 4 Super Universal I/O
(X), 3 Analog
Output (AOV), 5 Digital Output (DO).
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
71 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
FLNnode Mode
HMI
S, H, F, C, P, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, mstP, Modify)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? c
>Hmi, mstP, deVice, Names, nEttype, Defaultlanguage, db_fiLe,
Quit? p
>Display, Modify, Quit? m
>Baud rate : 19200-->Network Number : 60-->MAC Address : 80Command successful
ALNnode Mode
HMI
S, H, F, C, A, M, M (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, Aln, Mstp, Modify)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, Names, nEttype, Defaultlanguage, db_fiLe,
Quit? a
>Alnsettings, Mstp, Quit? m
>Display, Modify, Quit? m
>MSTP ALN Baud Rate : 19200-->MSTP ALN Network Number : 160->MSTP ALN Node Address : 80Command successful
Enabling Auto Save
Enabling the Auto Save Feature
NOTE:
You must perform a manual save before the enabled Auto Save feature will function.
72 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
HMI
S, H, F, C, L, U (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, db_fiLe, aUtosave)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Enable, Disable, Quit?
E, D, Q
Field panel name
Are you sure (Y/N)
Description
Maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Y
Auto Save Enabled or Auto Save Disabled displays.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? c
>Hmi, Aln, deVice, Names, Fln, nEttype, Defaultlanguage,
db_fiLe, Quit? l
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, aUtosave, Display, Quit?
u
>Enable, Disable, Quit? e
>Field panel
: ------>Are you sure (Y/N)
: y
Field panel 130: Auto Save Enabled
NOTE:
Any new Web Server panel must be made ready before Auto Save will work. Fifteen
minutes after the panel is made ready, the database will be automatically saved.
NOTE:
Manually or automatically saving the database can cause the device to fail
momentarily.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you leave the Auto Save feature enabled to ensure that the
Field Panel database is backed up.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
73 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Field Panel Procedures
Displaying a Field Panel Log
This procedure displays a summary report of field panels on the ALN. This report
contains the address, status, and auto-dial capabilities for specified field panels on the
ALN.
To display a summary log of field panels, complete the following:
HMI
S, H, F, L (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Log)
Specify the name/device ID of the first and last field panels for the log.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? l
>First field panel
: 13933->Last field panel
: 13934-07/09/2008 WED
FIELD PANEL LOG
REPORT
15:37
-------------------------------------------------------------------------<"13933" to "13934">
Field panel
State
-------------------------------------------------------------------------<BLN>
<ZONE_1>
>
13933
OK
Online Ready
13934
OK
Online Ready
End of report
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? -
NOTE:
In the example, the panel you are connected to is indicated by the ">" symbol.
74 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Displaying a Field Panel Configuration Report
To display a detailed configuration report for a field panel, complete the following:
HMI
S, H, F, D (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Display)
Specify where you want the report sent and for which panel.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? d
>Here, Printer
: H
>Field panel
: 13778-01/03/2009 SAT FIELD PANEL CONFIGURATION REPORT 00:55
----------------------------------------------------------------------Field panel address : 13778
Firmware revision : B6E1265 EX36 V3.4 BACnet 4.3g
Firmware checksum : 0028
USB MODEM : Available Alarm
HMI : 115200 bps Alarm Report
Telnet : Available Alarm
USB Tool : Available Alarm
USB PRINTER : Available Alarm
Point modules : Disabled
Battery status : Dead
Language : English American
Network Type : BACnet Router between networks 13, 1302, 1301
(Alnnode)
Node name : WT2
Site name : DESK
BLN name : BBLN
DNS Suffix :
DHCP : Enabled
IP Address : 10. 0. 2. 2
Netmask : 255.255.255. 0
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
75 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Gateway Address : 10. 0. 2.250
DHCP Server Address : 10. 0. 2.250
DNS 1 : 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS 2 : 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS 3 : 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS 4 : 0. 0. 0. 0
MAC Address : 00:C0:E4:03:30:BD
Configured Data Rate : Auto Negotiate
Configured Duplex : Auto
Actual Data Rate : 100BaseT
Actual Duplex : Full
Link Status : Up
Telnet Enabled : Enabled
BACnet Device Settings
Device Instance Number : 13778
Device Location : Default Location
Device Description : Default Description
Device Reserved Instance Base : 10000
COV Resubscribe Period (min) : 30
COV Poll Rate (sec) : 60
BACnet IP ALN Settings : Enabled
BACnet IP Network Number : 13
UDP Port : 47808
Act as a Foreign device : NO
BACnet MSTP ALN Settings : Enabled
MSTP ALN Baud Rate : 38400 bps
MSTP ALN Network Number : 1302
MSTP ALN Node Address : 0
(Note When FLN is MS/TP, and MS/TP ALN is enabled,
MS/TP ALN may also be used as second MS/TP FLN)
FLN Settings
Fln Type : MSTP
MSTP FLN Baud Rate : 19200 bps
MSTP FLN Network Number : 1301
MSTP FLN Node Address : 0
MSTP FLN Keep Alive Poll Rate : 60
MSTP FLN Discovery Poll Rate : 60
End of report
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? -
76 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
NOTE:
Although this report shows values in the Point modules and FLN rows, this
information would be meaningless in a report for a PXC Compact because these field
panels have no point modules.
Adding a Field Panel to the ALN
Before you begin this procedure, you must identify the new address of the field panel,
whether it is remotely connected, the type of time-out, and whether it should be placed
online.
CAUTION
This procedure causes the field panel to coldstart. It is a good practice to back up the
field panel database before using this procedure.
To add a field panel, follow the prompts.
HMI
S, H, F, A (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Add)
Prompt / Field
Option / Entry
Description
The system adds the field panel to the ALN.
Command Successful
Deleting a Field Panel from the ALN
From the HMI main menu, type the following letters in sequence and follow the
prompts:
HMI
S, H, F, E (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, dElete)
Example
>Field panel : 22054->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Command successful
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Quit? -
Languages
TALON Firmware Revision 3.1 and later enables multiple language use. Current
language options are French Canadian and English American. This function allows you
to display the field panel HMI information in various languages. You can use the
Factory Default Language (FDL) or load any of the optional languages.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
77 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Language Types
Language type
Explanation
Factory Default Language (FDL)
This is the fundamental language used. It is typically English
and cannot be deleted. If the language settings listed in this
table are not defined, the FDL is used as the default.
System Default Language (SDL)
This is the default language for prompting and messaging
prior to user log-on.
User Defined Language (UDL)
This is the optional language loaded by the user that can be
used instead of the factory defined FDL.
User Specific Language (USL)
This is defined in the user’s account. Can be the FDL or the
optional UDL. By default, it is the SDL.
Settings will default to the FDL if a coldstart occurs.
Language Use
PPCL and OIP statements - PPCL and OIP statements use keystroke sequences
based on the English prompting.
Point priority - Point priority status always displays in English. When logged onto the
system using a language ID other than English, point priority appears in English.
Point status - Point status displays always appear in English. When logged onto the
system using a language ID other than English, point status appears in English.
State text - The default state text tables always appear in English. When logged onto
the system using a language ID other than English, default state text tables appear in
English.
Default user accounts - Default user account names (LOW, MED, HIGH) and
passwords always appear in English.
Keyboards - Some languages require an international keyboard/setting for entering
certain letters or characters not found on a standard English keyboard.
Emulating an International Keyboard
When an international keyboard/setting is not available, enter characters using the
following key sequence (activate the Num Lock key). While holding down the ALT key,
type 0 (zero) and then:
Table 1: International Characters (ISO Latin-1 Character Set).
Character
Number (0 + number)
Description
À
192
Capital A with grave accent
Á
193
Capital A with acute accent
Ã
195
Capital A with tilde.
È
200
Capital E with grave accent
É
201
Capital E with acute accent
Ì
204
Capital I with grave accent
Í
205
Capital I with acute accent
Ò
210
Capital O with grave accent
78 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Ó
211
Capital O with acute accent
Õ
213
Capital O with tilde
Ù
217
Capital U with grave accent
Ú
218
Capital U with acute accent
Field Panel File System Operations
Basic File System Operation Commands
Use these procedures to set drives, change directories, list drives, or list files in a
directory via the HMI.
Do not use the \ (backslash) symbol before entering a file name.
Set Drive
Set Drive is used to set the drive for all file operations. The drive must be set before
any other file operations can be performed.
HMI
S, H, F, F, S, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, Set_drive)
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? s
>Drive name: a------------------------------A:\
Change Directories
The drive must be set before this file operation can be performed. See the Set Drive
section.
HMI
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S, H, F, F, C, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, Change_dir)
User's Manual
79 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? c
>File Directory: wsroot-------------------------Path: A:\WSROOT\
List Drives
HMI
S, H, F, F, L, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, List_drives)
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? l
07/30/2010 FRI Drives List 10:15
-------------------------------------------------------------Disk Size Free Space
IFD 10 MB 8652 KB
A:\ 8174 KB 6542 KB
B:\ 1907 MB 1659 MB
End of report
80 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
List Files in a Directory
The drive must be set before this file operation can be performed. See the Set Drive
section.
HMI
S, H, F, F, D, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, listDirectory)
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? d
07/30/2010 FRI File Directory 10:17
-------------------------------------------------------------Path: A:\
07/28/2010
07/28/2010
07/28/2010
07/28/2010
07/30/2010
11:27:20
11:27:20
11:27:22
11:27:24
09:55:04
0 WSROOT <DIR>
197 CROSSDOMAIN.XML
327 LicenseVault.xml
7342 FieldPanel.xml
33924 40091.db
End of report
Rename a File
Use this procedure to rename a file within the current directory, using the HMI. The
drive must be set before this file operation can be performed. See the Set Drive
section.
HMI
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S, H, F, F, F, R, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, File_ops, Rename_file)
User's Manual
81 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? f
>Copy_file, Rename_file, Move_file, Delete_file, Quit? r
>File name: testone---------------------------------------------------->New File Name: testtwo------------------------------------------------DONE
Delete a File
Use this procedure to delete a file from the current directory, using the HMI. The drive
must be set before this file operation can be performed. See the Set Drive section.
HMI
82 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S, H, F, F, F, D, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, File_ops, Delete_file)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? f
>Copy_file, Rename_file, Move_file, Delete_file, Quit? d
>File name: wsroot\fpweb.swf-------------------------------------->Are you sure: y
Deleting wsroot\fpweb.swf...
wsroot\fpweb.swf deleted successfully.
When deleting a panel using *.* in the filename prompt, do not use the \ (backslash)
symbol before entering *.*. The panel may coldstart.
Move a File
Use this procedure to move a file from the current directory to another directory or
drive, via the HMI. This procedure deletes the file from the current directory. The drive
must be set before this file operation can be performed. See the Set Drive section.
HMI
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S, H, F, F, F, M, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, File_ops, Move_file)
User's Manual
83 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? f
>Copy_file, Rename_file, Move_file, Delete_file, Quit? m
>Source File Name: testtwo---------------------------------------------->Destination Path: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------b:\testtwo.swf----------------------------------DONE
Copy a File
Use this procedure to copy a file from the current directory to another directory or drive
(root or subfolder), using the HMI. This procedure does not delete the file from the
current directory. The drive must be set before this file operation can be performed.
See the Set Drive section.
HMI
84 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S, H, F, F, F, C, (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, File_ops, Copy_file)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Examples
Copying the file to a subfolder within the destination drive:
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? f
>Copy_file, Rename_file, Move_file, Delete_file, Quit? c
>Source File Name: fpweb.swf----------------------------------------->Destination Path: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ifd:\wsroot\------------------------------------DONE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
85 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Copying the file to the root of the destination drive:
10:13:04 07/30/2010 FRI Logged on successfully Field panel <40091>
User: <high> <High default user account>
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops, Quit?
f
>Copy_file, Rename_file, Move_file, Delete_file, Remove_dir, Quit?
c
>Source File Name: index.html------------------------------------------->Destination Path: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ifd:\-------------------------------------------DONE
Remove a Directory
Use this procedure to remove a directory from Drive A or B (root or subfolder), using
the HMI. The drive must be set before this file operation can be performed. See the Set
Drive section. To remove files from the Internal Flash Drive (IFD), you must use the
wildcard feature (*.*).
This procedure will not remove a directory that has subdirectories within it.
Subdirectories must be removed first.
You must be one directory or drive above the desired directory. Use the Set_drive,
Change_dir, and listDirectory procedures to navigate to the desired location.
HMI
86 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S, H, F, F, R (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Filesys, Remove_dir)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
87 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? s
>Drive name : a------------------------------A:\
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? c
>File Directory : wsroot-------------------------Path: A:\WSROOT\
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? c
>File Directory : graphics-----------------------Path: A:\WSROOT\Graphics\
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? c
>File Directory : media--------------------------Path: A:\WSROOT\Graphics\MEDIA\
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? d
05/11/2011 WED File Directory 12:12
Path: A:\WSROOT\Graphics\MEDIA\
05/11/2011 08:24:28 20140 FAN_CENTRIFUGAL_SF_1.PNG
05/11/2011 08:24:28 21785 CHWV_BELIMO_4.PNG
05/11/2011 08:24:28 0 VALANIMATION1 <DIR>
End of report
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? r
>Directory Name : valanimation1--------------------------->Are you sure : y
Deleting
Deleting
88 | 408
Deleting
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Deleting
Building Technologies
FAN-R1.JPG...
FAN-R2.JPG...
FAN-R3.JPG...
User's Manual
THERM50.JPG...
valanimation1 deleted successfully.
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
Field Panels
Wildcard Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye?
s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit?
h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Filesys, Quit? f
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? s
>Drive name : ifd----------------------------IFD
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? d
05/11/2011 WED File Directory 12:13
Path: IFD:\
04/24/2009 14:06:28 7580 FieldPanel.xml
03/01/2010 14:45:26 328 LicenseVault.xml
wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\THERM0.JPG
05/11/2011 11:18:53 5600
wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\THERM10.JPG
05/11/2011 11:18:54 5601
wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\THERM20.JPG
05/11/2011 11:18:56 5620
End of report
>List_drives, Set_drive, listDirectory, Change_dir, File_ops,
Remove_dir, Quit? f
>Copy_file, Rename_file, Move_file, Delete_file, Quit? d
>File name : wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\*.*->Are you sure : Y
Deleting wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\THERM0.JPG...
Deleting wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\THERM10.JPG...
Deleting wsroot\Graphics\MEDIA\VALANIMATION1\THERM20.JPG...
deleted successfully.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
89 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
State Text Commands and Procedures
State Text Commands and Procedures
State text is a function that defines how the field panel visually reports and commands
the values of digital and LENUM point types.
● For digital points, the default state text includes words like ON, OFF, RUN, and
STOP to describe the value of a point.
● For LENUM points, the system assigns a state text table with six states.
● PPCL and analog points never use state text.
NOTE:
State text always displays in English.
You can modify the state text when the default text does not match the purpose or
function for which a point is defined. For example, for a digital input point, such as a
sensor monitoring a security door, the default state text may not make sense. When
viewed on a display, the security door would be either ON or OFF. To clarify the
display, the words OPEN and CLOSED would better describe the security door:
07/17/2008 THUR
POINT LOG
REPORT
07:12pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:>
Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value/State
Status Prio
rity
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------!Field panel 3
:Address
3
NNONE
BLD990.FLR01.SECURITY DOOR (Sensor point)
NNONE
OPEN
-
Default State Text Tables
The state text table is a collection of two or more values and descriptions, grouped
according to type of equipment or method of control. For example, the state text table
DAY_NIGHT looks like the following:
07/17/2008 THUR
STATE TEXT TABLE
REPORT
07:23pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <DAY_NIGHT>
Table name
State
90 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Table ID
# of states
Value
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
State Text Commands and Procedures
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------DAY_NIGHT
<default>
2
DAY
0
NIGHT
1
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? –
There are more than 50 predefined state text tables available to every field panel on
the ALN. Additional state text tables can be added and customized to fit any type of
control or equipment.
The default state text tables are listed in State Text File Listing [➙ 342].
Custom State Text Tables
Besides the pre-defined (default) state text tables in the field panel, additional tables
can be entered to accommodate custom applications. Depending on how the system is
set up, the custom state text tables can be defined after points are entered into the
database. If a point definition references an undefined custom state text table, the
system represents the status with a question mark (?) and the point value:
07/17/2008 THUR
POINT LOG
REPORT
07:23pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:>
Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value/State
Status Prio
rity
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------!Field panel 3
:Address
3
NNONE
BLD990.COOLING.FLOW (flow sensor)
NNONE
? 0
-
State Text Table Attributes
All state text tables contain the following attributes:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
91 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
State Text Commands and Procedures
Table name
Unique name for the system.
The table name can contain up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Table ID
Unique identifier used when creating new state text tables.
The Table ID range is 1 through 32767.
Number of states
Number of states contained in the table.
The range for number of states is 1 through 32767.
State description
Text associated to a point value.
The description can contain up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
State value
Logical value of the point.
Binary: The state value can be 0 or 1.
Multistate or LENUM: The state value range is 1 through 32767. Must not include 0 as a
value.
Displaying a State Text Table Log
This procedure displays a summary report of state text table(s) on an ALN.
HMI
S, T, L (System, Text, Log) ..and then specify the state text table(s)
Example
07/17/2008 THUR
STATE TEXT TABLE
LOG
07:24pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
Table name
Table ID
# of states
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIVE_NTRAL
<default>
2
ALARM_NORMAL
<default>
2
BLEED_HOLD
<default>
2
...
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? –
Displaying a State Text Table Report
This procedure displays a detailed report of the state text table(s) on an ALN.
HMI
S, T, D (System, Text, Display) ..and then specify the state text table(s)
92 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
State Text Commands and Procedures
Example
07/17/2008 THUR
STATE TEXT TABLE
REPORT
12:58pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <ALARM_NORMAL>
Table name
Table ID
# of states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ALARM_NORMAL
<default>
2
ALARM
0
NORMAL
1
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? –
Adding a State Text Table
This procedure adds a state text table to the ALN. Before you begin, it is helpful to
identify the following items:
● Text table name
1 to 16 alphanumeric characters. Valid characters include A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9,
spaces ( ), periods (.), commas (,), dashes (-), underlines (_), and apostrophes (').
● Text table ID (Valid numbers range from 1 through 32767).
● Values and descriptions for each state.
HMI
S, T, E, T, A (System, Text, Edit, Table, Add)
Example
The following is one example of how to add a RUN_STOP state text table.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? E
>Table, States, Quit? T
>Add, Delete, Look, Quit? A
>State text table name
>State text table ID
> 1) Value
> 1) State text
> 2) Value
> 2) State text
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
:
:
:
:
:
RUN_STOP-------1---0----RUN----2----STOP---93 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
State Text Commands and Procedures
> 3) Value
Command successful
:
------
>Add, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Deleting a State Text Table
This procedure deletes a custom state text table from the ALN. Any references to the
deleted state table are represented by a question mark. Default state text tables cannot
be deleted.
HMI
S, T, E, T, D (System, Text, Edit, Table, Delete)
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? E
>Table, States, Quit? T
>Add, Delete, Look, Quit? D
>State text table name
>Are you sure (Y/N)
Command successful
:
:
RUN_STOP-------Y
Adding States to a State Text Table
This procedure adds additional states and associated text descriptions to an existing
state text table.
HMI
S, T, E, S, A (System, Text, Edit, States, Add)
Example
The following example shows how to add an additional state to the RUN_STOP state
text table:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? E
>Table, States, Quit? S
>Add, Modify, Delete, Look, Quit?
>State text table name
:
>Value
:
>State text
:
94 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
A
RUN_STOP-------3----PROOF---
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
State Text Commands and Procedures
Command successful
>Add, Modify, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Modifying a State Text Table
This procedure modifies the state values or descriptions for the entries in a state text
table.
HMI
S, T, E, S, M (System, Text, Edit, States, Modify)
Example
In this example, the State text for Value 3 will be modified from PROOF to PROOFING.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? E
>Table, States, Quit? S
>Add, Modify, Delete, Look, Quit?
>State text table name
:
>Value
:
>State text
:
Command successful
M
RUN_STOP-------3----PROOFING
Deleting States from a State Text Table
This procedure deletes a value state and the associated description from an existing
state text table. Note that you cannot delete states from a default state text table.
HMI
S, T, E, S, D (System, Text, Edit, States, Delete)
Example
In this example, the value 3 is specified for deletion.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? S
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? E
>Table, States, Quit? S
>Add, Modify, Delete, Look, Quit?
>State text table name
:
>Value
:
>Are you sure (Y/N)
:
Command successful
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
D
RUN_STOP-------3----Y
95 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
Notifications
Event Type
CHANGE_OF_STATE
COMMAND_FAILURE
FLOATING_LIMIT
OUT_OF_RANGE
Notification
Parameters
Description
Referenced Object's
Properties
New_State
Present_Value
The new value of the referenced property.
Status_Flags
Status_Flags
The Status_Flags of the referenced object.
Command_Value
Present_Value
The value of the property that was commanded.
Status_Flags
Status_Flags
The Status_Flags of the referenced object.
Feedback_Value
Feedback_Value
The value that differs from the Command_Value.
Referenced_Value
Controlled_Variable_Value
The new value of the referenced property.
Status_Flags
Status_Flags
The Status_Flags of the referenced object.
Setpoint_Value
Setpoint
The value of the setpoint reference.
Error_Limit
Error_Limit
The difference limit that was exceeded.
Exceeding_Value
Present_Value
The value that exceeded a limit.
Status_Flags
Status_Flags
The Status_Flags of the referenced object.
Deadband
Deadband
The deadband used for limit checking.
Exceeded_Limit
Low_Limit or High_Limit
The limit that was exceeded.
SNMP Procedures
Creating Notification Class
Using SNMP in a field panel requires you to create a Notification Class in the panel.
After logging into the controller, do the following:
HMI
A, B, N, E, A (Application, BACnet, Notification, Edit, Add)
96 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Field panel
Press ENTER.
Notification Class Name
SNMP
Notification ID
0 through 255.
Description
Press ENTER.
OFFNormal Priority
0 (zero)
OFFNormal Ack Required
Y
Fault Priority
0 (zero)
Fault Ack Required
Y
Normal Priority
0 (zero)
Normal Ack Required
Y
Add Destination (Y/N)
Y
Valid Days (m, t, w, th, f, sa, su)
Press ENTER.
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
Start time (HH:MM:SS)
Press ENTER.
Stop time (HH:MM:SS)
Press ENTER.
Device, Address, Broadcast
Enter D.
Recipient Device Instance
Enter the Panel Instance Number.
Process ID
Press ENTER.
Confirmed Notifications (Y/N)
Y
OffNormal transitions (Y/N)
Y
FAULT transitions (Y/N)
Y
NORMAL transitions (Y/N)
Y
Add another destination
N
Example:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? a
>Ppcl, flNdevice, Quit? b
>Calendar, Schedule, coMmander, Notification, Bbmd, coVtable,
Event, Quit? n
>Log, Display, Edit, deStinations, Quit? e
>Add, Delete, Look, Quit? a
>Field panel : ------>Notification Class Name : SNMP------------------------->Notification ID : 255--->Description : SNMP----------->OFFNORMAL Priority (0-255) : -->OFFNORMAL Ack Required (Y/N) : y
>FAULT Priority (0-255) : -->FAULT Ack Required (Y/N) : y
>NORMAL Priority (0-255) : -->NORMAL Ack Required (Y/N) : y
>Add Destination (Y/N) : y
>Valid Days (m,t,w,th,f,sa,su) : ->Start time (HH:MM:SS) : ---------->Stop time (HH:MM:SS) : ---------->Device, Address, Broadcast : d
>Recipient Device Instance : 5001
>Process ID : ------>Confirmed Notifications (Y/N) : y
>OFFNORMAL transitions (Y/N) : y
>FAULT transitions (Y/N) : y
>NORMAL transitions (Y/N) : y
>Add another destination (Y/N) : n
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
97 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
Creating Alarm Messages at the HMI
You can create alarm messages at the HMI.
After logging into the panel, do the following:
HMI
P, A, E, E, ENTER, A (Point, Alarm, mEssage, Edit, ENTER, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Message Number
0 to 250
Line 1: ?
[BACnet Alarm Message Text]
Line 2: ?
Press ENTER
Example:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>mEssage, Acknowledge, eVent, Quit? e
>Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Quit? e
>Field panel : ------>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Help, Quit? a
>Message number : 250
>Line 1:? [BACnet Alarm Message Text]------------------------>Line 2:? -------------------------------------------------Command successful
Selecting Points for the MIB for SNMP
After logging into the controller, do the following:
HMI
S, H, E, N, M, A (System, Hardware, Ethernet, sNmp, Mibpoints, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point System Name
Enter a point name.
Enable Write (Y/N)
Y
Enable Alarm Reporting (Y/N)
Y
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
98 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, sNmp, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? n
>Mibpoints, Snmpmanager, Quit? m
>Display, Add, Modify, Remove, Look, Genmib, Quit? a
>Point system name : LDO3---------------------------------->Enable Write<Y/N> : y
>Enable Alarm Reporting<Y/N> : y
Command successful
Generating the MIB File
After creating the points, adding the Notification Class, adding the Alarm Message, and
selecting the points for the MIB, you will need to generate the MIB. Using HMI software
(HyperTerminal, Tera Term, or something similar), you will need to create an output file
for the SNMP MIB.
For example, in Tera Term, do the following:
1. From the File menu, select Log. A pop-up window with file storage options
displays.
2. Type the desired log file name and then click Open. The pop-up window will close
and the log file will be created. You are ready to start logging everything from the
HMI screen.
After logging into the controller, do the following:
HMI
S, H, E, N, M, G, ENTER (System, Hardware, Ethernet, sNmp, Mibpoints, Genmib, ENTER)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, sNmp, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? n
>Mibpoints, Snmpmanager, Quit? m
>Display, Add, Modify, Remove, Look, Genmib, Quit? g
01/01/2009 THU GEN_MIB REPORT 20:21
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------sbt_fp_4194303 DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN
IMPORTS
enterprises FROM RFC1155-SMI
OBJECT-TYPE FROM RFC-1212
DisplayString FROM RFC-1213
TRAP-TYPE FROM RFC-1215;
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
99 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
sbtOBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= {enterprises 6361}
fp_4194303OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= {sbt 4194303}
fp_4194303_Notifications OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= {fp_4194303 0}
General_Notifications NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
""
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 0}
LAO1 OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))
ACCESS read-write
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Point Descriptor"
::={fp_4194303 1}
LAO1_LOW_ALARM NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{LAO1}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor"
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 1}
END
End of report
To stop logging to the file, select Close in the Tera Term log window.
Modifying the Log File
You must now modify the logged text file into a MIB file.
 Open the logged file with Word. It may look similar to the following:
h
>Enter user initials : ----high
>Enter user password : ---------------????
09:06:32 09/14/2009 MON Logged on successfully Field panel
<4194303>
User: <high> <High default user account>
100 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? -s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? -h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Licensemanager,
Quit? -e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, sNmp, Telnet, mibpOints, Webserver, Quit? –n
>Mibpoints, Snmpmanager, Quit? -m
>Display, Add, Modify, Remove, Look, Genmib, Quit? -g
09/14/2009 MON GEN_MIB REPORT 09:06
------------------------------------------------------------------------sbt_fp_4194303 DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN
IMPORTS
enterprises FROM RFC1155-SMI
OBJECT-TYPE FROM RFC-1212
DisplayString FROM RFC-1213
TRAP-TYPE FROM RFC-1215;
sbtOBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= {enterprises 6361}
fp_4194303OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= {sbt 4194303}
fp_4194303_Notifications OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= {fp_4194303 0}
General_Notifications NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
""
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 0}
P1LDI01 OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))
ACCESS read-write
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Point Descriptor"
::={fp_4194303 1}
Delete all information and symbols before sbt_fp_xxxxxxx (bolded in the example
above).
The end of the file should be similar to the following:

P5LAI02_FAULT NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
101 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
{P5LAI02}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor"
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 18}
END
End of report
>Display, Add, Modify, Remove, Look, Genmib, Quit? 09:11:49 09-14-2009 MON Logged off successfully Field panel
<4194303>
User: <HIGH> <High default user account>
>Time, Message, Cancel, Hello? –
1. Delete all the information after END (bolded in the example above). Save the file.
2. Change the Point Descriptor or Trap Descriptor to a user-defined description, so
the SNMP manager will see the Descriptor on the Manager Screen. See the
example below.
P1LDI01 OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))
ACCESS read-write
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Point Descriptor" change to “Point 1 Logical
Digital Input 01”
::={fp_4194303 1}
P1LDI01_Alarm NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P1LDI01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Switch 1 is in the
Manual position”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 1}
P1LDI01_NORMAL NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P1LDI01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
102 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Switch 1 is in the Auto
position”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 2}
P1LDI01_FAULT NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P1LDI01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Switch 1 is faulted”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 3}
-----------------------------------------------------------------------P4LAO01 OBJECT-TYPE
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))
ACCESS read-write
STATUS mandatory
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Point Descriptor" change to “Room 6, 2nd Flr, Bldg
4 Temp”
::={fp_4194303 4}
P4LAO01_LOW_ALARM NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P4LAO01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Room 6 2nd Flr Bldg 4
Low Temp Alarm”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 11}
P4LAO01_HIGH_ALARM NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P4LAO01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Room 6 2nd Flr Bldg 4
High Temp Alarm”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 12}
P4LAO01_NORMAL NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P4LAO01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
103 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Room 6 2nd Flr Bldg 4
Normal Temp”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 13}
P4LAO01_FAULT NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS
{P4LAO01}
STATUScurrent
DESCRIPTION
"Add Missing Trap Descriptor" change to “Room 6 2nd Flr Bldg 4
Temp Sensor Fault”
::={fp_4194303_Notifications 14}
1. Save the file. Once the file is saved, change the file type from .XXX to .MIB. See
the MIB section of this document for an example.
2. Test your MIB so that you can browse and see the points using some type of a MIB
browser, such as iReasoning.
3. Pass this file to the SNMP manager user so it can be loaded into the manager and
receive traps.
NOTE: This is not a validated MIB and must be modified further. To validate your
MIB, use a MIB validator site, such as Muonics.com.
Adding SNMP Manager Information for Traps
NOTE: A maximum of five SNMP Manager IP Addresses can be added.
HMI
S, H, E, N, S, A (System, Hardware, Ethernet, sNmp, Snmpmanager, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
IP Address
Enter IP Address
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, sNmp, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? n
>Mibpoints, Snmpmanager, Quit? s
>Add, Remove, Display, Modify, Cnfgpswd, Quit? a
>IP Address : 130.132.40.6
Command successful
>Add, Remove, Display, Modify, Cnfgpswd, Quit?
104 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
Configuring Password for Traps and Receiving Commands
If you want to change the default User Name, Privacy Password and Authentication
Password, do the following:
HMI
S, H, E, N, S, C (System, Hardware, Ethernet, sNmp, Snmpmanager, Cnfgpswd)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Existing User Name
siemens (all lowercase)
Existing Privacy Password
high$123 (all lowercase)
Existing Authentic Password
high$123 (all lowercase)
New User Name
Enter new user name.
New Privacy Password
Enter new privacy password.
New Authentic Password
Enter new authentic password.
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Reportprinter,
Licensemanager, Quit? e
>ipSettings, Bbmd, sNmp, Telnet, Webserver, Quit? n
>Mibpoints, Snmpmanager, Quit? s
>Add, Remove, Display, Modify, Cnfgpswd, Quit? c
>Existing User Name : siemens
>Existing Privacy Password : ????????
>Existing Authentic Password : ????????
>New User Name : hsjobsite
>New Privacy Password : ????????
>New Authentic Password : ????????
Command successful
Back up, Restore, and Autorestore
The field panel must be configured to automatically restore the database from flash
memory after a coldstart, and the TALON View software should not be used:
● When autorestore is enabled, a coldstart does not result in the same downtime as
with earlier revisions of firmware. Because there is no waiting on a full download
from the backup system, the database is restored from flash so quickly that it
seems as though the field panel never coldstarted.
● Database restoration from flash is disabled by default and should be enabled.
HMI
S, H, F, C, L (System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config, db_fiLe)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
105 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
Next Sub-menu Option
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Save,
Field panel
Enter field panel name
Clear
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Save, Clear, or Restore the
database.
N
Do not Save, Clear, or Restore the
database.
Restore_db
Description
Autorestore
Field panel
Enter field panel name
●
Enable
●
Disable
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Enable Autorestore.
N
Disable Autorestore.
Display
Field panel
Enter field panel name
In order to support autorestore and database backup to flash, the following new HMI
prompts (bolded below) have been added.
106 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
107 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 2—System Setup
SNMP Procedures
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord, Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dAtes, deStinations, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text, Quit? h
>Fieldpanels, Ethernet, nodeNametable, Disks, Partners, Licensemanager, Vaem, Quit? f
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Modify, Config, Ostracize, Quit? c
>Hmi, alnSettings, db_fiLe, Fln, mOdem, Names, Defaultlanguage, Quit? l
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? s
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Database Backed Up to Flash
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? c
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Flash Backup Erased
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? r
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Command successful
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? a
>Enable, Disable, Quit? e
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Autorestore enabled
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? a
>Enable, Disable, Quit? d
>Field panel : -->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Field panel 6: Autorestore disabled
>Save, Clear, Restore_db, Autorestore, Display, Quit? d
>Field panel : ---
01/01/2006 SUN DB File Report 00:16
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Field panel : 6
Flash backup : Present
Database size : 2482 bytes
Last
saved : 00:16:43 01/01/2006 SUN
108 | 408
Siemens
Result Industry,
of lastInc.
backup : Success
Building Technologies
Autorestore
: Disabled
File manager status : Idle
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
What Are User Accounts?
Chapter 3—User Accounts
Chapter 3 provides information for the high-level system administrator who is
responsible for overall system operation and security. In order to use the functionality
described in User Accounts, you must have Edit access (highest level) privileges to the
system.
Major topics in this chapter include:
● What Are User Accounts?
● What Are Access Groups?
● What Are Access Levels?
● Password Security Options—Three Strikes Lockout and Password Expiration
● Guidelines for Managing User Accounts
● User Account Attributes
● User Account Procedures
– Adding a User Account
– Modifying a User Account
– Copying a User Account
– Deleting a User Account
– Modifying an Access Group Name
● User Account Reports
Before You Begin
Before using the information in this section, you should have a working understanding
of the following concepts:
● HVAC equipment of the facility
● Point database
● General knowledge of the TALON Automation System
What Are User Accounts?
User accounts are used to manage access and security for field panels on a specified
Automation Level Network (ALN). By creating individual accounts, a system
administrator can control each user’s access to objects and functions residing in field
panels on a specified ALN.
Specifically, a system administrator can perform the following tasks:
● Define the users that can access a ALN
● Assign access to access groups
● Assign privileges to field panel functions residing on an ALN
Any user accounts that are created or modified through the field panel HMI are used by
all of the field panels on the specified ALN. These accounts are also automatically
uploaded to the primary mass storage device. ALN user accounts do not affect TALON
View software access.
Default User Accounts
There are three default user accounts: HIGH, MED, and LOW. They are permanent
and cannot be deleted from the system; only their passwords can be changed. It is
recommended that the default accounts be copied and used as templates for setting
up other individual accounts.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
109 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
What Are Access Groups?
In Firmware Revision 3.3. or later, the passwords for the default accounts (“high/high”
and “med/med”) must be changed immediately upon login. When you log in using
either of these accounts, you will immediately be prompted to change the password to
something other than “high” or “med”. The “low” accounts need not change.
What Are Access Groups?
Access groups are used to manage related objects (points, applications, and devices)
under one group name. When an object is created, it can be assigned to one or more
access groups. A system administrator then defines a user’s privilege to work with
each access group when setting up a user account. The privilege granted is based on
the user’s need to work with the points in each access group.
For example, you could create an access group called LIGHTING and place all points
that control or monitor lights in the LIGHTING group. Then you can manage which
users are able to control or monitor lights based on user privileges granted to the
LIGHTING group.
There are 30 standard access groups, numbered 1 through 30, in the system. Each
group can be given a unique, descriptive name. Field panels can store only 30 access
groups and those groups are shared between the TALON View workstation and all
field panels on an ALN. Any changes to access groups 1 to 30 at the TALON View
workstation or field panel are downloaded to the field panel or uploaded to the TALON
View workstation, as appropriate.
See Modifying an Access Group Name [➙ 124] in this chapter for more information.
What Are Access Levels?
NOTE:
See ABT Site Tool online help (Settings\User Profile\Access Levels) for information
on DXR device object access levels.
Access levels define a user’s privileges to work with a field panel function and
determine the extent to which the function can be used. The following four access
levels are available for field panel functions:
● No Access—Users cannot see the function, and the related prompts are not
displayed in the menus when the user is logged on.
● Read Only—Users see prompts and information related to this feature, but the
objects cannot be commanded and the parameters cannot be changed.
● Command—Users can view and command the value or status of objects.
● Edit—Users can view, command, add, delete, and modify objects.
Each access level can be assigned to field panel functions.
For example, if a user has Command access to Point Editing, then only the
functionality needed to command a point is available. The user would not have the
prompts available to add, modify, or delete a point definition.
Access groups and access levels work together to give a user only the access needed.
For example, if a user has the Edit privilege to points but is assigned to only three of
six access groups in a field panel, then the user can only edit points in those three
access groups. The user will not even be able to see the points in the other three
access groups.
110 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
Password Security Options—Three-Strikes Lockout and Password
Password Security Options—Three-Strikes Lockout
and Password
The Password Security Options enhance system security and give the system
administrator additional control over user access. These options closely mimic
password security features found on most computer networks.
● Password Expiration enhances system security by forcing users to regularly
change their password.
● Setting a password expiration limit activates the feature for Three-Strikes Lockout.
With this option, user accounts are disabled (locked out) after three failed
password logon attempts.
Features of the Password Security Options
All user accounts contain an expiration limit, an expiration date, and a lockout counter.
Expiration Limit
The expiration limit is entered by the system administrator when creating or modifying
a user account.
● The expiration limit value is the number of days until the password expires.
– A value of zero (0) indicates no limit. (The password never expires.)
– The maximum allowable entry is 365 days. (The password expires every 365
days.)
– Default accounts are created with no expiration date.
● Only users with account modification privileges are able to set expiration limits.
Expiration Date
The firmware calculates an expiration date by adding the value of the expiration limit to
the current system time.
● Passwords expire at midnight on the expiration date.
● Users must successfully log on to a field panel in order to change the password.
● Passwords can be changed by either the user or the system administrator.
● When the system administrator creates a new user account or changes a user’s
password, the expiration date is set to the current date. In this case, the password
immediately expires the next time the user successfully logs on to a field panel.
● When a user’s password expires, access is limited to password modification until a
new password is entered. Full user privileges, as defined in the user setup, are
restored once the password is successfully changed.
Lockout Counter
The lockout counter counts unsuccessful logon attempts for an individual user. Any
successful logon resets the lockout counter.
If the password expiration limit is zero (no limit), there is no limit on unsuccessful logon
attempts.
If a password expiration limit is entered, Three-Strikes Lockout prevents system
access after three sequential failed logon attempts. After the third failed logon attempt,
the account is locked and only a system administrator with account modification
privileges can clear the account.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
111 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
Password Security Options—Three-Strikes Lockout and Password
●
If an account is locked out, the information is transmitted to all nodes as part of the
user account.
● If only one administration account has account modification privileges and that
account becomes locked out, the only available remedy is to unlock the
administrator account through an Insight workstation.
For more information on clearing a locked out account, see Modifying a User Account
[➙ 118] in this chapter.
Password Alarm Messages
The following informational messages related to password activity are printed in the
alarm window at the TALON View workstation:
● Failed logon attempt
● Account lockout
User Instructions for Changing the Password
The only function available to users is changing the password.
The passWord prompt at the HMI Main Menu allows users to change their password
at any time. The following information must be entered once the passWord prompt is
selected:
● Current password
● New password
● Verification of the new password
If the current password is entered incorrectly, the error is not verified until all data has
been entered. You must return to the main menu and start again.
E129(0x0081) - Invalid password
If the current password is entered correctly, but the new password and verification
password do not match, the change is not accepted until the verification password
matches the new password.
Change your password by completing the following steps. See Account Attributes
[➙ 113] if you need further explanation of the information required for a field.
HMI
W (passWord)
Prompt / Field
Option / Entry
Description
Enter user password
Current password
New password
New password
Verify password
Retype the password
A message confirms the password change and the new expiration date.
Example
>Enter user password
: ????????------>New password
: ????---------->Verify new password
: ????----------User account <HIGH> modified, Password Expire Date 05/23/2004
112 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
Guidelines for Managing User Accounts
Guidelines for Managing User Accounts
The information in each user account is used to set up the working environment when
that user is logged on. The account information includes user identification for logon
and reports, access group assignment, the access level granted for each field panel
function, and password expiration settings.
● The general account information (user initials and account name) does not require
much management. Once this information is defined, it should stay the same for as
long as the account is defined.
– To change a user’s initials or an account name, you must copy the account.
For more information, see Copying a User Account [➙ 120] in this chapter.
– To change a user’s password or clear a locked out account, follow the
instructions in this chapter under Modifying a User Account [➙ 118].
● Use access groups to limit which points, applications, or devices a user is able to
use. Keep the following guidelines in mind when creating access groups:
– Objects (points, applications, and devices) can be assigned to more than one
access group.
– An access group can include an unlimited number of objects.
– Any number of access groups can be assigned to an individual user account.
● Assign access levels based on the user’s responsibilities and the need to use the
application or function. For example, if a user receives No Access privileges to an
access group, then the related applications or functions are not displayed in the
prompt string when the user logs on to the field panel.
● Keep in mind that you can change all aspects (except the user initials and account
name) of a user’s account at any time. This includes:
– Adding and deleting users as necessary.
– Creating and deleting access groups.
– Changing access levels for field panel functions.
User Account Attributes
Each user account contains the following information regarding access levels and
privileges:
Account Attributes.
Attribute
Input Option
Description
User initials
1 to 4 characters
Identifies a user in logs and reports. Each user
must have unique initials. To change the user
initials once the account is set up, the existing
account must be copied and renamed. Valid
characters include A to Z and 0 to 9. Do not
use #, ?, or *. This field is not case sensitive.
Account name
1 to 40 characters
Name used to log on to the field panel. The full
name is displayed in reports. Each user must
have a unique account name. To change the
account name once the account is set up, the
existing account must be copied and renamed.
Valid characters include A to Z and 0 to 9.
Do not use #, ?, or *. This field is not case
sensitive.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
113 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Attributes
Account Attributes.
Attribute
Input Option
Description
Password and
Verify password
3 to 15 characters
A password for the user to enter when logging
on to the field panel. Valid characters include A
to Z and 0 to 9.
Do not use #, ?, or *. This field is not case
sensitive.
System, User
namespace
S (System), U (User)
Defines if the user sees the System or User
name for points in the field panel.
The PPCL editor always uses and displays the
point system name.
Access group(s)
Numeric value between 1
and 30
Defines which access groups the user can see.
The default is 1 through 30.
Point privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
points.
Alarm privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
alarms.
Trend privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
point trending.
Application privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
PPCL programs and FLN devices.
PPCL privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
PPCL programs.
FLN devices privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
FLN devices.
Equipment Scheduler
privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
zones, command tables, and scheduling
equipment.
System privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
system functions, such as user accounts and
alarm destinations.
Diagnostics privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
field panel diagnostics.
Users privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for working with
user accounts on the network.
Hardware privilege
N, R, C, E*
Defines the user’s privileges for adding,
deleting, and modifying the field panel
characteristics.
Language ID
0409 English American
0c0c French Canadian
(Other languages may be
defined.)
Specifies a user’s default logon language.
Other available language options are
determined at the Defaultlanguage prompt
(System, Hardware, Fieldpanels, Config,
Defaultlanguage).
Time format
6 format options are
available. Type ? for a list
of options.
Specifies the format for the time. The default is
HH:MM:SS.
114 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
Account Attributes.
Attribute
Input Option
Description
Date format
20 format options are
available. Type ? for a list
of options.
Specifies the format for the date. The default is
MM/DD/YYYY.
Autologoff enabled
(Y/N)
Y (Yes), N (No)
Defines whether a user is automatically logged
off a field panel after a defined period of
inactivity.
Autologoff delay
1 to 1440 minutes
When enabled, a user is automatically logged
off a field panel after a defined period of
inactivity.
Password Expire Limit
Numeric value between 0
and 365
Number of days until the password expires.
Zero (0) indicates no limit. (The password
never expires.)
365 is the maximum allowable entry.
(The password expires every 365 days.)
* N (No_access)
Users cannot see the function, and the related prompts are not displayed in the menus
when the user is logged on.
R (Read_only)
Users see prompts and information related to this feature, but the objects cannot be
commanded and the parameters cannot be changed.
C (Command)
Users can view and command the value or status of objects.
E (Edit)
Users can view, command, add, delete, and modify objects.
User Account Procedures
Adding a User Account
A system administrator is responsible for creating new user accounts.
NOTE:
If multiple languages are installed on a field panel, you may want to view the available
language options before adding a new account. To list the languages installed on a
particular field panel, go to the Defaultlanguage prompt (System, Hardware,
Fieldpanels, Config, Defaultlanguage), type ?, and press ENTER.
Creating a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, E, A (System, Users, Accounts, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
User initials
Type the new user’s initials.
Account name
Type the account name.
Password
Type a password for the user.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
115 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
Verify password
System, User namespace
Access group(s)
Privilege
116 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Retype the password.
S
View System point names.
U
View User point names. (default setting)
All groups.
Default
A single access group.
Valid value 1 through 30.
Multiple access groups.
Valid values 1 through 30 separated by commas, or use
two periods to indicate a range (for example,
1..4,7,9,12..20).
Point
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Alarm
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Trend
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Application
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
PPCL
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
FLN devices
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Equipment Scheduler
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
System
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Diagnostics
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Users
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Hardware
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
Language ID
Time format
Date format
AutoLogoff enabled (Y/N)
Language.
Default
Particular language.
Language ID, ? displays all available languages.
(HH:MM:SS)
Default
Particular format.
Time format; ? displays all available formats.
(MM/DD/YYYY)
Default
Particular format.
Date format; ? displays all available formats.
Y
Enable automatic logoff.
1 to 1440 minutes.
AutoLogoff delay.
N
Disable automatic logoff.
Password Expire Limit
0 to 365 days.
Use for PXM10Tiny AutoLogin (Y/N)
Y
Enable automatic login.
N
Disable automatic login.
The message User account <NUA> added displays once the account has been
successfully created.
Example
The following example shows how to create a user account:
>User initials
: NUA>Account name
: NEW USER ACCOUNT---------------------->Password
: ???----------->Verify password
: ???----------->System, User namespace
: U
>Access group(s)
: 1..30--------------------------------->Point privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Alarm privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Trend privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Application privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>PPCL privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>FLN devices privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: R
>Equipment Scheduler privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command,
Edit: E
>System privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Diagnostics privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: R
>Users privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Hardware privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Language ID
: 0409
>Time format
: HH:MM:SS-->Date format
: MM/DD/YYYY>AutoLogoff enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>AutoLogoff delay
: 5-->Password Expire Limit
: 30>Use for PXM10Tiny AutoLogin (Y/N): Y
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
117 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
User account <NUA> added
Modifying a User Account
This procedure modifies a user account, resets or changes a user password, or clears
a locked out account in a field panel.
Any account modification activity by the system administrator clears a locked out user
account. No changes to the current settings are required; however, it is recommended
that the user password always be changed when an account has been locked out.
If an existing user account is configured with AutoLogin for PXM10Tiny and you modify
another user account to use this feature, the original user account’s AutoLogin
privileges for PXM10Tiny is no longer valid.
NOTE:
If multiple languages are installed on a field panel, you may want to view the available
language options before adding a new account. To list the languages installed on a
particular field panel, go to the Defaultlanguage prompt (System, Hardware,
Fieldpanels, Config, Defaultlanguage), type ?, and press ENTER.
Modifying a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, E, M (System, Users, Accounts, Edit, Modify)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
User initials
Modify password (Y/N)
Type the initials of the user account you want to modify.
N
Retain the current password.
Y
Change the password.
Password.
Type a new password for the user.
Verify password.
Retype the password.
System, User namespace
System displays the current setting.
S
View System point names.
U
View User point names.
Access group(s)
Privilege
118 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Description
Current setting is displayed.
A single access group.
Valid values are 1 through 30.
Multiple access groups.
Valid values are 1 through 30 separated by commas, or use two
periods to indicate a range (for example, 1..4,7,9,12..20).
Point
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Alarm
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
Language ID
Trend
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Application
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
PPCL
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
FLN devices
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Equipment Scheduler
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
System
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Diagnostics
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Users
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Hardware
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit)
Language
Default
Particular language.
Language ID, ? displays all available languages.
Time format
Default
Particular format.
Date format
AutoLogoff enabled (Y/N)
Default
Particular format.
Date format; ? displays all available formats.
Y
Enable or retain automatic logoff.
AutoLogoff delay.
1 to 1440 minutes
N
Disable automatic logoff.
Password Expire Limit
Use for PXM10Tiny AutoLogin
(Y/N)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Time format; ? displays all available formats.
0 to 365 days.
Y
Enable automatic login.
N
Disable automatic login.
User's Manual
119 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
The message User account <NUA> modified displays once the account has
been successfully modified.
Example
The following example shows how to modify a user account:
>User initials
: NUA>Modify password (Y/N)
: Y
>Password
: ???----------->Verify password
: ???----------->System, User namespace
: U
>Access group(s)
: 1..30--------------------------------->Point privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Alarm privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Trend privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Application privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>PPCL privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: R
>FLN devices privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Equipment Scheduler privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command,
Edit: C
>System privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: R
>Diagnostics privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Users privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: N
>Hardware privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: C
>Language ID
: 0409
>Time format
: HH:MM:SS-->Date format
: MM/DD/YYYY>AutoLogoff enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>AutoLogoff delay
: 5-->Password Expire Limit
: 45>Use for PXM10Tiny AutoLogin (Y/N): Y
User account <NUA> modified
Copying a User Account
This procedure copies a user account in a field panel. All of the information associated
with a user account is copied, with the exception of the password, user initials, account
name, and PXM10Tiny autologin.
You can create a new user account by copying a default user account (HIGH, MED, or
LOW), and then modifying the information specific for the new user, such as the
password, initials, etc. Also use this procedure for changing a user’s initials or account
name.
Copying a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, E, C (System, Users, Accounts, Edit, Copy)
120 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
User initials to copy
Type the initials of the user whose account you
want to copy.
New user initials
Type the initials of the new user account.
New account name
Type the name of the new account.
New password
Type the password for the new account.
Verify new password
Retype the password.
The message User account <NUA> copied to user account <AUA> displays
once the system copies the user account to the field panel.
Example
The following example shows how to copy a user account to a newly created account:
>User initials to copy
:
>New user initials
:
>New account name
:
--------->New password
:
>Verify new password
:
User account <NUA> copied to user
NUAAUAANOTHER USER ACCOUNT---------???-----------???-----------account <AUA>
Deleting a User Account
This procedure deletes a user account in a field panel.
NOTE:
The default user accounts (HIGH, MED, and LOW) cannot be deleted from the
system.
Deleting a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, E, D (System, Users, Accounts, Edit, Delete)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
User initials
Delete global data
Description
Type the initials of the user account to delete.
Y
Delete the user account.
N
If you verify the deletion, the system deletes the user account from the field panel and
displays the message User account <NUA> deleted.
Example
The following example shows how to delete a user account:
>User initials
: NUA>Delete global data? Are you sure (Y/N):
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
Y
121 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
User account <NUA> deleted
Configuring AutoLogin for a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, E, A (System, Users, Accounts, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
User initials
Type the new user’s initials.
Account name
Type the account name.
Password
Type a password for the user.
Verify password
Retype the password.
System, User namespace
Access group(s)
Privilege
NOTE: Auto User accounts need access to
Point and Alarm ONLY.
122 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
S
View System point names.
U
View User point names. (default setting)
All groups.
(default setting).
A single access group.
Valid value 1 through 30.
Multiple access groups.
Valid values 1 through 30 separated by commas, or use
two periods to indicate a range (for example,
1..4,7,9,12..20).
Point
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Alarm
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Trend
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Application
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
PPCL
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
FLN devices
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Equipment Scheduler
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
System
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Procedures
Language ID
Diagnostics
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Users
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Hardware
N (No_access)
R (Read_only)
C (Command)
E (Edit) (default setting)
Language
Default
Particular language.
Language ID, ? displays all available languages.
NOTE: You can also enter nothing, to display all
available languages.
Time format
(HH:MM:SS)
Default
Particular format.
Time format; ? displays all available formats.
NOTE: You can also enter nothing, to display all
available Time formats.
Date format
(MM/DD/YYYY)
Default
Particular format.
Date format; ? displays all available formats.
NOTE: You can also enter nothing, to display all
available Date formats.
AutoLogoff enabled (Y/N)
Y
Enable automatic logoff.
AutoLogoff delay.
1 to 1440 minutes.
N
Disable automatic logoff.
Password Expire Limit
0 to 365 days.
Use for PXM10Tiny AutoLogin (Y/N)
Y
Enable automatic login.
N
Disable automatic login.
Example
>User initials
: tiny
>Account name
: PXM10TINY---------------------->Password
: ?????--------->Verify password
: ?????--------->System, User namespace
: U
>Access group(s)
: 1..30--------------------------------->Point privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Alarm privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Trend privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Application privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>PPCL privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>FLN devices privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
123 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Reports
>Equipment Scheduler privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command,
Edit: E
>System privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Diagnostics privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Users privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Hardware privilege - No_access, Read_only, Command, Edit: E
>Language ID
: 0409
>Time format
: HH:MM:SS-->Date format
: MM/DD/YYYY>AutoLogoff enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>AutoLogoff delay
: 5-->Password Expire Limit
: 30>Use for PXM10Tiny AutoLogin (Y/N): Y
User account <tiny> added
Modifying an Access Group Name
This procedure modifies the name of an access group in a field panel. There are 30
standard access groups in the system.
This procedure allows you to give descriptive names to access groups.
Modifying an Access Group
HMI
S, U, G, M (System, Users, accessGroups, Modify)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Access group number
Type the number of the access group name.
Valid values are 1 through 30.
Access group name
Type the new name for the access group.
The system modifies the name of an access group in a field panel.
Example
The following example shows how to modify an access group:
>Access group number
>Access group name
Command successful
:
:
1AIR HANDER UNITS--------------
>Display, Modify, Quit? –
User Account Reports
Displaying a System Accounts Log
This report displays the list of user accounts defined on the ALN.
124 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Reports
Displaying a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, L (System, Users, Accounts, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
User initials
Particular user.
Type the user initials.
All user accounts.
The field panel displays a System Accounts Log report.
Example
The following example shows all user accounts on the ALN:
12/04/2009 FRI
SYSTEM ACCOUNTS LOG
REPORT
21:22
------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
User
Name
PXM10Tiny
Namespace
AutoLogoff
mins
AutoLogin
-------------------------------------------------------------------------HIGH
High default user
account
System
5
N
LOW
Low default user
account
User
5
Y
MED
Med default user
account
System
5
N
End of report
Displaying a User Account
This report displays a user’s access group and privilege settings for field panel
functions and the password expiration limit, expiration date, and whether or not the
account is locked out.
Displaying a User Account
HMI
S, U, A, D (System, Users, Accounts, Display)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
User initials
Particular user account.
Type the user initials.
All user accounts.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
125 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Reports
Display report
H
Here
P
Printer
The field panel displays a System Accounts Display report.
Example
The following example shows the user account settings for user NUA. In this case, the
account is locked out.
>User initials
>Here, Printer
:
:
NUAH
12/04/2009 FRI
SYSTEM ACCOUNTS DISPLAY
REPORT
21:52
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <high>
User
Name
PXM10Tiny
Namespace
AutoLogoff
mins
AutoLogin
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------HIGH
High default user
account
System
5
N
-- Regional Options :
Time
Date
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
ID
0409
Language
English American
-- Access Control :
Access group(s) :
<all>
Functional access privilege :
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Point
Alarm
Trend
Application
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Application PPCL
Application FLN Devices
Application Equipment Scheduler
System
Edit System Diagnostics
Edit System Users
Edit System Hardware
126 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Reports
-- Password :
Expired
N
Expire Limit(in Days)
0
Expire Date
01/18/2038
Lockout
0
Displaying Access Groups
This report displays the names of the access groups in a field panel.
Displaying Access Groups
HMI
S, U, G, D (System, Users, accessGroups, Display)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
First access group number
Default
Particular starting access group.
Last access group number
Type the access group number.
Default
Display report
Particular ending access group.
Type the access group number.
H
Here
P
Printer
The system displays the System Access Groups Log report.
Example
The following example shows access groups one through ten:
>First access group number
>Last access group number
>Here, Printer
:
:
:
110
H
12/30/2006 SAT
SYSTEM ACCESS GROUPS LOG
REPORT
06:28
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for < 1> to <10>
Number
Name
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------1
AIR HANDER UNITS
2
Access2
3
Access3
4
Access4
5
6
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Access5
Access6
User's Manual
127 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 3—User Accounts
User Account Reports
7
8
Access7
Access8
9
10
Access9
Access10
End of report
>Display, Modify, Quit? -
128 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Basic Concepts
Chapter 4—Point Database
This chapter discusses the following topics:
● Point Database Basic Concepts
● Point Characteristics
● Point Type Attributes
● Commanding Points
● Monitoring Points
● Point Database Procedures
Point Database Basic Concepts
The point database is a file containing all information defined for every point in the
TALON Automation System. The system controls points according to their definitions
and the purposes they represent. Points are classified as follows:
Logical points
A group of one to four physical and/or virtual point addresses under two unique 30character names. Either name is referenced by operators, control programs, and the
other system features to command, examine, and store information for those points.
Physical points
Logical points with physical addresses that the system uses to reference the actual
physical devices connected to a field input/output termination.
Virtual points
Logical points with virtual addresses residing in memory that do not represent a piece
of equipment. Virtual points generally store values such as setpoints and results from
calculations.
Subpoints
Points within an application, such as equipment scheduler or a TEC. May be
referenced by operators, control programs, and the other system features to
command, examine, and store information for those points.
Local point
Standard system points residing in a PPCL program that are specific to that program
(such as ALMCNT).
Logical Points
All logical points are composed of one or more of the following four basic point types:
Analog Input (AI), Analog Output (AO), Digital Input (DI), and Digital Output (DO).
Analog Input (AI)
Analog Input (AI) points provide variable-type information to the field panel. Examples
of AI points include:
● Temperature sensors
● Relative humidity sensors
Analog Output (AO)
Analog Output (AO) points receive variable commands from the field panel. Examples
of AO points include:
● Valve or damper actuators
● Variable speed drives
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
129 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Basic Concepts
Digital Input (DI)
Digital Input (DI) points provide two-state information to the field panel. Examples of DI
points include:
● Proof of operation switches
● Filter alarms
● Smoke alarms
Digital Output (DO)
Digital Output (DO) points receive two-state commands from the field panel. Examples
of DO points include:
● Fans and pumps
● Electric/pneumatic switches
Logical Point Type Combinations
The basic point types are combined to form numerous logical point types. These point
types are adapted to various pieces of equipment. The following table contains a list of
all available logical point types used by the system.
Logical Point Types.
Point Type
Point Composition
Description
LAI
1 - AI (numeric value)
Logical Analog Input—Monitors one AI point (sensors for
temperature, flow, pressure, humidity, and so on).
LAO
1 - AO (numeric value)
Logical Analog Output—Commands one AO point (positioners for
dampers, valves, and motors, and so on).
LDI
1 - DI (ON/OFF)
Logical Digital Input—Monitors one latched DI point (door contacts,
smoke detectors, low temperature detectors, damper end switches,
and so on).
LDO
1 - DO (ON/OFF)
Logical Digital Output—Commands one latched DO point for a two
state (ON/OFF) device. For example, switches for lighting and
occupancy indication.
LENUM*
1 - Analog (multiple value point–
numeric only)
Logical ENUMerated—Control points that have multiple numeric
values. Each value is associated with a state text entry.
L2SL
1 - DO (ON/OFF)
1 - DI (PROOF status - mandatory)
Logical 2-State Latched—Commands one latched DO point
(ON/OFF) and monitors one latched DI point (PROOF). For
example, motor starters (ON/OFF) that provide proof indication,
such as fan and pump motors.
L2LP
1 - DO (pulsed ON)
1 - DO (pulsed OFF)
1 - DI (PROOF status–optional)
Logical 2-State Pulsed—Commands two pulsed DO points
(ON/OFF) and monitors one optional latched DI point (proof). For
example, push button motor starters ON/OFF) that provide proof
indication, such as fan or pump motors.
LFSSL*
1 - DO (OFF/FAST)
1 - DO (OFF/SLOW)
1 - DI (PROOF status)
Logical FAST/SLOW/STOP Latched—Commands two latched DO
points (ON/OFF) and monitors one latched DI point (PROOF). For
example, motor starters (ON/OFF) that provide proof indication,
such as fan and pump motors.
130 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Basic Concepts
LFSSP*
1 - DO (pulsed OFF)
1 - DO (pulsed FAST)
1 - DO (pulsed SLOW)
1 - DI (PROOF status)
Logical FAST/SLOW/STOP Pulsed—Commands three pulsed DO
points (ON/OFF) and monitors one optional latched DI point
(PROOF). For example, push button motor starters (ON/OFF) that
provide proof indication, such as fan or pump motors.
LOOAL*
1 - DO (ON/OFF)
1 - DO (AUTO)
1 - DI (PROOF status)
Logical ON/OFF/AUTO Latched—Commands two latched DO
points (ON/OFF and Auto/Commanded) and monitors one optional
latched DI point (PROOF). For example, three state
(ON/OFF/AUTO) motor starters that provide proof indication.
LOOAP*
1 - DO (pulsed ON)
1 - DO (pulsed OFF)
1 - DO (latched AUTO)
1 - DI (PROOF status)
Logical ON/OFF/AUTO Pulsed—Commands two pulsed DO points
(ON/OFF) and one latched DO (AUTO) point, and monitors one
optional latched DI point (PROOF). For example, three state
(ON/OFF/AUTO) push button motor starters that provide proof.
LAPCI
1 - DI (counter)
Logical Pulsed Accumulator—Counts the number of pulses
(momentary contacts) for one DI point. For example, an LPACI
point can track electrical consumption by totaling the number of
kilowatt hours from a power meter.
*
In BACnet Fast/Slow/Stop, On/Off/Auto and LENUM points are mapped to multistate objects such that their default
state text table starts at one instead of zero (1,2,3 rather than 0,1,2 as in the TALON Automation System).
Resetting a Logical Pulsed Accumulator (LPACI) Point Under BACnet
Input points cannot be commanded when they are in service. To reset an LPACI point:
1. Take the point out of service.
2. Command the present value to NONE (empty).
3. Put the point back in service.
Physical Points
Physical points reside on a field panel, expansion device or equipment controller. They
are only usable when defined by a logical point to be one of the basic four point types.
They have physical characteristics such as wire terminals, address and type as
follows.
Analog Input (AI)
Integer values using Analog to Digital Conversion ADC. Sensor type may be current,
voltage, pneumatic or resistive. Sensor type may be fixed or switched through
hardware or point definition.
Analog Output (AO)
Integer values using Digital to Analog Conversion DAC. Actuator type may be current,
voltage or binary. Actuator type may be fixed or switched through hardware or point
definition. Actuator type may not be seen by older firmware or software.
Digital Input (DI)
Integer values 1/0 using contact sensing.
Pulse Accumulator Input has Integer counting values using contact sensing.
Digital Output (DO)
Integer values 1/0 using relay contacts or solid state to switch control.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
131 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Basic Concepts
Universal
Point may be changed to some or all of the basic four types through hardware switches
or point definition.
Virtual Points
A virtual point is a logical point without a physical device. Virtual points are used for
various applications and can display any of the following formats:
Float
Floating point values.
Integer
Integer values.
Time
A floating point value that represents the time of day (for example, 13.5 = 1:30 P.M.).
Date
A floating point value identifying the number of minutes that have elapsed since
01/01/1970.
Date/Time
A floating point value identifying the number of minutes that have elapsed since January 1 at
00:00 in the current year.
How Virtual Points Can Be Used
The following examples demonstrate how virtual points can be used:
For setpoints
Virtual points can store desired values such as temperature, relative humidity, and
pressure. For the system to make adjustments to control equipment, the system must
compare the actual value to the desired value. The field panel stores the desired value
in memory as a virtual analog output point.
For operational values
Virtual points are often used to store operational data. For example, a virtual point can
be used to store the high and low temperatures for outside air. Applications such as
Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) use virtual points for different types of values.
For a time/date
PPCL uses virtual time and date points to accomplish building control.
Subpoints
Subpoints are points that are unique to the application where they reside. Two
applications may use the same subpoint name, but the actual subpoints are different
because they reside in separate applications.
Example
Because of the unique TEC name, the value in the ROOM TEMP point of
BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC:ROOM TEMP is different from
BLD990.FLR02.RM102.TEC:ROOM TEMP.
When viewing, commanding, or editing an application’s subpoints, the application
name must be specified first, followed by a colon, and then followed by the subpoint
name:
POINT NAME:SUBPOINT NAME
132 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Basic Concepts
NOTE:
In reports, subpoints are called suffixes.
How Subpoints Can Be Used
When an FLN device is first added to the network, the field panel uploads a copy of the
database for that device. This copy represents the subpoints for that particular
application. Not all FLN devices have the same database, so the subpoint names and
numbers for one application may not match those in a different FLN device. Reports in
an FLN device can be referenced using the long name with delimiter format, if the
name of the report is known.
For more information on FLN device subpoints, see Chapter 5 - MS/TP Field Level
Network (FLN) Devices.
PPCL Programs
A field panel creates a default set of subpoints when a program is initially entered. The
default set of subpoints include SECNDS counters and $LOC points. The field panel
also considers any local points defined by the user as a subpoint to a program. For
more information on local points, see the section Local Points [➙ 133] in this chapter.
Local Points
Local points are primarily used in PPCL programming. Every PPCL program has a set
of fixed local points, such as SECNDS, SECND7, $LOC1, and $LOC15, which can be
used to count seconds and hold temperature variables. Unlike virtual and logical
points, local points don't require the full point definition.
Normally, local points are not shared between programs. For example, two programs,
such as PANEL22.AHU1.SAFETYMODE and PANEL22.FAN2.SAFETYMODE, can
each give $LOC1 a different definition without disrupting each other. However, they
can be shared between programs by using the whole application name and the local
name. For example:
PANEL22.AHU1.SAFETYMODE could use the $LOC1 in
PANEL22.FAN2.SAFETYMODE by specifying the point as
PANEL22.FAN2.SAFETYMODE:$LOC1.
When a program is defined, each local point is given a default value. The following
example shows a sample list of all the available local points for a program and their
corresponding default values. See PPCL Editor for more information on using local
points.
12/01/2007 MON
POINT LOG
REPORT
11:24pm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990.AHU01.PGM:*>
Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value/State
Status Prio
rity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.PGM
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
133 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Basic Concepts
:PPCL Address
NONE
:SECNDS
NNONE
:SECND1
NNONE
:SECND2
NNONE
1
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
N-
:SECND3
N-
NONE
:SECND4
N-
NONE
:SECND5
N-
NONE
:SECND6
N-
NONE
:SECND7
N-
NONE
:LOC1
N-
NONE
:LOC2
N-
NONE
:LOC3
N-
NONE
:LOC4
N-
NONE
:LOC5
N-
NONE
:LOC6
N-
NONE
:LOC7
N-
NONE
:LOC8
N-
NONE
:LOC9
N-
NONE
:LOC10
N-
NONE
:LOC11
N-
NONE
:LOC12
N-
NONE
:LOC13
N-
134 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
NONE
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
:LOC14
N-
0.0
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
NONE
:LOC15
N-
NONE
:PDL
N-
NONE
End of report
Point Characteristics
Each point (logical or virtual) is composed of the following attributes that define it in the
database:
● Point name/point system name
● Point address
● Point status
● Point priority
● Point value/state
Point Name and Point System Name
The point name and point system name are the labels that identify a particular point in
the database. The point system name and point name can be the same or different.
Both names, whether they are set equal or defined differently, must be unique on the
network.
Having two names provides the ability to customize the database without affecting the
control of the system. PPCL programs (which exclusively use the point system name)
remain unchanged if the point name is changed.
Each user account defines the type of name that is displayed in the interface. Those
with User access see the point name. Those with System access see the point system
name. When viewing PPCL programs, the system always displays the point system
name regardless of the access settings.
The following example illustrates a point name and a point system name:
Point name:
BUILDING1.AHU1.SPACETEMP
Point system name:
B1A1ST
For points on an FLN device, or in applications, a suffix is used with the device or
application name. For these types of points, the FLN device/application is referenced
first, followed by a colon, followed by the suffix (the name of the subpoint).
The following example illustrates referencing a point on an FLN device called
BUILDING 1-VAV12:
BUILDING 1-VAV12:DO2
The following example illustrates referencing a local setpoint in a PPCL program called
WARMUPMODE:
WARMUPMODE:SETPOINT
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
135 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
Point Naming Conventions
Naming conventions provide a consistent and predictable organization for points. The
following guidelines are recommended:
● When designing a point database, identify common segments or groupings for
point names. Larger facilities may use six or more segments to name points.
Smaller facilities may choose a simpler convention by using only three or four
segments. The most common segments and order are as follows:
– State
– Campus
– Building or Department
– Floor, Room, or Area
– Equipment (boiler, chiller, air handler, etc.)
– Device
● Structure the names hierarchically, moving from global (far left characters), to
specific (far right characters). For example:
– LIB.CHILL02.CWT (room, equipment, device)
– BLD990.FLR01.AHU01.SAT (building, floor, equipment, device)
● Use only alphanumeric characters and periods in point names.
– Do not use underscores or spaces.
– Use periods only as separators between sections. Do not use periods in
abbreviations.
– Do not begin a point name with a period.
● If one or more points on a job lack a section that you identified in your point naming
conventions, insert a period for the missing section. For example:
– BLD990.FLR01.AHU01.SAT
– BLD990.FLR01..SAT
– The equipment section is missing in the second point name, replaced by two
periods.
Program names should be the same as the point names and equipment they control,
but without the suffix. For example:
Equipment:
Building 990, Floor 1, Air Handling Unit 1
Program Name:
IL.BLD990.FLR01.AHU01
Points Controlled:
IL.BLD990.FLR01.AHU01.SAT
IL.BLD990.FLR01.AHU01.HVL
IL.BLD990.FLR01.AHU01.SFN
BACnet Point Naming Conventions
BACnet provides two additional methods of point naming; one supports third-party
BACnet devices that do not adhere to TALON naming conventions, and one uniquely
identifies correctly named points across the network. The two added methods of
naming a point are the BACnet encoded name and the device specific name.
BACnet Encoded Name
The BACnet encoded name is a numeric representation of an object name that
exceeds the TALON standard of 30 alphanumeric characters per name. It consists of
136 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
two parts; the numeric representation of the device (field panel) name and the numeric
representation of the point name.
Use the Encoded Name to identify a point that does not meet the TALON naming
standards. When used as the point name to generate a Point Edit Look report, the
Encoded Name will also display BACnet-only versions of each supported BACnet
object type.
BACnet encoded names are created by the system and appear in parenthesis in the
Instance Number row of the Point Look report (Point, Edit, Look).
Example:
BAC_15_AI_10
Device Name Component
Object Name Component*
BAC_15
_AI_10
*
BACnet supports many object types. In this example, the object is a point.
In this example:
● BAC identifies this as a BACnet device.
● 15 is the device instance number, unique throughout the network.
● AI is the BACnet object type. It identifies the object as a physical Analog Input
point.
● 10 is the object instance number for this Analog Input object. The number is unique
for this object type within the BAC_15 device.
Device Specific Name
The BACnet device specific name is a textual representation of an object name that
meets the TALON naming standards. It consists of two parts; the node name of the
device and the point system name.
Use the Device Specific Name to identify a point within a specific device when that
point meets the TALON naming standards.
Example: [AdminBld1] ReturnWaterTemp
Node Name
Point System Name
[AdminBldg1]
ReturnWaterTemp
Saving Time When Entering Point Names
If you are unsure of the exact point name, or if you prefer not to type the entire point
name, you can use shortcuts, including:
● Wildcards provide for easier selection for names of points.
● Query for point names provides a numeric list of points to select from.
● Quick text key to define part of the point name.
● Command key (such as CTRL+P and CTRL+I from the paste buffer).
For examples of queries and wildcarding, see Chapter 1 - The Operator Interface.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
137 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
Point Addressing
NOTE:
Virtual points only require a field panel number, and cannot be defined on
FLN devices. A virtual point number may be assigned.
Modular Series Point Addressing
Points residing on the TX-I/O BUS of the TC Modular Series are addressed as follows:
● Field panel - The Field Panel Identifier (device instance number).
● FLN - For points on the TX-I/O BUS, the FLN number is always 0.
● Drop - The number of the address key on the TX-I/O Module (Keys 1 through 72).
● Point - The point number on the TX-I/O Module.
Points on an FLN Device
Points residing on an FLN device are addressed as follows:
Compact Series Point Addressing
Points residing on the TC Compact Series are addressed as follows:
● Field panel - The Field Panel Identifier (device instance number).
● FLN - Always use 0.
● Drop - Always use 0.
● Point - Use the following tables to determine the valid address number.
Point Address Table for the TC-16.
Point Type
Universal Input (UI)
Universal Input/Output
(U)
Analog Output (AO)
Digital Input (DI)
138 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Point Type
Number
Connection Terminal
PXC Point Address
+
-
UI1
25
26
1
UI2
27
26
2
UI3
28
29
3
U4
30
29
4
U5
31
32
5
U6
33
32
6
U7
34
35
7
U8
36
35
8
AO1
53
54
9
AO2
55
56
10
AO3
57
56
11
DI1
58
59
12
DI2
60
59
13
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
Digital Output (DO)
NC
COM
DO1
4
5
14
DO2
7
8
15
DO3
10
11
16
Point Address Table for the TC-24.
Point Type
Universal Input (UI)
Universal Input/Output
(U)
Analog Output (AO)
Point Type
Number
Connection Terminal
PXC Point Address
+
-
UI1
25
26
1
UI2
27
26
2
UI3
28
29
3
U4
30
29
4
U5
31
32
5
U6
33
32
6
U7
34
35
7
U8
36
35
8
U9
41
42
9
U20
43
42
10
U11
44
45
11
U12
46
45
12
U13
47
48
13
U14
49
48
14
U15
50
51
15
U16
52
51
16
AO1
53
54
17
AO2
55
56
18
AO3
57
56
19
Digital Output (DO)
NC
COM
NO
DO1
4
5
6
20
DO2
7
8
9
21
DO3
10
11
12
22
DO4
13
14
15
23
DO5
16
17
18
24
MEC Point Addressing
Points residing on the MEC are addressed as follows:
● Field panel - The Field Panel Identifier (device instance number).
● FLN - Always use 0.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
139 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
●
●
Drop - Always use 0.
Point - The type of point determines the valid address number.
Points on the MEC Expansion Bus
Points residing on the MEC Expansion Bus are addressed as follows:
● Field panel - The Field Panel Identifier (device instance number).
● FLN - Always use 0.
● Drop - Corresponds to the address of the expansion board (1 through 8).
● Point - The type of point determines the valid address number.
Points on a P1 FLN
Points residing on a P1 FLN device are addressed as follows:
Point Status
The point status indicates the current condition of a logical point as defined in the
TALON database. It can also reflect two or more statuses for a point. For example, a
point may be in alarm (*A*) and failed (*F*) at the same time, in which case, the status
would be *AF*.
NOTE:
Point status always displays in English. When logged onto the system using a
language ID other than English, the point still displays in English.
The Table Point Status explains each status.
Table. Point Status
Status
Meaning
Explanation
-N-
NORMAL
The point is in regular operation. The value and alarm conditions of the
point can be updated by control programs or operator commands.
*A*
ALARM
The condition of the point is outside its defined limits and an alarm
priority has been assigned to the point. An alarm occurs when:
●
The value of an analog point is outside a defined high or low limit.
●
The value of a proof point does not correspond to the commanded
value of the associated output point within the proof delay time.
●
An LDI or LDO point is ON and the point was defined to go into
alarm when it turns ON. For example, a smoke detector point.
*An*
ALARM
The condition of the point is outside its defined limits and an enhanced
alarm priority has been assigned to the point. The n represents the
number of the alarm level.
*AC*
ALRM-BY-COMMAND
The value of a point is in its normal operating range; however, the point
has been commanded into alarm by an operator or by the control
program. The point remains in this state until it is commanded back to
the Normal state by an operator or control program.
*ACK*
ACKNOWLEDGE
The point is in alarm and has been acknowledged by a user.
*F*
FAILED
The field panel is unable to command or read any of the physical points
associated with the logical point. This may be the result of hardware
failure or a sensor reading outside of its defined limits.
140 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
*O*
OUT OF SERVICE
This status displays in addition to other point status, for example, *A*-0-.
The logical value of BACnet points are decoupled from their physical
value. When a point is taken out of service:
●
Output points: The user can set the value of the point without
changing its physical output.
●
Input points: COVs from the physical input are ignored. BACnet
input points cannot be commanded by the user unless they are first
taken out of service.
*ODSB*
OPERATOR DISABLED ALARM
An operator has manually disabled a point from alarm reporting.
*P*
PROOFING
The field panel is waiting to verify that the value of a proof point
corresponds to the commanded value of an associated output point. The
point is in this state for as long as the proof delay time that is defined for
the point.
*PDSB*
PROGRAM DISABLED ALARM
An alarm has been disabled from reporting by PPCL.
*HAND*
HAND
A TX-I/O manual override switch has been used and the system no
longer has control of the point. The system will not be able to control
that point until the TX-I/O is switched back into AUTOMATIC mode.
*T*
TROUBLE
The point is in TROUBLE state. This status appears when a PPCL
program or user commands the point to this state.
Unresolved Points
A point is considered unresolved if its point name is used in an application (most
commonly PPCL) but not found on the network.
● A point will be unresolved if the name has been misspelled.
● A point can also be unresolved if the system has not yet discovered it across the
network. Once the system discovers the point, it no longer displays as unresolved.
An unresolved point is displayed with a ‘U’ at the end of a system name value, as in
the following example:
Point system name : BTEC22:ROOM TEMP (BAC_11_??_4194303) U
Point Priority/Command Priority
The point priority determines if an operator or a particular control program is
responsible for controlling the point.
NOTE:
Point status always displays in English. When logged onto the system using a
language ID other than English, the point still displays in English.
Table TALON Point Priority describes the five TALON priority levels.
BACnet uses a command priority to perform the same function as the TALON point
priority. Table TALON to BACnet Point Priority Reference explains the 17 BACnet
command priorities and shows how they relate to the TALON point priority levels.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
141 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
TALON Point Priority
Command Priority
Description
OPER (Operator)
The highest command priority. The control program is overridden and an operator has
direct control for commanding the point. A point commanded by an operator must have
its priority lowered in order for the control program to resume control of the point. This
change in priority is known as releasing a point.
SMOKE
The point is commanded by a smoke control program. Smoke control is a special
control program that monitors smoke alarms.
EMER (emegency)
The point is commanded by an emergency control program. Emergency control is a
special control program that commands a point during emergency situations. For
example, a smoke detector goes into ALARM and turns on the exhaust fan at EMER
priority.
PDL (Peak Demand Limiting)
The point is commanded by a Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) control program. PDL
control is a special energy management program that limits electrical demand by
turning off electrical loads when demand approaches a setpoint (for example shutting
down an air handling unit if demand approaches setpoint).
NONE
The lowest command priority level. The point can be commanded by the standard
PPCL control program. The point is not controlled by the operator or special control
programs. Most point commanding in a building system is done automatically by PPCL
programs commanding points with the NONE priority.
In most cases, the priority of a point should be NONE. Depending on the type of
application, the system can change point priority to prevent interaction by other
applications (either by PPCL or an application). For example:
● A point at NONE priority can be commanded by any PPCL program or application.
A point at PDL priority (slot 14 for BACnet/IP) is being used by the PDL application.
The point can be commanded by other higher-level applications, such as SMOKE
(slot 10 for BACnet/IP or OPER (slot 8 for BACnet/IP), but not by general PPCL
programs or applications (slot 16 for BACnet/IP). Commands from lower-level
applications are saved in the Priority Array under BACnet. If the priority of the
commanded point drops to the level of the saved command, the command is
executed.
● A point in OPER priority was commanded by a user. The system cannot command
the point until it is released back to system control. At any time, you can override
any application. The result of this action can change system performance.
Point priority can be changed by:
● User interaction—the priority is changed manually using the interface.
● A PPCL command—PPCL uses a command to directly change the point priority.
● Applications (for example, Equipment Scheduler).
Once the point priority changes to NONE, it is available for commanding by general
PPCL and applications.
Table. TALON to BACnet Point Priority Reference.
TALON Point Priority
142 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
BACnet Priority Slot
BACnet Name
BN01
Manual Life Safety
BN02
Automatic Life Safety
BN03
Available
BN04
Available
BN05
Critical Equipment Control
BN06
Minimum On/Off
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
OPER (Operator)
SMOKE
EMER (Emergency)
PDL (Peak Demand Limit)
Sched., PPCL, TEC Tool*
BN07
Available
BN08
Manual Operator
BN09
Available
BN10
Available
Bn11
Available
BN12
Available
BN13
Available
BN14
Available
BN15
Available
BN16
Available
Initial value of the point; TEC Application NONE
*
Relinquish Default
The TEC Tool can command Priority slot 16 only if it is not being commanded by PPCL.
BACnet Priority Array
TALON firmware uses the Priority Array to determine the command order for a point.
The array contains sixteen slots plus a Relinquish Default slot. BN01 is the highest
position in the array, and Relinquish Default is the lowest.
Any level in the priority can be commanded at any time. If the Present Value of the
point is at a higher priority slot, the command will not be executed. The Priority Array
retains all commands made at lower priority slot levels. When the Present Value drops
to that slot level, the stored point command is executed.
CAUTION
The TALON View software does not save or restore the Priority Array. After a
download, all points will be at their Relinquish Default value.
Present Value
The Present Value of a point is usually the value of the highest position in the array
that contains a value. Physical HAND overrides the Present Value and does not affect
the Priority Array. For example, the Priority Array for a point might contain the Present
Value shown in Table Priority Array Example.
Table. Priority Array Example.
BACnet Priority
Slot
BACnet Name/ (TALON Point Priority)
Value or State of Point
BN01
Manual Life Safety (N/A)
Empty
BN02
Automatic Life Safety (N/A)
BN03
Available (N/A)
BN04
Available (N/A)
BN05
Critical Equipment Control (N/A)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
Present Value of Point
143 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Characteristics
BN06
Minimum On/Off (N/A)
BN07
Available (N/A)
BN08
Manual Operator (OPER)
BN09
Available (N/A)
BN10
Available (SMOKE)
BN11
Available (N/A)
BN12
Available (EMER)
BN13
Available (N/A)
BN14
Available (PDL)
BN15
Available (N/A)
BN16
Available (Sched, PPCL, TEC Tool)
ON
NONE
Relinquish Default (Initial value of the point
or TEC Application)
OFF
OFF
OFF
The Present Value of the point (OFF) matches the value of BACnet Priority slot 8, or
Manual Operator, because no higher slot contains a value. As long as slot 8 is not
empty and no higher slot contains a value, the point can only be commanded at the
Manual Operator priority. If slot 8 is emptied, the Present Value of the point changes to
match the next lower value in the Priority Array (in this case, ON at BN16).
Use the Release command to empty a priority slot. See Releasing Points [➙ 158] and
Changing the Priority of a Point in this chapter.
Commands issued at lower BACnet Priority slot levels (slots 9 through 16 and
Relinquish Default) are stored and immediately command the point when all slots
above that value are empty. In this example, slot 16 contains a PPCL value that
commands the point as soon as Manual Operator is emptied. Once slot 16 is emptied,
the Relinquish Default value controls the point until a higher slot number receives a
new value.
Relinquish Default
Relinquish Default allows you to configure an initial value for a point when the priority
array is empty. FLN application subpoint COVs (for example, subpoint COVs within a
TEC) are stored in Relinquish Default.
The Relinquish Default for Object Types BO and MSO, which correspond to point
types LDO, L2SL, L2SP, LFSSL, LFSSP, LOOAL and LOOAP, contain a fixed value
determined from the physical value of the point that results in the DO or DOs being
OFF. See Table Priority Array Example.
NOTE:
The Relinquish Default for analog points in BACnet panels is not updated
automatically by the TALON View Commander application.
Point Values or State
Analog points have numeric values, which identify temperatures, positions, flow rate,
etc. The point value is usually associated to an engineering unit that gives the value
more meaning.
144 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
Point State
Default System Text
Energized state
ON (value 1)
De-energized state
OFF (value 0)
Digital points have states such as ON or OFF. A state is determined by the physical
position of one or more electronic switches. If a switch is energized, then the point is at
a certain state (for example, ON). For example:
Point State
Default System Text
New State Text
Energized state
ON (value 1)
DIRTY
De-energized state
OFF (value 0)
CLEAN
State text allows the text used by each digital point to be redefined with more
meaningful text. The following example illustrates the difference between the default
text and an alternate state text labels:
See System Setup for more information on using state text.
Point Type Attributes
Each point definition is composed of attributes. These attributes describe the point to
the system. Some attributes are used by all point types, and some are specific to a
particular point type. See Point Attribute Matrix in this chapter for a comparison of
which attributes apply to the particular point types.
Point Name
The following attributes are used for the point name:
>Point system name
>Point name
Both entries can contain from 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters. Valid characters
include A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, spaces ( ), periods (.), commas (,), dashes (-), underlines
(_), and apostrophes (').
NOTE:
If spaces, periods, commas, dashes, or underlines are used in the point system
name, it must have quotes around it when used in PPCL.
Point Type
The following attribute is used to identify the logical point type:
> Point type
Any of the point types can be entered. Typing ? presents a numerical list to choose
from. To select a point from a list, type the corresponding number and press ENTER.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
145 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
1 LAO
5 LDI
9 LAOOP
2 LAO
6 L2SL
10 LFSSL
3 LPACI
7 L2SP
11 LFSSP
4 LDO
8 LOOAL
12 LENUM
BACnet Implementation of Logical Point Types
The TALON logical point types map to BACnet physical and virtual objects as shown in
the following table.
Table. TALON to BACnet Point Type Cross-reference.
TALON Point Type
BACnet Physical Object
BACnet Virtual Object
Logical Analog Input (LAI) 1
Analog Input Object (AI)
Analog Value Object (AV)
Logical Analog Output (LAO) 1
Analog Output Object (AO)
Analog Value Object (AV)
Logical Digital Input (LDI) 1
Binary Input Object (BI)
Binary Value Object (BV)
Logical Digital Output (LDO) 1
Binary Output Object (BO)
Binary Value Object (BV)
Logical Pulse Accumulator Input (LPACI) Analog Input Object (AI)
Analog Value Object (AV)
Logical Two State Latched (L2SL)
Binary Output Object (BO)
Binary Value Object (BV)
Logical Two State Pulsed (L2SP)
Binary Output Object (BO)
Binary Value Object (BV)
Logical Fast/Slow/Stop Latched (LFSSL) Multistate Output Object (MO)
Multistate Output Object (MO)
2
Logical Fast/Slow/Stop Pulsed (LFSSP)
Multistate Output Object (MO)
Multistate Output Object (MO)
Logical On/Off/Auto Latched (LOOAL) 2
Multistate Output Object (MO)
Multistate Output Object (MO)
Logical On/Off/Auto Pulsed (LOOAP) 2
Multistate Output Object (MO)
Multistate Output Object (MO)
Logical Enumerated (LENUM)
Multistate Value Object (MV)
Multistate Value Object (MV)
2
1)
Analog and Digital (Binary) points are mapped to BACnet Value objects if the primary (or only) physical point is
virtual (if the second pulsed point or proof point is ignored in the determination).
2)
TALON points with a proof are mapped to Multistate Output objects.
Point Descriptor
The following attribute is used for the point descriptor:
>Descriptor
This optional prompt identifies additional information for the point. The descriptor can
contain from 0 to 16 alphanumeric characters. Valid characters include A to Z, a to z, 0
to 9, spaces ( ), periods (.), commas (,), dashes (-), underlines (_), and apostrophes (').
Pressing ENTER without entering text leaves the descriptor blank.
State Text
The following attribute is used to define state text for digital and LENUM points:
>State text table
146 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
Designates the state text table assigned to a particular point. To use the default entry
for a point, press ENTER without typing a number. To assign an alternate state text
table, type the table name, and then press ENTER. If the name of a particular table is
unknown, type ?, and then press ENTER to display a list of available state text tables.
Engineering Values
Analog points have numeric values, identifying temperatures, positions, flow rate, etc.
The point value is usually associated to an engineering unit that gives the value more
meaning.
The following attribute identifies the point value format type Analog points:
>Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte/Time
There are five different types of point values for analog points:
● Float—Floating point values. If a floating point value type is defined, the system
prompts for the number of decimal places for the point value as follows:
>Number of decimal places:
● Integer—Integer values
● Time—A floating point value representing time of day (for example, 13.5 = 1:30
P.M.).
● Date—A floating point value identifying the number of minutes that have passed
since 01/01/1970.
● Date/Time—A floating point value identifying the number of minutes that have
passed since January 1 at 00:00 in the current year.
Engineering Units
BACnet accepts pre-determined values for engineering units only. For this reason,
TALON BACnet/IP devices do not accept user-created engineering units. You can type
an exact value from the pre-determined list of TALON BACnet/IP engineering units, or
use a query to select an engineering unit for the point. For example, ? C* will display all
pre-determined TALON BACnet/IP engineering units that begin with the letter ‘C’. If
you type an exact value that is not in the pre-determined list, you will be re-prompted
for the engineering unit.
The Engineering units prompt also accepts the BACnet engineering number in place of
the TALON BACnet/IP name.
See BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units [➙ 402] for a complete list of TALON
BACnet/IP Engineering Units and their corresponding BACnet engineering unit
numbers.
Access Groups
The following attribute is used to identify access groups for the point:
>Access group(s)
This prompt identifies to which access group(s) a point belongs. Valid entries range
from 1 to 30. Pressing ENTER without entering a number(s), will default to all access
groups. To define more than one access group, you can use either of the following
conventions:
● Use commas to separate the access group numbers (1, 10, 22—for access groups
1, 10, and 22).
● Use double periods to define a range (1..8—for access groups 1 through 8).
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
147 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
If the defined access groups are unknown, type ?, and then press ENTER. The system
displays a list of all defined access groups.
Alarming
>Alarmable (Y/N)—Specifies if the point will use alarming. Answering N will forego
the remaining alarm prompting.
>OFFNORMAL event enabled—Specifies if the system should print an alarm
message when the point state changes to ALARM. Answer Y to print alarms;
otherwise, answer N to suppress alarm printing for the point.
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)—Specifies if the system should print a Return to
Normal message when the point state changes to NORMAL. Answer Y to print Return
to Normal messages; otherwise; answer N to suppress Return to Normal printing for
the point.
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)—Specifies if the system should print a Point
Failure message when the point state changes to FAULT. Answer Y to print Point
Failure messages; otherwise, answer N to suppress Point Failure printing for the point.
>Notification ID—The instance number of the notification class that specifies the
destinations where event messages will be sent.
>Alarm Message number—Identifies the number of the message text assigned to
the point.
>High limit—For analog points that use standard alarming, the high limit
represents the maximum value before the point condition changes to ALARM.
>Low limit—For analog points that use standard alarming, the low limit represents
the minimum value before the point condition changes to ALARM.
>Deadband—An additional value, applied to the high and low alarm limits, that defines
when a point is no longer in an ALARM state. The deadband is especially helpful in
preventing nuisance status changes when a point fluctuates near an alarm level.
>TimeDelay (sec)—The amount of time (in seconds) that the system waits after an
alarm level is crossed before evaluating an alarm condition. The time delay prevents
alarms when a point value fluctuates near an alarm level.
>Field panel
:
-------
Totalize
The totalization function accumulates the runtime value of a point. It can be used to:
● Accumulate run time for fans and pumps.
● Accumulate volume total from a flow rate sensor.
● Calculate degree days (used in PPCL).
The following attributes are used for totalization of a point:
>Totalize (Y/N)
If you answer Y, the system keeps track of the run time for the various states of the
point and prompts for how the system displays the runtime value. The acceptable
values are:
● Seconds
Guidelines for Setting COV Limits for Totalized Points
To determine an appropriate COV limit for an analog point being totalized, consider the
level accuracy required for the totalized value. The following rules, that are used to
148 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
determine the COV limit for point monitoring and control, also apply to situations where
the point value is being totaled.
● For LAO and LAI points, the COV Limit cannot be less than the slope of the point.
For example, you cannot set a COV limit of 1/100th of a degree for a sensor with a
slope of 1/10th of a degree.
● For LPACI points, the COV limit cannot be lower than the value of one pulse count.
● A COV limit that is set too high, may result in programs and applications not
receiving adequate updates of point values.
● A COV limit that is set too low, may slow system response by increasing the
amount of information being transmitted over the communications trunk. A point
with a COV limit that is too low may also toggle in and out of alarm state resulting
in an increased number of alarms that occur.
Totalization of Analog Points
Totalized point values in TALON field panel Firmware Revision 2.0 and later are
updated based on any of the following conditions:
● When the point is commanded or on a change in COV.
● If the point is not commanded or a change COV does not occur within 1 minute,
the totalized value is updated.
● When the user displays the points’ total in a report.
● Every time the TOTAL statement is called in PPCL for the point.
The field panel stores the totalized value in seconds. Points may display totalized
values in Seconds, Minutes, or Hours. The conversion from second to minutes or
hours is only for display purposes and not for data storage. The following table
illustrates how the totalized value for an analog point is updated by seconds, by
minutes, and by hours.
Event
Time
AO
Value
Total Calculation
Command to 1
12:00:00
1
1 x 0 x 60 = 0.0000
Command to 2
12:08:00
2
Command to 3
12:16:00
3
Total
(Seconds)
Total
(Minutes)
Total
(Hours)
0.00
0.00
0.00
1 x 8 x 60 = 480.0000
480.00
8.00
0.13
2 x 8 x 60 = 960.0000
1440.00
16.00
0.26
When total values are displayed in a point information block on an Insight graphic,
Insight reads the total value of the point every five seconds to update the value
displayed on the active graphic.
Totalized values are stored at the field panel. The totalized values will be reset to zero
on the coldstart of a field panel. The reset time in the totalized display will show the
time that the database is reloaded, and a reset value of zero. It is recommended that
totalized values be reset (initialized) to zero at regular scheduled intervals (that is, the
first day of the month at midnight or daily at midnight).
Totalization for Analog and Multistate Points
The Point Commander and Point Editor supports totalization for analog and multistate
points.
The following point types can be totalized:
● LAO
● LAI
● LDO
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
149 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
● LDI
● L2SL
● L2SP
● LOOAL
● LOOAP
● LFSSL
● LFSSP
The totalization function accumulates the runtime value of a point. Examples for using
this feature include:
● Accumulating runtime for fans and pumps.
● Accumulating total volume from a flow rate sensor.
● Calculating degree days.
NOTE:
Using the PPCL TOTAL function to access the totalized value of a BACnet Multistate
Output point is currently not supported.
Totalized Point Report
The BACnet Field Panel Web Server (FPWeb) now offers a Totalized Point report,
which displays the panel name, point name, totalized value, reset date and time, and
reset value. To open the report, click the Totalized Point Report
Reporting
icon under the
bar.
Figure 1: Totalized Point Report Example.
Point Address
The following attributes are used to address the point in the field panel:
150 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
>Field panel
>Field panel identifier
Identifies the field panel where the point is defined.
>Physical, Virtual Point address
>Physical, Virtual AUTO Point address
>Physical, Virtual FAST Point address
>Physical, Virtual OFF Point address
>Physical, Virtual ON OFF Point address
>Physical, Virtual ON Point address
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address
>Physical, Virtual SLOW Point address
>Physical, Virtual STOP Point address
Depending on the point being defined, the system displays any of the above prompts
after the field panel has been identified. Each point type has different characteristics,
so the system displays the appropriate prompt for the type being defined.
A physical point address means a point is associated with an actual termination in the
field panel.
A virtual point address means the point resides in memory. If the point serves a
specific purpose (such as a complex digital requiring multiple points to control specific
states), then the system will identify which point (and state) is being defined. The
system does not prompt for FLN and DROP numbers when defining virtual points.
> FLN
The number of the FLN (Field Level Network/Floor Level Network) where the point
resides. If the point resides in the field panel, the FLN Number is 0.
If the point resides on an MS/TP FLN device, the FLN Number will be 1.
> Drop
The drop number identifies devices on the FLN. How a device is addressed varies by
the type of device. See the documentation appropriate for the device when you want to
specify a drop number.
> Point
A number that identifies the physical or virtual point number within the field panel or the
point on the FLN device. The valid values for point numbers are set by the actual
layout of the hardware within the field panel or FLN device.
Other Digital Point Attributes
Digital Input Point Attributes
>Normally closed (Y/N)— Defines how a input point will react during a power
loss. If a point is normally closed, the contacts for the DI point are wired to be closed
when no energy is applied to the point. A point that is normally open will have open
contacts when no energy is applied to the point.
>Gain— Number used to convert pulses from a pulse accumulator point into the
engineering units that represent point values. Gain defines the number of engineering
units (ranging from 0.001 to 5000.0) represented by each pulse count.
>Count both edges (Y/N)— Defines how the system interprets a pulse count.
Gain is specified per pulse edge count. If both edges are counted, each on/off pulse
(momentary contact) of the point produces two pulse counts. If only one edge is
counted, each on/off pulse produces one pulse count. If both pulse edges are counted,
gain is doubled.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
151 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
Digital Output Point Attributes
>Invert value (Y/N)— Defines how a command should be applied to an output. If
a point has an inverted value, an ON command de-energizes the point and an OFF
command energizes the point. Conversely, a point with a value that is not inverted
energizes when an ON command is received, and de-energizes when an OFF
command is received.
>Proof (Y/N)— Defines if a point should be proofed. If the point does have a proof
point, then the system also asks for a proof delay.
>Proof delay (seconds)— Defines (in seconds) how much time must pass after a
point is commanded, before the system will check if an alarm condition exists for the
point.
Other Analog Point Attributes
Analog Input Point Sensor Type
The following attributes are used when defining analog input points:
Sensor type – Indicates type of input that sensor point receives. The sensor types are:
I Current (4 to 20 mA)
V Voltage (0 to 10 Vdc)
P Pneumatic (0 to 20 PSI)
Thermistors – (thermo-electric element with electrical resistance that falls with the rise
of temperature). Thermistor types are:
T Thermistor 100K
O Thermistor 10K Type 2
S Thermistor 10K Type 3
RTD – (thermo-electric element with electrical resistance that rises with the rise of
temperature). See RTD Wire Resistance and Intercept Adjustments. RTD types are:
M RTD 1K Platinum (tc375)
R RTD 1K Platinum (tc385)
N RTD 1K @ 32F Nickel (tc500-LG)
L L-Type (AI sensor terminated on a FLN device)
C Custom (Not implemented, defaults to type M)
J RTD 1K @ 70F Nickel JCI *
D RTD 1K Nickel DIN
* TXIOs (PXCM and P1 BIM) do not support JCI 1K Nickel sensors.
NOTE:
When defining the sensor type for analog input points, either enter the letter that
corresponds to the sensor type as listed above, or type ? and then press ENTER for a
list of available sensor types. When entering the sensor type from the list of available
types, enter the number that corresponds to the sensor type on the list.
>Sensor type
> 1) I ( Current )
> 2) V ( Voltage )
> 3) P ( Pneumatic )
> 4) T ( Thermistor 100K )
152 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
?
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
> 5) O ( Thermistor 10K )
> 6) S ( Thermistor 10K Type 3 )
> 7) M ( RTD 1K Platinum 375 )
> 8) R ( RTD 1K Platinum 385 )
> 9) N ( RTD 1K Nickel )
> 10) J ( RTD 1K Nickel JCI )
> 11) D ( RTD 1K Nickel DIN )
> 12) L ( L-Type )
> 13) C ( Custom )
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 3>Slope
: ------------------
RTD Wire Resistance and Intercept Adjustments
Intercept adjustments are used to adjust a point intercept value to compensate for long
runs of wire. Available when RTD sensor type is selected.
>Wire resistance adjustment:
The value is not visible in point look; it is only accessible in point add and modify
prompts.
The value is combined with Intercept before upload. It is cleared when point is
downloaded. Slope Intercept tool combines this value with the Intercept before
download.
To calculate the intercept adjustment, measure the total resistance of the wire between
the point termination and the sensor as follows:
● Short both wires at the sensor and measure the total resistance at the point
termination with an Ohm meter.
This results in total resistance term for R x ft. or R x m.
If direct measurement is not available use the manufacturer’s specification for dc
resistance of the wire and calculate the total wire resistance.
/mΩ/ft or R = 2 x ΩR = 2 x
Multiply R by the wire distance from point termination to sensor
If manufacturer’s specification is not available, use typical value from following table for
the wire gauge selected.
Typical 2-conductor Wire Resistances.
Wire Size (AWG)
Resistance (R)1
/ft.Ω
/mΩ
14
0.005
0.0164
16
0.008
0.0262
18
0.012
0.0394
20
0.020
0.0656
22
0.030
0.0984
242
0.056
0.1837
1)
Resistance /m).Ω/ft. or Ω(R) is for 2-conductor cable.
2)
Installed as part of Structured Cabling system; average resistance shown will vary depending which pair used.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
153 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
Then perform the Intercept adjustment calculation:
Divide the total resistance by the average sensor temperature constant for the sensor
being used and subtract from the point intercept. See the following sensor table and
slope intercept calculations for the field panel used later in this topic.
Enter results at the prompt.
Intercept Adjustments.
RTD Type and temperature coefficient1
Intercept Formula for Fahrenheit2 3
Intercept Formula for Celsius2 4
1000-ohm Platinum tc375
I - (R × ft)/2.117
I - (R × m)/3.8102
1000-ohm Platinum tc385
I - (R × ft)/2.171
I - (R × m)/3.9080
1000-ohm Nickel tc500-LG
I - (R × ft)/2.459
I - (R × m)/4.427
1000-ohm Nickel JCI
I - (R × ft)/2.814
I - (R × m)/5.066
1000-ohm Nickel DIN
I - (R × ft)/3.047
I - (R × m)/5.485
1)
Intercept Formula uses average temperature coefficient for the sensor connected.
2)
Resistance (R) is from the wire specification or the typical wire resistance table.
3)
I is for the intercept from the field panel Slope/Intercept table and ft is the wire length in feet.
4)
I is for the intercept from the field panel Slope/Intercept table and m is the wire length in meters.
Analog Output Point Attributes
The following attributes are used when defining analog output points:
Actuator type – Indicates the type of output that the actuator point receives. The
actuator types are:
1. I
Current (4 to 20 mA)
2. V
Voltage (0 to 10 Vdc)
3. L
L-Type (AO actuator terminated on a FLN device)
Initial value (Relinquish Default) – Used to set the point value when an analog point is
first viewed by the field panel (either by being defined or on a return from power loss).
Analog Input and Output Point Attributes
Factors used to convert signals that the field panel uses for analog points into
engineering units that represent point values. Slope and intercept constants are
determined by the type of input or output device that is represented by the point, and
whether the point is a physical point or a virtual point. See the Slope and Intercept
Calculations section for the field panel where the point resides.
>Slope
>Intercept
Change of Value Attributes
The following attributes are used to define a COV limit for an analog or pulse
accumulator point:
COV limit – Indicates the amount of change, in engineering units, that a point can
experience before a field panel reports the change to other field panels on the ALN.
154 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
Slope and Intercept Calculations
This section contains tables of slope/intercept formulas for each field panel type.
TC Compact and TX-I/O Slope/Intercept Calculations
The following table contains the slope/intercept formulas for the TC Compact Series
Controllers (TC-16, TC-24) and TX-I/O Modules (TXM1.8U, TXM1.8U -ML, TXM1.8X,
and TXM1.8X-ML) used with TC-1000 or TC-36:
Signal Range
Slopea)
Intercept1
Sensor or Actuator
Type
Modules
AI-V (0 to 10 Vdc)
V1 – (Slope × 3584)
V (Voltage)
All
AI-I (4 to 20 mA)
V1 – (Slope × 6144)
I (Current)
TXM1.8X TXM1.8X-ML
TC Compacts
AI-RTD 1000 Ω 375
Platinum RTDb)
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
M (RTD 1K Platinum
tc375)
All
AI-RTD 1000 Ω 385
Platinum RTDb)
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
R (RTD 1K Platinum
tc385)
All
AI-RTD 1000 Ω @ 32F
500-LG Nickel RTDb)
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
N (RTD 1K @ 32F
Nickel tc500-LG)
All
AI-RTD 1000 Ω @ 70F
500-JCI Nickel RTDb)
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
J (RTD 1K @ 70F
Nickel tc500-JCI)
All
AI-RTD 1000 Ω 500DIN Nickel RTDb)
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
D (RTD 1K Nickel
tc500-DIN)
All
AI-NTC 10K Ω
Thermistor Type 2
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
O (Thermistor 10K
Type 2)
All
AI-NTC 10K Ω
Thermistor Type 3
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
S (Thermistor 10K Type All
3)
AI-NTC 100K Ω
Thermistor
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
T (Thermistor 100K)
All
AO-V (0 to 10 Vdc)c)
V1
V (Voltage)
All
AO-I (4 to 20 mA)c)
V1 – (Slope × 6144)
I (Current)
TXM1.8X TXM1.8X-ML
Series 1000 sensor
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
-0.6॰Fd)
-17.4445॰C
M (RTD 1K Platinum
tc375)
All
Series 1000 sensor
setpoint dial
0.1981473
61.2
M (RTD 1K Platinum
tc375)
All
Series 2200 sensor
Type 2
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
O (Thermistor 10K
Type 2 NTC)
All
Series 3200 sensor
1.0॰F
0.5556॰C
0॰F
-17.7778॰C
O (Thermistor 10K
NTC)
All
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
155 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
a)
V1 is the low analog value of the signal range. V2 is the high analog value of the signal range.
b)
The temperature range is fixed. If this type of device is used, adjust the intercept for wire length and wire gauge
using the RTD Intercept Adjustments table.
c)
At start-up, the output of the AOs is 0V or 4 mA until commanded to a different value by the firmware.
d)
Compensation for sensor's self-heating effect.
General Guidelines To Calculate Slope/Intercept for Series
1000/2200/3200 Sensor Devices
Individual Series 1000/2200/3200 sensor devices typically contain multiple outputs that
can be of different Sensor Types – RTD, Current, Voltage and so on. Given a particular
output on a Series 2200/3200 model and for Series 1000 outputs not listed above, the
corresponding Slope/Intercept may be calculated by looking up the actual Sensor Type
(Voltage, Current, RTD, Thermistor and so on) used in the output.
Commonly Used TC Compact or TX-I/O Slope/Intercepts
Point Type
Slope
Intercept
ao(v)
0.0003255208
0.0V
ao(i)
0.0006510417
0.0 mA
ai(v)
0.000390625
-1.4V
ao(i)
0.0006510417
0.0 mA
ai(1k nickel)
1.0
0.0 F
ai(1k platinum)
1.0॰F
0.0 F
ai(1k platinum3)
1.0॰F
0.0 F
ai(10k thermistor)
1.0॰F
0.0 F
ai(100k thermistor)
1.0॰F
0.0 F
Point Attribute Matrix
The following table illustrates which point attributes apply to the logical point types:
XX
Indicates the system always prompts for this information.
X
Indicates the system will prompt for this information if certain attributes are specified.
A blank cell indicates the system does not prompt for this information.
Table 2: Point Attributes for Logical Point Types.
Attribute
LAO
LAI
LPACI
LDO
LDI
L2SL
L2SP
LOOAL
LOOAP
LFSSL
LFSSP
LENUM
Point System name
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Point name
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Point type
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Descriptor
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Engineering units
XX
XX
XX
Access group(s)
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
156 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Type Attributes
Attribute
LAO
LAI
LPACI
LDO
LDI
L2SL
L2SP
LOOAL
LOOAP
LFSSL
LFSSP
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Enhanced alarms (Y/N)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Print alarms (Y/N)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Alarm count 2 (Y/N)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Normal ack enabled (Y/N)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
High limit
X
X
X
Low limit
X
X
X
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Field panel
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Physical, Virtual Point
address
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Alarmable (Y/N)
Totalize (Y/N)
Totalize in Hours, Minutes,
Seconds
XX
XX
Physical, Virtual FAST Point
address
XX
Physical, Virtual OFF Point
address
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
X
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Physical, Virtual ON Point
address
Physical, Virtual Proof Point
address
XX
XX
Physical, Virtual AUTO Point
address
Physical, Virtual ON OFF
Point address
LENUM
X
XX
X
X
Physical, Virtual SLOW Point
address
XX
Physical, Virtual STOP Point
address
FLN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Drop
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Point
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX
XX
X
X
XX
XX
Dynamic COV limit (Y/N)
COV limit
Float, Integer, Time, Date,
dAte/time
XX
Sensor type
Number of decimal places
Slope
Intercept
Initial value
Wire resistance
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
X
X
XX
XX
X
X
XX
X
User's Manual
157 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Commanding Points
Attribute
LAO
LAI
LPACI
State text table
LDO
LDI
L2SL
L2SP
LOOAL
LOOAP
LFSSL
LFSSP
LENUM
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Invert value (Y/N)
XX
Normally closed (Y/N)
X
XX
Proof (Y/N)
Proof delay (seconds)
Count both edges (Y/N)
XX
Gain
XX
X
X
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
X
X
X
X
Commanding Points
To change the value of a point, you must physically enter a new value. The process of
changing a point value is called a command. Points are commanded to:
● Set the input to a control sequence (such as a setpoint).
● Override a control strategy.
● Provide a short-term solution to a control need.
● Troubleshoot a control strategy.
Releasing Points
BACnet/IP Command Priority levels must be emptied to allow lower priority levels to
control the point. See Changing the Priority of a Point in this chapter for information
about releasing BACnet points.
State Text
If state text is defined for a point, that text replaces the system default text. There are
default state text tables for every type of point.
When commanding points that use state text, the system always prompts for the point
name to be entered before displaying the available commands. Depending on how
state text is used, there can be a number of different words that represent a system
command, but only one set can apply to any particular point.
Monitoring Points
The point monitor provides a scrolling display of point values. It is a useful tool when
troubleshooting and testing the control of the system. To use the point monitor,
designate the points the system is to display. Once initiated, the point monitor begins
scrolling the point values on the display terminal. After displaying point values, the
system waits approximately four seconds, then redisplays the same points with
updated values.
NOTE:
The UEC does not use system names, remote points have to be specified using
BACnet the encoded name format (for example BAC_125_BV_0 ).
The following example displays a point monitor report:
158 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Monitoring Points
12/01/2003 MON
POINT MONITOR
REPORT
12:22pm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value
State
Prio
rity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:ROOM TEMP (RM101 TEC RM TMP)
(74.0 DEG
F)
*F*
NONE
BLD990.AHU01.RFN (RETURN FAN)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
F
*A*
NONE
Delaying...
OFF
-
OFF
-
90.0 DEG
12:22pm 09/15/1997 MON
BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:ROOM TEMP (RM101 TEC RM TMP)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.RFN (RETURN FAN)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
F
*A*
NONE
Delaying...
(74.0 DEG F)
-
OFF
-
OFF
-
90.0 DEG
Report canceled
Multiple Points
The point monitor report can display multiple points on one report. Each point using the
monitor is listed after the time/date stamp. The system is capable of displaying up to 20
points in the monitor. To keep the report readable, limit the number of points defined in
the monitor.
Keystroke Control
The point monitor is started by performing the Starting the Point Monitor procedure.
Once initiated, use the keys in the following table to control the report:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
159 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Action
Keystroke
Pause
CTRL+S
Resume
ENTER
Cancel
Shift+#
Point Database Procedures
This section contains step-by-step procedures for working with the point database.
Generating Point Logs and Reports
Displaying a Point Log
This procedure displays points in the database. This procedure can display all points
on the network, or refine the report using wildcards to display only certain points.
Displaying a Point Log
HMI
P, L (Point, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Press ENTER
All points
Type that point name.
A particular point
Type that point name, including wildcard characters.
A range of points
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A point using a query
The field panel displays a Point Log report.
Example
The following example displays a point log:
160 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Point name
:
12/01/2003 MON
------------------------------------------POINT LOG REPORT
11:33pm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:>
Point name
:Suffix (Description)
Value/State
Status
Priority
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.MAD (MIXED AIR DMPR)
11.0
-N-
NONE
BLD990.AHU01.MAT (MIXED AIR TEMP)
70.0 DEG F
-N-
NONE
BLD990.AHU01.OAD (OUTSIDE AIR DMPR)
11.0
-N-
NONE
...
End of report
Displaying a Point Log for Points on an FLN Device
This procedure is similar to Displaying a Point Log, but demonstrates the use of the
suffix to display points residing on FLN devices.
Displaying Points on an FLN Device
HMI
P, L (Point, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the FLN device name, followed by the delimiter,
followed by an asterisk (*).
All points on the FLN device.
Type the FLN device name, followed by the delimiter,
followed by the exact point name of the FLN point.
A particular point.
Type the FLN device name, followed by the delimiter,
followed by an FLN point name/wildcard combination.
A range of points.
Type ?, and then the number from the list.
All the points in the device.
The field panel displays a Point Log report.
Example
The following example displays a point on an FLN device:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
161 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Point name
:
12/01/2003 MON
BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC.ROOM TEMP--------POINT LOG REPORT
11:36pm
--------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC:ROOM TEMP>
Point name
:Suffix (Description)
Value/State
Status
Priority
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:ROOM TEMP (RM101 TEC RM TMP)
(74.0 DEG F)
*F*
NONE
End of report
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend, Quit? –
Displaying Points by Point Status
This procedure is similar to Displaying a Point Log, but has more options (such as field
panel number or operational state) to define the point display. Points can be displayed
according to such criteria as type, status (ALARM, unacknowledged points), priority, or
whether they have failed.
Displaying Points by Point Status
HMI
P, D, V (Point, Display, Value)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Any
A
For points in any state.
aLarm > Alarm priority
L
For points in Alarm.
1 through 6 or press ENTER.
The severity level of alarms you want to display. Type
the number of the alarm level to display points at a
specific alarm level. Press ENTER to display all points
in alarm.
Unacked
U
Points in alarm that have not been acknowledged.
Hand
H
For points in HAND.
Failed
F
For Failed points.
Disabled
D
For Disabled points.
Priority
P
For a particular Priority.
tYpe
Y
For a particular point Type.
tRouble
R
For Trouble.
Point name
Type the exact point name.
A specific point.
Type the point name/wildcard combination.
A range of points.
Press ENTER.
All points.
162 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A point using a query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Field panel or
Field panel name
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are connected.
Type that field panel ALN address number, device
instance number, or name.
A particular field panel.
Here, Print
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The field panel displays a Point Value report for the type of point requested. For an
explanation of the report, see Displaying a Point Log [➙ 160].
Example
The following example displays points by point status. This example shows points in
ALARM at any alarm priority:
>Any, aLarm, Unacked, Hand, Failed, Disabled, Priority, tYpe, tRouble? L
>Alarm priority (1-6)
:
--------
>Point name
:
BLD990*------------------------------------
>Field panel
:
1--
>Here, Printer
:
H
12/01/2003 MON
ALARM POINT VALUE REPORT
11:47am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990*:>
Field panel <1>
Point name
:Suffix (Description)
Value/State
Status
Priority
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.RFN (RETURN FAN)
OFF
*A*
NONE
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN)
OFF
*A*
NONE
End of report
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend, Quit? –
Displaying Points by Point Priority
This procedure is similar to Displaying a Point Log, but allows for more options (such
as field panel number and point priority) to refine the point display.
Displaying Points by Point Priority
HMI
P, D, V, P (Point, Display, Value, Priority)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
163 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
None
N
For None.
Pdl
P
For PDL.
Emer
E
For Emergency.
Smoke
For Smoke.
Oper
O
For Operator.
Point name
Type the exact point name.
A specific point.
Type the point name, including wildcard characters.
A range of points.
Press ENTER.
All points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Field panel or Field panel
name
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are connected.
Type that field panel ALN address number, device
instance number, or name.
A particular field panel.
Here, Print
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The field panel displays the Priority Point Value report.
Example
The following example displays points by point priority at an RS-485 field panel (in this
example, points at OPER priority):
>None, Pdl, Emer, Smoke, Oper
:
O
>Point name
:
BLD990*------------------------------------
>Field panel
:
1--
>Here, Printer
:
H
12/01/2003 MON
PRIORITY POINT VALUE REPORT
10:38am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990*:>
Field panel <1>
Point name
:Suffix (Description)
Value/State
Status
Priority
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.RFN (RETURN FAN)
OFF
-N-
OPER
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
200.0 DEG F
-N-
OPER
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN)
OFF
-N-
OPER
End of report
164 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Displaying Points by BACnet Command Priority
The Point Priority Array Report displays the BACnet Priority Array of the specified
point. The command priority determines if an operator or a particular control program is
responsible for controlling the point.
Displaying a Point Priority Array Report
HMI
P, D, P (Point, Display, Pointarray)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type that point name, encoded name, or device specify
name.
A particular point.
Type the point name, including wildcard characters.
A range of points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list .
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
The field panel displays the Point Priority Array report.
Example
The following example displays points by point priority at a BACnet/IP field panel. Note
that the first line following the report header displays the current state of the point.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
165 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Point name
:
02/19/2006 MON
BACnet Trend AV 2----------------------------
POINT PRIORITY ARRAY REPORT
10:38am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BACnet Trend AV 2:>
Point name
:Suffix (Description)
Value/State
Status
Priority
------------------------------------------------------------------------------<BACnet Trend AV 2:> (BACnet Trend Point)
OFF
-N-
1.
BN01 Manual Life Safety
2.
BN02 Automatic Life Safety
---
3.
BN03
---
4.
BN04
---
5.
BN05 Critical Equipment Control
---
6.
BN06 Minimum On/Off
---
7.
BN07
---
8.
BN08 Manual Operator (oper)
9.
BN09
10.
BN10
11.
BN11
12.
BN12
13.
BN13
14.
BN14 (pdl)
15.
BN15
16.
NONE
---
-----
(smok)
-----
(emer)
---------
BN16 (ppcl, sche)
---
Relinquish Default
OFF
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend, Quit? -
Displaying Points by Type
This procedure is similar to Displaying a Point Log, but allows for more options (such
as field panel number and point type) to refine the point display.
Displaying Points by Point Type
HMI
P, D, V, Y (Point, Display, Value, tYpe)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point type
Specify point type:
LAO
Logical Analog Output.
LAI
Logical Analog Input.
LPACI
Logical Pulsed Accumulator.
LDO
Logical Digital Output.
LDI
Logical Digital Input.
166 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
L2SL
Logical 2-State Latched.
L2SP
Logical 2-State Pulsed.
LOOAL
Logical ON/OFF/AUTO Latched.
LOOAP
Logical ON/OFF/AUTO Pulsed.
LFSSL
Logical FAST/SLOW/STOP Latched.
LFSSP
Logical FAST/SLOW/STOP Pulsed.
LENUM
Logical ENUMerated Value.
Press ENTER.
All points.
Type that point name.
A particular point.
Type the point name, including wildcard characters.
A range of points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Field panel or Field panel
name
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are connected.
Type that field panel ALN address number, device
instance number, or name.
A particular field panel.
Here, Print
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
Point name
The field panel displays a Type Point Value report for the type of point requested. For
an explanation of the report, see Displaying a Point Log [➙ 160].
Example
The following example displays points by point type (in this example, Logical Analog
Input type):
>Point type
:
LAI----------------------------------------
>Point name
:
-------------------------------------------
>Field panel
:
1--
>Here, Printer
:
H
12/01/2003 MON
TYPE POINT VALUE REPORT
10:39am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:>
Field panel <1>
Point name
:Suffix (Description)
Value/State
Status
Priority
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.MAT (MIXED AIR TEMP)
70.0 DEG F
-N-
NONE
1
-N-
NONE
200.0 DEG F
*A*
OPER
BLD990.AHU01.PGM
:PPCL Address
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
End of report
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
167 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Displaying the Totalized Value of a Point
This procedure displays the totalized values for a point. Before using this procedure,
one or more points must have their operational states totalized.
Displaying Totalized Values of Points
HMI
P, D, T (Point, Display, Total)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Press ENTER.
All points A specific point.
Type that point name.
A particular point.
Type the point name, including wildcard characters.
All range of points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Field panel or Field panel
name
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are connected.
Type that field panel ALN address number, device
instance number, or name.
A particular field panel.
Here, Print
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The field panel displays a Totalized Point Value report.
Example
The following example displays totalized values of a point:
>Point name
:
BLD990*------------------------------------
>Field panel
:
1--
>Here, Printer
:
H
12/01/2003 MON
TOTALIZED POINT VALUE REPORT
10:41am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990*:>
Point name (Description)
Totalized value
Reset time
(Reset value)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.RFN (RETURN FAN
117:22:13
0:00:00
0:00:00
09/15/1997 04:33pm 0
ON
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN
117:21:31
)
OFF
09/15/1997 04:33pm 0
)
OFF
09/15/1997 04:33pm 0
ON
09/15/1997 04:33pm 0
End of report
168 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Displaying a Point Definition by Point Name
This procedure displays the definition of a point by point name. The type of information
contained in the report can be different due to the attributes of the different point types.
Displaying Point Definitions by Point Name
HMI
P, D, D, N (Point, Display, Definition, Name)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name.
A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Field panel or Field panel
name
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are connected.
Type that field panel ALN address number, device
instance number, or name.
A particular field panel.
Here, Print
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The field panel displays a Point Display Definition report.
Example
The following example displays a point definition by point name:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
169 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Point name
:
BLD990.AHU01.RFN---------------------------
>Field panel
:
1--
>Here, Printer
:
H
12/01/2003 MON
POINT DISPLAY DEFINITION REPORT
10:43am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990.AHU01.RFN:>
Field panel <1>
Field
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name
: BLD990.AHU01.RFN
Instance Number
: 0 <BAC_771_MV_0>
Point name
: BLD990.AHU01.RFN
Point type
: L2SL
Descriptor
: RETURN FAN
Value
: OFF
Condition
: -N-
Priority
: OPER
State text table
: Default L2SL
Access group(s)
: <all>
Point enabled for alarming
Print alarms
: YES
Alarm count 2
: NO
Normal ack enabled
: NO
Totalize
: YES, in Minutes
Field panel
: 3
Point address
: 003 0 04 01
Invert value
: NO
End of report
Displaying a Point Definition by Address
This procedure displays the definition of a point by address. The type of information
contained in the report can be different due to the attributes of the different point types.
Displaying Point Definitions by Address
HMI
P, D, D, A (Point, Display, Definition, Address)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel or Field panel
name
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are connected.
Type that field panel ALN address number, device
instance number, or name.
A particular field panel.
FLN number
Specify the FLN number.
FLN drop address
Specify the FLN drop address.
170 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Enter point number
Show subpoints? (Y/N)
Press ENTER.
All points.
Type that point number.
A particular point.
Y
Display subpoints.
N
Suppress subpoint display.
The field panel displays the Point Display Definition report.
Example
The following example displays a point definition by address:
>Field panel
:
1--
>FLN number
:
0--
>FLN drop address
:
53-
>Enter point number
:
1----
>Show subpoints? (Y/N)
:
N
12/01/2003 MON
POINT DISPLAY DEFINITION BY ADDRESS REPORT
10:49am
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for:
Address <1 0 53 1>
Subpoints included <NO>
Field
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name
Instance Number
: SHIPPING DOOR SENSOR
: 0 <BAC_771_MV_0>
Point name
: SHIPPING DOOR SENSOR
Point type
: LDI
Descriptor
: SENSOR
Value
: ON
Condition
: *A*
Priority
: NONE
State text table
: Default LDI
Access group(s)
: <all>
Alarmable
: NO
Device Instance Number
: 771
Totalize
: NO
Field panel
: 1
Point address
: 001 0 53 01
Normally closed
: YES
End of report
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend, Quit? –
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
171 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Displaying Unresolved Points
This procedure displays points that are unresolved. A point is considered unresolved if
the name is used in an application (most commonly PPCL), but not found on the
network.
Displaying Unresolved Points
HMI
P, D, U (Point, Display, UnresolvedName)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Press ENTER.
To specify all points.
Type that point name.
To specify a particular point.
Type the point name, including wildcard
characters.
To specify a range of points.
The field panel displays an Unresolved Name report.
Example
The following example shows unresolved points:
07/17/2008 THU
Unresolved Name Report
02:31pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:*>
FAN
Field panel 1
TEST
Field panel 1
End of report
Commanding Point Values
Commanding the Value of Analog Points
This procedure commands the value of an analog point. Before commanding the point
value, you should understand what effect a change to this point will have on the
system.
Commanding Analog Point Values
HMI
P, C, V (Point, Command, Value)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name.
A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system displays the current
value for the point in the Current State field.
172 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
New
Specify a new analog value for the point.
BACnet Command Priority
Enter the command priority for the point.
The system commands the analog point to the specified new value.
Example
The following example displays commanding analog point value:
>Point name
: BLD990.AHU01.OAD------------------------->Current value = 11.0
New: 7---------------->BACnet Command Priority (8 – 16): 9
BLD990.AHU01.OAD commanded to 7.0
>Value, resetTotal, Quit? –
Resetting the Totalized Value of a Point
This procedure resets the totalized value of a point. The totalized value can be reset
for either all states of the point, or one specific state. The totalized value can be reset
to a number other than zero.
Resetting a Totalization Value
HMI
P, C, T (Point, Command, resetTotal)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name.
A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system displays the current
value for the point in the Current State field.
Y
To reset the totalization value for all states.
Specify whether the reset the totalization
value for all states of the point.
N
To retain the current totalization value. The
system displays the values available for the
point.
Reset total for state
Type the number from the list that specifies the state that
you want to reset.
Displays the state text for the point.
Reset total value
0
To reset the value to zero.
Type the new value.
To set the value.
Reset total for all states (Y/N)
The system resets the totalized value of the specified point.
Example
The following example displays resetting a totalized point value:
>Point name
: BLD990.AHU01.RFN------------------------->Reset total for all states (Y/N): N
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
173 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Reset total for state
>Reset total value
Command successful
:
:
ON-----0-----------------
Defining Points
This procedure adds a Logical point to the database. Before beginning this procedure,
identify the information that will be needed to enter the point, such as whether the
address is physical or virtual, access groups, whether the point is Alarmable, the COV
limit, and so on. This information will vary greatly, depending on the type of point being
added.
Adding a Physical Point
Adding a Logical Point with Physical Address
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
NOTE:
After entering P, E, A, the field panel prompts for various point attributes, determined
by the point type. For more information concerning specific point attributes, see Point
Type Attributes [➙ 145]. Once you reach the Physical, Virtual Proof Point address
prompt follow the information in the table below.
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Physical, Virtual Proof Point
address
P
FLN
0
Description
If the point resides in the field panel.
Type the appropriate FLN number.
Press ENTER.
Drop
Enter the appropriate number.
NOTE: How a device is addressed varies by
the type of device. See the documentation
for the device when you want to specify a
drop number.
Point
Type a number that identifies the physical point number
within the field panel or on the FLN device.
NOTE: The valid values for point numbers
are set by the actual layout of the hardware
within the field panel or FLN device.
TX-I/O Logical Point Adds
If you are adding an LAO or LAI point for a TX-I/O module, do one of the following:
LAO Point Add – Following the Point field entry, an Actuator type entry appears. When
defining the actuator type for analog output points, either enter the letter that
corresponds to the actuator type or type ? or ENTER for a list of actuator types
available. When entering the actuator type from the list of available types, enter the
number that corresponds to the actuator type on the list.
> Point
>Actuator type
174 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
:
:
User's Manual
3----
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
> 1) I ( Current )
> 2) V ( Voltage )
> 3) L ( L-Type )
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Slope
: -----------------LAI Point Add – Following the Point field entry, a Sensor type entry appears.
When defining the sensor type for analog points, either enter the letter that
corresponds to the sensor type or type ? or ENTER for a list of sensor types available.
When entering sensor type from the list of available types, enter the number that
corresponds to the sensor type on the list.
>Sensor type
: ?
> 1) I ( Current )
> 2) V ( Voltage )
> 3) P ( Pneumatic )
> 4) T ( Thermistor 100K )
> 5) O ( Thermistor 10K )
> 6) S ( Thermistor 10K Type 3 )
> 7) M ( RTD 1K Platinum 375 )
> 8) R ( RTD 1K Platinum 385 )
> 9) N ( RTD 1K Nickel )
> 10) J ( RTD 1K Nickel JCI )
> 11) D ( RTD 1K Nickel DIN )
> 12) L ( L-Type )
> 13) C ( Custom )
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 3>Slope
: -----------------Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Continue entering point attributes at the
remaining prompts until the message
Command successful displays.
Example
The following example displays adding a Logical Analog Output (LAO) point with
physical address:
>Point system name
: LAO EXAMPLE POINT------------>Instance Number
: 1 <BAC_771_MV_1>_
>Point name
: LAO EXAMPLE POINT------------>Point type
: LAO-->Descriptor
: LAO EXAMPLE---->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: F
>Number of decimal places
: 2
>Engineering units
: UNITS>Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
175 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) :
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
:
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
:
>Notification ID
: 5
>Alarm Message Number
: 5
>High limit
:
>Low limit
:
>Deadband
: 10
>Time Delay (sec)
>Field panel
:
>Physical, Virtual Point address:
> FLN
:
> Drop
:
> Point
:
>Slope
:
>Intercept
:
>COV limit
:
>Relinquish Default
:
>Initial value
:
Command successful
Y
Y
Y
80---------------65---------------: 30
1-P
0-121---1----------------0----------------2----------------75----------------
Adding a Virtual Point
Adding a Logical Point with Virtual Address
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
NOTE:
After entering P, E, A, the field panel prompts for various point attributes, determined
by the point type. For more information concerning specific point attributes, see Point
Type Attributes [➙ 145]. Once you reach the Physical, Virtual Proof Point address
prompt follow the information in the table below.
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Physical, Virtual Proof Point
address
V
Point
Press ENTER.
If the point will not be used by pre-TALON
field panels. Accept default address
assigned by the TALON Automation System.
Type a virtual address that is unique for the field panel.
If the MLN contains pre-TALON field panels
that use this point.
Press ENTER.
To accept the default value (OFF).
ON
To allow the default value to relinquish.
Relinquish Default
Description
The system adds the logical point with virtual address that is unique system wide. The
message Command successful displays.
176 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Example
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? A
>Point system name
: BLD990.FLR01.RM101.VIRT------>Instance Number
:
>Point name
: BLD990.FLR01.RM101.VIRT------>Point type
: LDI-->Descriptor
: RM101 VIRT----->State text table
: ALARM_NORMAL----------------->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: N
>Totalize (Y/N)
: N
>Field panel
: -->Physical, Virtual Point address: V
> Point
: 200—
>Relinquish Default
: OFF
Command successful
Looking at a Point Definition
HMI
P, E, L (Point, Edit, Look)
Prompt/Field Entry
Option
Point name
Description
1 to 25
The Point Look Report displays.
Example
01/01/2009 TUE POINT LOOK REPORT 00:01
-----------------------------------------------------------------Search for <ldo25:>
Field Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------Point system name : ldo25
Instance Number : 0 (BAC_9032_BO_0)
Point name : ldo25
Point type : LDO
Descriptor :
Value : OFF
Condition : -NPriority : NONE
State text table : Default LDO
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
177 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Access group(s) : <all>
Alarmable : NO
Totalize : NO
Device Instance Number : 9032
Point address : 9032 0 00 25
Invert value : NO
Relinquish Default : OFF
End of report
Modifying a Point Definition
This procedure changes the attributes of the point. Before beginning, have the
changes ready to facilitate the procedure.
Modifying a Point Definition
HMI
P, E, M (Point, Edit, Modify)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name.
A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
The field panel prompts for various point
attributes, determined by the point type and
also displays current values with each
attribute.
- Press ENTER to retain a value and
displays next attribute.
- Type a new value. To changes an attribute.
The system changes the attributes of the point.
Example
The following example displays the modification of an LAO point from a BACnet/IP field
panel. For specific point attributes, see Point Type Attributes [➙ 145].
>Point name
: LAO EXAMPLE POINT---------------------->Descriptor
: LAO EXAMPLE---->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: F
>Number of decimal places
: 2
>Engineering units
: UNITS>Access group(s)
: 1..30--------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) :
Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
:
Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
:
Y
>Notification ID
: 5
178 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Alarm Message Number
>High limit
>Low limit
>Deadband
>Time Delay (sec)
>Slope
>Intercept
>COV limit
>Relinquish Default
Command successful
: 5
: 80.0-------------: 65.0-------------: 10
: 30
: 1.0--------------: 0.0--------------: 2.0--------------: 2.0---------------
Copying a Point Definition to a New Point
This procedure copies the attributes from one point to a new point name. Once copied,
the new point is added to the database. Except for a few specific attributes, all
remaining attributes are copied. Before beginning, have the necessary attributes, such
as the new point name and address, ready to enter.
Copying a Point Definition
HMI
P, E, C (Point, Edit, Copy)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Copy from point name
Type the exact point name you want to copy.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
Copy to point system name
Type the point system name of the new point.
Point name
Type the point name of the new point.
Descriptor
Type the descriptor for the new point.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Field panel or field panel name Type the ALN address number, device instance number,
or name of the point type and whether the point is virtual
or physical.
When the point addressing information is entered, this procedure is complete.
Example
The following example displays copying a point definition:
>Copy from point name
: BLD990.AHU01.RFN------------------------->Copy to point system name
: BLD1000.AHU01.RFN------------>Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: BLD1000.AHU01.RFN------------>Descriptor
: BLD1000 AHU01RFN
>Field panel
: 2->Physical, Virtual ON OFF Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 12-
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
179 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
> Point
: 1---> Invert value (Y/N)
: N
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address:
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 13> Point
: 2---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: N
> Proof delay (seconds)
: 30--Command successful
P
Deleting a Point from the Database
This procedure deletes a point from the database.
HMI
P, E, D (Point, Edit, Delete)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the exact point name you want to delete.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Description
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Y, N
Verify that you want to delete the specified
point.
The system deletes the specified point.
Example
>Point name
>Are you sure (Y/N)
Command successful
:
:
LAO EXAMPLE POINT------------Y
Changing the Command Priority
BACnet/IP Command Priority levels must be emptied to allow lower priority levels to
control the point. Use the following procedure to release a point to the next lowest
priority level that contains a value.
NOTE:
Because changing point priority can disrupt the operation of the system, be careful
when performing this procedure. Also, this procedure does not allow wildcard
commanding of subpoints to NONE priority.
Changing the Point Priority
HMI
P, O, R (Point, Operation, Release)
180 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type that point name.
A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points matching
the criteria.
BACnet Command Priority (816)
Enter the priority array number you want to clear.
The system releases the specified point priority level.
Example
The following example displays changing point priority:
>Point name: BLD990.AHU01.MAD---------------------------------->Bacnet Command Priority (8 – 16): 12
Point BLD990.AHU01.MAD released
>Enable, Disable, Status, Release, Quit? –
Enabling or Disabling a Point
This procedure enables or disables a point. When a point is disabled, the value state
cannot be changed by an interface terminal or PPCL statement until it is enabled.
Disabled points have a status of *O* on point logs and displays.
Enabling or Disabling a Point
HMI
P, O (Point, Operation)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Priority, Enable, Disable,
Status, Release, Quit?
D
For Disable
E
For Enable
Point name
Press ENTER.
All points
Type that point name.
A particular point.
Type the point name, including wildcard characters.
A range of points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Y,N
If you selected all points or a range of points
using wildcards, you will be prompted to
verify whether you want to enable or disable
the specified points.
Are you sure (Y/N)
The system enables or disables the specified point(s).
Example
The following example displays enabling a range of points:
>Priority, Enable, Disable, Status, Release, Quit? E
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
181 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
>Point name
:
--------->Are you sure (Y/N)
:
Point BLD990.AHU01.RFN Enabled
BLD990.*---------------------Y
Monitoring Points
Displaying Points in the Point Monitor
This procedure displays the points in the point monitor.
Displaying Points in the Monitor
HMI
P, M, L (Point, Monitor, Listpoints)
The field panel displays a Point Monitor List report.
Example
The following example shows displaying points in the monitor:
12/01/2003 MON
POINT MONITOR LIST
REPORT
12:28pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value
State
Prio
rity
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:ROOM TEMP (RM101 TEC RM TMP)
(74.0 DEG
F)
*F*
NONE
BLD990.AHU01.RFN (RETURN FAN)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SFN (SUPPLY FAN)
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
F
*A*
NONE
OFF
-
OFF
-
90.0 DEG
End of report
>Listpoints, Start, Add, Delete, Quit? –
Starting the Point Monitor
This procedure starts the point monitor and displays the output on the terminal. Once
started, the system displays the points (and their associated values) in the monitor
group approximately every four seconds.
182 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Starting the Point Monitor
HMI
P, M, S (Point, Monitor, Start)
The field panel displays a scrolling Point Monitor report. In this report, points and their
associated values are displayed in the same format as shown in the Displaying Points
in the Point Monitor procedure. These point values are updated and redisplayed about
every four seconds.
Example
The following example displays the point monitor:
12/01/2003 MON
POINT MONITOR
REPORT
12:36pm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value
State
Prio
rity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:ROOM TEMP (RM101 TEC RM TMP)
(74.0 DEG
F)
*F*
NONE
BLD990.AHU01.RFN
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SFN
NNONE
BLD990.AHU01.SAT
F
*A*
Delaying...
(RETURN FAN)
OFF
-
(SUPPLY FAN)
OFF
-
(SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
NONE
200.0 DEG
Report cancelled
Adding a Point to the Point Monitor
This procedure adds a point to the point monitor.
Adding a Point to the Monitor
HMI
P, M, A (Point, Monitor, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name you want to add to the monitor. A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
The system adds the point to the point monitor.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
183 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Example
The following example displays adding a point to the monitor:
>Point name
------------Command successful
:
BLD990.AHU01.MAT--------------
>Listpoints, Start, Add, Delete, rEmoveall, Quit? –
Deleting a Point from the Point Monitor
This procedure deletes a point from the monitor.
Deleting Points from the Monitor
HMI
P, M, D (Point, Monitor, Delete)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name you want to delete to the
monitor.
A particular point.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
The system deletes the specified point from the monitor.
Example
The following example displays deleting a point from the monitor:
>Point name
------------Command successful
:
BLD990.AHU01.MAT--------------
Removing All Points from the Point Monitor
This procedure removes all points from the monitor.
Removing All Points from the Monitor
HMI
P, M, E (Point, Monitor, rEmoveall)
The system removes all points from the monitor.
Example
The following example displays removing all points from the monitor:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? P
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? M
>Listpoints, Start, Add, Delete, rEmoveall, Quit? E
Command successful
184 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 4—Point Database
Point Database Procedures
Acknowledging Point Alarms
This procedure acknowledges an alarm. Points that require acknowledging are
specified in the database definitions. Acknowledging a point is different than changing
the operational state of the point. Points that require acknowledging cannot change
operational state or priority once they enter the ALARM state.
Acknowledging Point Alarms
HMI
P, A, A (Point, Alarm, Acknowledge)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Offnormal, Normal, Fault
O, N, F
NOTE: To view these timestamp values,
display a Point Display Definition report.
Point name
Press ENTER.
All points.
Type that point name.
A particular point.
Type the point name, including wildcard characters.
A range of points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
The system acknowledges an alarm for the specified point(s).
Example
>Offnormal, Normal, Fault
: O
>Point name
: BLD990*-------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.MAT : Acknowledged
BLD990.AHU01.RFN : Acknowledged
...
End of commanding
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
185 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Communication on the MS/TP FLN
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Chapter 5 discusses the interaction and functionality between a field panel and an
MS/TP FLN device, including:
● Displaying MS/TP devices and objects
● Adding, deleting, copying, and modifying MS/TP FLN devices
● Restoring the Relinquish Default values of an FLN device
● Displaying, releasing, and setting MS/TP device Initial Values
● Changing the FLN Type
You will also learn the procedures needed to perform these functions.
NOTE:
For the remainder of this manual, MS/TP FLN can refer to BACnet/IP FLN, where
applicable. The Application, flN, MS/TP prompt is where you will be able to display,
configure, and command BACnet/IP FLN devices.
Before You Begin
Before using the information in this section, you should have a working understanding
of the following concepts:
● HVAC equipment of the facility
● Point database
● General knowledge of the TALON Automation System
Communication on the MS/TP FLN
The field panel initiates communication with the devices residing on the MS/TP FLN. If
the field panel is unavailable (for example, a power loss at the field panel), the FLN
devices (including the new DXRs) operate in stand-alone mode.
A field panel can support two MS/TP FLNs; TC-16 and TC-24 controllers can only
support up to 32 devices, while TC-36 and PXC Modular controllers can support up to
96 devices. However, as the number of devices increase, the performance of
monitoring the devices will decrease. A general guideline for the maximum limit of
devices, with reasonable performance, is 64 devices. NOTICE! Excessive
commanding and monitoring of points can lower this number.
186 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Supported Network Types
Two MS/TP FLN Connections Supported
For improved cost-effectiveness and flexibility of BACnet MS/TP FLN installations, two
physical MS/TP FLN connections are supported on TC Modular and TC-36 field panels
● For TC Modular, the PXX-485.3 FLN 1 port is the primary FLN port, and the RS485 ALN is the secondary FLN port. NOTICE! The RS-485 ALN port can also be
configured as an MS/TP FLN without a PXX-485.3 being present.
● For TC-36, the A port is the primary FLN port, and the B port is the secondary FLN
port.
To use the secondary FLN port, the primary FLN must be configured as MS/TP and
the MS/TP ALN must be enabled.
NOTE:
You cannot have the first FLN port configured for P1 and the second FLN port for
MS/TP.
Supported Network Types
The following network types are supported by Firmware Revision 3.4 or later:
● BACnet MS/TP local FLN on the Primary port.
● BACnet MS/TP local FLN on the Secondary port.
● BACnet MS/TP Routed FLN using a remote BACnet/IP to BACnet MS/TP router.
● BACnet/IP FLN. This option is primarily for DXR2.E controllers.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
187 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Name and MS/TP Device System Name
MS/TP Device Name and MS/TP Device System
Name
The MS/TP device name and MS/TP device system name are the labels that identify a
particular MS/TP device on the FLN (for example, a BACnet TEC). The MS/TP device
system name and MS/TP device name can be identical. The two names taken together
(if identical), or each name separately (if different), must be unique on the network.
NOTE:
The MS/TP device is identified on the BACnet network by the BACnet device name,
which is established during the initial configuration of the device. Siemens
recommends that you use the same name in all locations (BACnet device name,
MS/TP device name, and MS/TP device system name) whenever possible.
Each user account defines the type of name that is displayed in the interface. Those
with User access see the MS/TP device name. Those with System access see the
MS/TP device system name.
When viewing PPCL programs, the system always displays the MS/TP device system
name regardless of the access settings.
BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)
The BACnet Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) protocol uses a token-passing
scheme to control access to a bus network. A Master device that holds the token can
initiate the transmission of a data frame. All other master and slave devices on the bus
can respond to requests from this master by transmitting data in frames. After the
master device holding the token sends no more than XX data frames and waits for the
replies, it passes the token to the next master device on the bus.
NOTE:
BACnet MS/TP addresses range from 0 to 255. MS/TP master devices must be
addressed between 0 and 127.
MS/TP Device MAC Address
The MS/TP device MAC address, like the drop address number, identifies an individual
device on the MS/TP FLN. The full range of BACnet MS/TP addresses is allowed (0 to
254). A BACnet/IP MAC Address will be the IP address of the device plus BAC0
(47808) as the last two octets.
MS/TP Device Network Number
The MS/TP device network number is the address of the local router's MS/TP network,
the remote router’s MS/TP network, or the BACnet/IP network number (this will usually
be the same as the field panel’s BACnet/IP network number).
MS/TP Device Scanner
Devices are scanned periodically to detect and return failure status.
The Who-is service is used to discover a device.
The Read Property Multiple service is used to learn the device services supported;
device type and vendor ID.
188 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
BACnet Router Overview
The poll timer is reset to one of two poll rates whenever the MS/TP device
communicates with the field panel.
● Keep Alive Poll Rate - MS/TP device is not failed (default setting 60 sec.).
● Discovery Poll Rate - MS/TP device is currently failed (default setting 60 sec.).
If the device does not respond to a poll, it is marked failed.
The scanner supports changes in the devices application number, causing a team
description upload.
NOTE:
Device information is populated a piece at a time; device specific information first,
followed by application data. Wait for the application status to return to normal in the
MS/TP Log Report before displaying subpoint information for the device.
BACnet Router Overview
A BACnet router allows communication between networks that use different Data Link
technologies (IP, MS/TP, Ethernet, ARCNET, LonTalk, and so on). A BACnet router
also allows communication between networks that are physically dissimilar (Ethernet to
RS-485, and so on) but connected via the router.
BACnet routers provide the relay function for sending data between two devices on
different networks. They also support message broadcasting on the local network, a
remote network, or all networks.
Firmware Revision 3.4 allows you to view and command points in DXR controllers.
Supervision and support of DXR controllers is supported on both MS/TP and IP
networks.
FLN Device Applications
When used in the TALON Automation System, Siemens BACnet FLN devices are
viewed as applications to the field panel. The subpoints residing on the FLN device can
be displayed, monitored, commanded, and trended directly through the interface.
NOTE:
The word application describes two types of functionality. A field panel application
(including PPCL programs or equipment scheduling) is the actual FLN device as it
relates to the field panel. Most FLN devices also have one or more embedded
programs, or applications. When used in this chapter, the word application refers to
the FLN device as it relates to the field panel. For more about applications residing on
FLN devices, see the user manual that accompanies the specific device.
Default Output
Like all applications, an FLN device application has a default output value, which in
most cases is the DAY/NIGHT mode subpoint. When an application is viewed on a
point report, the field panel displays the FLN device name followed by the default
output subpoint. See the following example:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
189 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Keep Alive Poll Rate
Example
05/08/2006 MON POINT LOG REPORT 12:15am
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*tec:>
Point name
:Suffix (Description) Value/State Status Priority
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.FLR01.RM101.TEC
:DAY.NGT (DAY) -N- NONE
End of report
For a DXR this point will be RM OP MODE.
NOTE:
Each FLN device application contains a number of other subpoints. To reference
other subpoints, the system delimiter (:) is required with a subpoint name or device
report name. See Chapter 1 – The Operator Interface for information on referencing
subpoints.
Keep Alive Poll Rate
The Keep Alive Poll Rate is used when the MS/TP device is not failed.
This scan is performed to verify that all devices on the network are connected and
communicating.
The poll rate time limit is adjustable, from 10 to 300 sec. The default is 60 sec.
Initial Values Overview
FLN devices have pre-set values for the points they contain. These values can be
configured to match site requirements; for example, when balancing the system. These
configuration changes can sometimes be lost through a power failure or device failure.
Because different FLN devices handle the storage and restoration of these point
configurations in different ways, the field panel can back up the configuration changes
for devices residing on its FLN in an initial values table.
The TEC Initial Value feature requires the correct case-sensitive password for MS/TP
device re-initialization. The password for MS/TP device re-initialization is configured
when adding/modifying an MS/TP FLN device to the field panel.
Initial Values Example – BACnet TEC
A BACnet TEC application has a collection of pre-set values for the points it contains.
These values allow the BACnet TEC to do a generic job of control for its intended
application.
190 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
For example, the pre-set values for a VAV application might have the temperature
setpoint at 72°F.
Configuration at the FLN Device
These pre-set values are not always correct for your intended use of the device and
application. For example, you may want a different temperature setpoint in order to
command the pre-set value (72°F) to better match your site (73°F).
Depending on the device and how you make the setpoint change (using Set or
Command), the MS/TP device may not save these changes in non-volatile memory. In
the case of a BACnet TEC:
● If this point value is written to non-volatile memory, this new value is retained
during a power failure and return. Examples of BACnet TEC points written to nonvolatile memory are SBT device name, Device ID, and Initial Value Priority.
● Other BACnet TEC points whose values change frequently are stored in RAM, and
do not overwrite the application relinquish default value. These points are returned
to the default application value after a power failure and return.
Storing the Initial Values at the Field Panel
Once you have the values working correctly in your environment, you save them to the
field panel as the initial values for that BTEC. By default, these initial configuration
values may be read from the Relinquish Default slot for every point, because these are
the values the points should return to when all other command priorities are empty (the
point is not being commanded from the field panel, PPCL, or TALON View
workstation).
You can also choose to save only the point information that has changed since the
application was loaded.
NOTE:
If you do not store the relinquish default values at the field panel, you must store the
configuration data in another manner if you want to restore the device after a failure.
Overriding Initial Values
You can command points to values other than their initial configuration values from the
field panel. For example:
● you may want to command an output point to a specific value in order to heat a
building during construction
● you could command an input point to a fixed value to continue heating an occupied
space to 72°F when the room sensor fails
In the case of the output point, you are overriding the initial configuration value. In the
case of the input point, you ignore its value (put the input out of service) and substitute
a value in its place. These commanded values are not in the initial configuration
values, so they must be saved in order to bring the BTEC back to its previous state
after a power failure or device failure.
Restoring the Commanded Values of Points
When a BACnet TEC returns from a loss of power, the field panel sends the following
values from the initial values table for the device:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
191 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
● the present value of all 'out of service' input points
● the present value of all overridden output points
This collection of values is written to the MS/TP device, restoring its previous
configuration exactly.
NOTE:
You can also manually send all of the initial values to a device, for example when
replacing a failed device.
Initial Values Procedures
Displaying MS/TP Device Initial Values
Displaying MS/TP Device Initial Values Backed-Up at the Field Panel
HMI
A, N, M, I, L (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Initvalues, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Type the name of MS/TP device.
Press ENTER.
Application number
Here, Print
To select all MS/TP devices on the
network and display initial values based
on application number.
Type the application number.
Press ENTER.
To search for all MS/TP device
applications on the network.
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The system displays the MS/TP Initial Values Display report.
Example
>MSTP Device name : ----------------------------->Application number : ---->Here, Printer : H
07/17/2008 THU MSTP INITIAL VALUES DISPLAY REPORT 11:42
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*:*>
MSTP Device name
:Suffix (Description) Value State Priority
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------device1
:DO 5 OFF -N- BN15
192 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
End of report
>Log, Command, Quit? -
Releasing MS/TP Device Initial Values
Releasing an MSTP Device Subpoint to Normal Control after Setting its
Initial Value
HMI
A, N, M, I, C, R (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Initial values, Command, Release)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device system name
Type the MSTP Device.
Press ENTER.
To select all MS/TP devices on the
network and release initial values based
on application number.
NOTE: If you select MS/TP devices by
application number, you can accidentally
release the initial values of multiple
MS/TP devices on the network.
Application number
Type the application number.
Subpoint name
Type the subpoint name.
The system displays <MSTP device:subpoint name> and Command
successful.
Example
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, Quit? r
>MSTP Device system name : device1------------------------------------->Subpoint name : DO 5-------<device1:Do 5> Command successful
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, Quit? -
Setting MS/TP Device Initial Values
Setting Initial Values for the MSTP Device
HMI
A, N, M, I, C, S (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Initvalues, Command, Set)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
193 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Type the name of the MS/TP device.
Press ENTER.
To select all MS/TP devices on the
network and set initial values based on
application number.
CAUTION: If you select MS/TP devices
by application number, you will set the
initial values for every MS/TP device that
is running that application on the
network.
Application number
Type the application number.
Subpoint name
Type the subpoint name.
Initial value
Enter an initial value for the subpoint.
The system displays <MSTP device:subpoint name> and Command
successful.
Example
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, Quit? s
>MSTP Device system name : device1------------------------------------->Subpoint name : DO 5------->Initial value : 4------------------<device1:DO 5> Command successful
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, Quit? -
Updating MS/TP Device Initial Values
This procedure sends a copy of the MS/TP device initial values to the field panel. Any
MS/TP device initial values stored in the field panel are replaced by the update.
NOTE:
DXRs are designed to not respond to initial value update requests. Do not use the
initial value update command on a DXR because it will not upload the initial values.
Instead, set the initial values using ABT Site, or by commanding the point’s initial
values from the field panel, TALON TALON View , or Desigo CC workstation.
The following sequence occurs on MS/TP FLN devices during an update:
● Out of Service Input points - the present value of the point is saved as the field
panel initial value for these points
● Output Points - the present value of the point priority array slot designated as
override will be saved as the field panel initial value for this point, and will be
marked as an override.
Updating Initial Values for the MS/TP Device
HMI
A, N, M, I, C, P (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Initvalues, Command, Panel_update)
194 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device system
Type the name of the MS/TP device.
Press ENTER.
To select all MS/TP devices on the
network and set initial values based on
application number.
CAUTION: If you select MS/TP devices
by application number, you will set the
initial values for every MS/TP device that
is running that application on the
network.
Application number
Type the application number.
Subpoint name
Type the subpoint name.
Initial value
Enter an initial value for the subpoint.
The system displays <MSTP device:subpoint name> and Command
successful.
Example
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
s
>MSTP Device system name : device1------------------------------------->Subpoint name : DO 5------->Initial value : 4------------------<device1:DO 5> Command successful
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
-
Restoring the Relinquish Default Values of an FLN Device
Restoring the Relinquish Default Values of an FLN Device from the Field
Panel Initial Values Table for that Device
HMI
A, N, M, I, C, E (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Initvalues, Command, rEstore_rds)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Type the MS/TP device name.
To select a specific FLN device.
Type a partial MS/TP device name with
wildcards.
To select a range of FLN devices.
Press ENTER.
To select FLN devices.
Type the application number.
To select all FLN devices with a single
application.
Press ENTER.
To select all FLN devices.
Application number
Are you sure (Y/N)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Y
User's Manual
195 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
Command successful displays. The FLN device relinquish default values are
restored.
Example
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
e
>MSTP Device name : ----------------------------->Application number : ---->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
<BTEC4> Command successful
<VAV3040> Command successful
End of commanding
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
–
>MSTP Device name : ----------------------------->Application number : ---->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
<BTEC4> Command successful
<VAV3040> Command successful
End of commanding
>Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
-
Understanding BACnet TEC and PTEC Initial Values
Subpoint Types
There are two types of subpoints: Unbundlable and Non-unbundlable.
Although all subpoints are auto-unbundlable at the Insight workstation, only TEC
subpoints that have EEPROM and RAM storage are considered unbundlable. These
points are enclosed in braces { } in the Point Database section in the Application Notes
for the TEC. EEPROM and RAM points are explained in more detail in TEC Memory
Types section.
EEPROM only subpoints are configuration points and are designed to be commanded
once and left at that value.
Example of an EEPROM Subpoint (6) and a RAM Subpoint (92).
196 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Point
Number
Descriptor
Factory
Default (SI
Units)
Engr.
Units (SI
Units)
Slope (SI
Units)
Intercept
(SI Units)
On Text
Off Text
6
DAY CLG
STPT
74.0
(23.44888)
DEG F
(DEG C)
0.25 (0.14)
48.0
(8.88888)
--
--
{92}
CTL STPT
74.0
(23.44888)
DEG F
(DEG C)
0.25 (0.14)
48.0
(8.88888)
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
TEC Memory Types
There are three memory types for subpoints in BACnet TECs:
● EPROM – this is where the default values are stored for TEC subpoints. This
memory is burned into the TEC from the factory and cannot be changed.
● EEPROM – EEPROM points can be overwritten and the value is not lost after a
power loss. EEPROM is where operator commands are stored and those values
are reloaded upon a return from power loss.
● RAM – located in the volatile memory of the TEC. The values stored here are lost
when a TEC loses power. Current values, such as readings from sensors, control
loops, and so on, are stored in the RAM. When the TEC is initially powered up, the
factory default values from EPROM load into RAM.
Comparison Between EEPROM and RAM Subpoints.
Memory Types How Subpoint
for Subpoint
Numbers are
Displayed in
Application Notes
Methods for
Commanding
Subpoints in a
BACnet TEC
Notes for BACnet
TEC Commanding
EEPROM and
RAM
HMI: P,C,V*
Does not write to
HMI: PCV*
Panel Initial Values
or TEC Initial
Values.
HMI: A,N,M,I,C,S**
Writes to Panel
Initial Values, but
not to TEC Initial
Values.
Insight: Point
Commander
Does not write to
Insight: Point
Panel Initial Values Commander
or TEC Initial
Values.
Insight: Global
Commander
Writes to Panel
Initial Values, but
not to TEC Initial
Values.
PPCL: Set,
Assignment
Statements
Does not write to
PPCL: Set,
Panel Initial Values Assignment
or TEC Initial
Statements
Values.
PPCL: OIP with
ANMICS**
Writes to Panel
Initial Values, but
not to TEC Initial
Values.
PPCL: OIP with
ANTICS***
HMI: P,C,V*
Writes to TEC
Initial Values, but
not to Panel Initial
Values.
--
HMI: A,N,M,I,C,S**
Writes to Panel
HMI: ANTICS***
Initial Values and to
TEC Initial Values.
Insight: Point
Commander
Writes to TEC
Initial Values, but
not to Panel Initial
Values.
Subpoint number
enclosed in braces { }
EEPROM Only No braces { } around
subpoint number
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
Methods for
Commanding
Subpoints for a P1
TEC
HMI: ANTICS***
Insight: Global
Commander
--
197 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
Comparison Between EEPROM and RAM Subpoints.
Memory Types How Subpoint
for Subpoint
Numbers are
Displayed in
Application Notes
Methods for
Commanding
Subpoints in a
BACnet TEC
Notes for BACnet
TEC Commanding
Methods for
Commanding
Subpoints for a P1
TEC
Insight: Global
Commander
Writes to Panel
Insight: Global
Initial Values and to Commander
TEC Initial Values.
PPCL: Set,
Assignment
Statements
Writes to TEC
Initial Values, but
not to Panel Initial
Values.
PPCL: OIP with
ANMICS**
Writes to Panel
PPCL: OIP with
Initial Values and to ANTICS***
TEC Initial Values.
--
* PCV stands for the keystrokes Point, Command, Value.
** ANMICS stands for Application, flN, Ms/tp, Initial values, Command, Set.
*** ANTICS stands for Application, flN, TEC, Initial values, Command, Set.
An important distinction between BACnet TECs and P1 TECs is that the BACnet TECs
allow their EEPROM subpoints to be commanded without using an OIP statement;
while this makes it easier to write PPCL, it can also result in excessive commanding
and eventually damaging the BACnet TEC.
An Initial Value is intended to be used to set the point value when an analog point is
first viewed by the TEC or field panel upon a return from power loss or failure. There
are two types of Initial Values: TEC Initial Values and Panel Initial Values.
TEC Initial Values
Subpoint values set through operator commands are TEC Initial Values. For example,
when an operator commands the address and application numbers using WCIS or
BACnet Object Browser (BOB), those values are burned into the EEPROM as TEC
Initial Values.
Viewing Through WCIS from the RTS port (this is the P1 interface to the
BACnet TEC)
1. From the View menu, select Column Headings.
2. When the Custom Column dialog box displays, select the Initial option.
 TEC Initial Values can be viewed this way for BACnet TECs as well as P1 TECs.
Commanding Through WCIS from the RTS port (this is the P1 interface
to the BACnet TEC)
The TEC Initial Value can be set for a subpoint by double-clicking the subpoint and
assigning a value in the New Val field.
Commanding the subpoint puts an asterisk (*) next to the Priority. Releasing the
subpoint does not remove the asterisk. The asterisk indicates when the Initial Value
that has been set differs from the Default Value.
The TEC Initial Values can also be accessed for a BACnet TEC by right-clicking on the
subpoint in System Profile, selecting BACnet, and then Object Browser.
198 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
The Relinquish Default value is the TEC Initial Value.
Commanding Through the BACnet Object Browser (this is done from the
BACnet side)
The TEC Initial Value can be set for a subpoint by double-clicking the Present Value
property of the EEPROM point and assigning a value in the New Value field of the
Write Property window. For PTECs with 66xx applications, the Relinquish Default
property can also be commanded for RAM subpoints.
Commanding Through the HMI or Global Commander
The Present Value of EEPROM subpoints can be commanded through the HMI or
Global Commander. Doing this also puts the Present Value in the TEC Initial Value.
Using the HMI (or telnet)
Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? A
Ppcl, flNdevice, Quit? N
Mstp, Tec, Uc, Quit? M
Log, Display, Edit, Initvalues, Quit? I
Log, Command, Quit? C
Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
S
MSTP Device system name : FAN COIL 2-------------------------------Subpoint name : DAY HTG STPT
Initial value : 68-----------------<Fan Coil 2:DAY HTG STPT> Command successful
Using Global Commander
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
199 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
Commanding Using System Profile
The TEC Initial Value of a subpoint can be set through System Profile in the
Application Initial Values dialog box. This dialog box can be accessed by doubleclicking on the BACnet TEC, and then clicking the Initial Values button. In the Initial
Values column, type the desired TEC Initial Value and then click OK.
200 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
TEC Panel Initial Values
Panel Initial Values are loaded into the TEC to send the last known operator command
after the field panel establishes that the TEC has returned from failure. Panel Initial
Values are created when either a subpoint’s initial value is commanded from the HMI
or Global Commander, or a Panel Update is performed. Panel Update is explained in
more detail in the TEC Panel Update section.
Output Points
If a value exists in the Initial Value Priority drop-down menu, then the value in the
Panel Initial Values is updated at the Initial Value Priority. The Initial Value Priority
defaults to BN16. The Initial Value Priority is defined in the BACnet TEC definition as
illustrated below.
The value in the Initial Value Priority drop-down menu can be seen from the BACnet
Object Browser. In the drawing below, the priority slot for BN16 is set to a value of 84.
If a value does not exist in the Initial Value Priority drop-down menu (it displays a null
value) and the Save Relinquish Defaults property is set to Yes, then the Relinquish
Default value is updated in the Panel Initial Values.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
201 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
NOTE:
Relinquish Defaults only apply to points which have a Command Priority Array.
Input Points
If the Out of Service property is set to True, then the Present Value is updated in the
Panel Initial Values as Out of Service.
Commanding the Panel Initial Value
Output Points
● Value is updated in the Panel Initial Values at the Initial Value Priority.
● The field panel sends commands to the BACnet TEC at Initial Value Priority.
NOTE:
Initial Value Priority cannot be the highest priority.
Input Points
● Field panel sets the Out of Service property to True and commands the BACnet
TEC subpoint.
● Value is updated in the Panel Initial Values as Out of Service.
Using the HMI, Global Commander or System Profile
Commanding EEPROM subpoints through the HMI, Global Commander or System
Profile as described in Section 3, also commands the Panel Initial Values, as well as
TEC Initial Values.
TEC Panel Update
When a subpoint is commanded from WCIS, the TEC Initial Values do not
automatically upload to the field panel.
When an update is performed:
● The field panel uses the Read Property Multiple services to read the BACnet TEC.
● Panel Initial Values are updated using the Initial Values Configuration as specified
in the BACnet TEC definition. See TEC Panel Initial Value section for more details.
● Any TEC point, which has a value stored in the Initial Value Priority drop-down
menu of the Command Priority Array, has that value saved in Panel Initial Values.
From the HMI prompt
Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? a
Ppcl, flNdevice, Quit? n
Mstp, Tec, Uc, Quit? m
Log, Display, Edit, Initvalues, Quit? i
Log, Command, Quit? c
Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
p
MSTP Device name : FAN COIL 2-------------------<FAN COIL 2> Command successful
202 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
From an Insight Workstation
This can be done by doing one of the following:
● In System Profile, right-click on the BACnet TEC, and then select Update.
● In Global Commander, click the Update Device button.
The drawing below summarizes what happens to Panel Initial Values when an update
is performed.
BACnet TEC Initial Value for EEPROM and RAM Points
BACnet TEC Initial Value for EEPROM Points
●
●
●
The command sent at the highest priority becomes the Present Value and
Relinquish Default.
Can be set by WCIS using the RTS port (P1 interface). The default priority is BN08.
Can be set by BACnet services as follows:
– Global Commander and System Profile (from the BACnet TEC definition):
commands at the priority set in the Initial Value Priority field in the BACnet TEC
definition.
– Point Commander: commands at the default priority of BN08. The command
priority can be changed from the drop-down menu.
– BACnet Object Browser: commands at the default priority of BN08.
– HMI or telnet: point command (Point, Command, Value) is set at a default
priority of BN08. Initial value command (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Initvalues,
Command, Set) is set at default priority of BN16.
NOTE:
The Relinquish Default property is also writeable through BACnet services for PTEC
applications 66xx.
BACnet TEC Initial Value for RAM Points
TEC Initial Values for applications 25xx and 65xx can only be set through the RTS port
(P1 interface) of the BACnet TEC connected to WCIS. For PTEC applications 66xx this
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
203 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
Initial Values Overview
can also be done through the BACnet Object Broswer by writing to the Relinquish
Default value.
Examples
Heat.Cool (subpoint 5) in PTEC Application 6653 is set to HEAT through WCIS. This
updates the TEC Initial Value to HEAT and changes the Relinquish Default to HEAT
(from the default value of COOL). The subpoint displays as follows:
Cycle power to the PTEC or re-initialize the PTEC. This releases the override, but
keeps the TEC Initial Value as HEAT. The subpoint displays as follows:
Which Values Are Sent to the BACnet TEC Upon a Return from Failure?
TEC Initial Values are sent to the subpoint after the BACnet TEC returns from a power
loss. If the field panel detects a BACnet TEC failure, it sends the Panel Initial Values to
the BACnet TEC as follows:
● Output subpoints are set to the value stored in the Initial Value Priority drop-down
menu.
● Panel Initial Values are sent to the input subpoints with the Out of Service property
set to True.
● Relinquish Default values are not sent. They are only sent on Restore Relinquish
Defaults.
NOTE:
Brief power losses may not be detected by the field panel.
Restore Relinquish Default
●
Restore Relinquish Default commands the output subpoints to the value in the
Initial Value Priority drop-down menu.
● Relinquish Default values for EEPROM subpoints are updated if the Initial Value
Priority is the highest priority.
● Releases the Initial Value Priority.
Restore Relinquish Default is automatically performed by the field panel when a
BACnet TEC is replaced.
It can also be manually performed through the HMI or telnet using the following
keystrokes:
Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? A
Ppcl, flNdevice, Quit? n
Mstp, Tec, Uc, Quit? M
Log, Display, Edit, Initvalues, Quit? i
Log, Command, Quit? c
Set, Release, Mstp_initialize, Panel_update, rEstore_rds, Quit?
e
MSTP Device name : FAN COIL 2-------------------<FAN COIL 2> Command successful
204 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
MS/TP Device Procedures
Adding a Master MS/TP or BACnet/IP FLN Device to the
MS/TP FLN
This procedure adds a Master MS/TP device to the MS/TP or BACnet/IP FLN. Once
you add the device, the subpoints residing on it are automatically available to the field
panel.
This can be done, in most cases, by entering the Device Instance Number of the
device.
The following FLN types are supported:
● Primary Local MS/TP
● Secondary Local MS/TP
● Router MS/TP FLN
● BACnet/IP FLN
If there is a need to add by network number and MAC Address, specify the network
number that the device is connected to:
● Primary Local MS/TP – field panel’s primary MS/TP network number.
● Secondary Local MS/TP – field panel’s secondary MS/TP network number.
● Router MS/TP FLN – BACnet MS/TP router’s MS/TP network number.
● BACnet/IP FLN – It in not possible to specify the BACnet/IP network number and
MAC Address. You must specify the device instance number.
NOTE:
All DXRE and DXRM devices must be added as a Master. Technically, a Master does
not really apply to a DXRE, however, it produces the correct prompting to add the
DXRE to the field panel’s database.
Adding a Master MS/TP Device to the MS/TP FLN
HMI
A, N, M, E, A (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device System name
Type the new MS/TP device system
name.
MSTP Device name
Specify a new MS/TP device name.
Keep the MS/TP device name the same
as the MS/TP device system name.
Application number
If this is a Siemens device:
Have the field panel determine the
application number.
Specify a particular application, type the
application number.
Share team descriptions with other
MS/TP devices on the same network,
type the common application number.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
205 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
If this is a third-party device:
Specify a unique application number for
this third-party device, type the
application number.
Share team descriptions with other thirdparty MS/TP devices on the same
network, type a common third-party
application number.
NOTE: The application number range for
third-party devices is 10,000 - 11,999.
Numbers outside this range will show as
failed.
Descriptor
Type the MS/TP device descriptor.
Access group(s)
Specify the access group(s) to which the All access groups (1 through 30).
new MS/TP device belongs. To specify:
Type the number of that access group.
A single access group.
Type the number of each access group
Two or more access groups
separated by commas, or use two
periods to indicate a range (for example,
1..4,7,9,12..20).
Field panel
Master, Slave
Specify the ALN device ID of the field
panel. To specify:
The field panel where you are
connected.
Type the field panel ALN device ID.
A particular field panel.
M
For Master
All DXREs and DXRMs must be
configured as Masters.
MSTP Device Instance Number
If you know the MS/TP device instance
number, type it.
The system adds the MS/TP master
device to the MS/TP FLN.
Press ENTER.
If you do not know the MS/TP device
instance number:
●
In the MSTP Device Network
Number field, type the network
number.
●
In the MSTP Device Mac Address
field, type the MAC address for the
device.
This option is not available for a DXRE.
Initial Value Priority
Save Relinquish Defaults (Y/N)
206 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Type the Priority Array slot number you
have specified to receive initial values (1
through 16), or press ENTER to accept
the default value (15).
Y
Save the relinquish default values of
every point log object in this MS/TP
device to the matching field panel Initial
Values table.
N
Save only commanded point log object
values to the matching field panel Initial
Values table.
NOTE:
When setting up a UEC, always select N
at this prompt.
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
Device Init Password
Enter the device initialization password
for a password-protected MS/TP device
that supports re-initialization, and then
type the password .
This password will be used by the
system to re-initialize the device.
Press ENTER.
For MS/TP devices that are not
password-protected.
The system adds the MS/TP master device to the MS/TP FLN.
Adding a Slave MS/TP Device to the MS/TP FLN
This procedure adds a Slave MS/TP device to the MS/TP FLN. Once you add the
device, the subpoints residing in it are automatically available to the field panel.
Adding a Slave MS/TP Device to the MS/TP FLN
HMI
A, N, M, E, A (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device System name
MSTP Device name
Type the new MS/TP device system
name.
Specify new MS/TP device name and
type the name.
Keep the MS/TP device name the same
as the MS/TP device system name.
Application number
If this is a Siemens device:
Have the field panel determine the
application number.
Specify a particular application and type
the application number.
Share team descriptions with other
MS/TP devices on the same network
and type the common application
number.
If this is a third-party device:
Specify a unique application number for
this third-party device and type the
application number.
Share team descriptions with other thirdparty MS/TP devices on the same
network and type a common third-party
application number.
NOTE: The application number range for
third-party devices is 10,000 - 11,999.
Numbers outside this range will show as
failed.
Descriptor
Access group(s)
Type the MS/TP device descriptor
Specify the access group(s) to which the All access groups (1 through 30).
new MS/TP device belongs. To specify:
A single access group, type the number
of that access group.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
207 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
Two or more access groups, type the
number of each access group separated
by commas, or use two periods to
indicate a range (for example,
1..4,7,9,12..20).
Field panel
Specify the ALN device ID of the field
panel. To specify:
The field panel where you are connected
A particular field panel and type the field
panel ALN device ID.
Master, Slave
S
MSTP Device Instance Number
Type the MS/TP device instance
number.
MSTP Device Network Number
Type the network number, and then
press ENTER. A blank field defaults to
the local MS/TP network.
MSTP Device Mac Address
Type the MAC address for the device.
Initial Value Priority
Type the Priority Array slot number you
have specified to receive initial values (1
through 16), or press ENTER to accept
the default value (15).
Save Relinquish Defaults (Y/N)
Device Init Password
Y
Save the relinquish default values of
every point log object in this MS/TP
device to the matching field panel Initial
Values table.
N
Save only commanded point log object
values to the matching field panel Initial
Values table
Enter the device initialization password
for a password-protected MS/TP device
that supports re-initialization, type the
password and press ENTER.
This password will be used by the
system to re-initialize the device.
Press ENTER for MS/TP devices that
are not password-protected.
The system adds the MS/TP slave device to the MS/TP FLN.
Removing an MS/TP Device From the MS/TP FLN
When you remove an MS/TP device (for example, a BTEC) from the MS/TP FLN:
● Polling for COVs is stopped
● Proxying is stopped
Because removed master devices may still be communicating on the FLN:
● The token is still passed to removed master devices
● BACnet routing is still provided for removed MS/TP devices
Removing an MS/TP Device from the MS/TP FLN
HMI
A, N, M, E, D (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Edit, Delete)
208 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device Name
Type the name of the MS/TP device that
you are removing.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
The MS/TP device is removed.
Example
The following example shows removal of an MS/TP device.
BTEC <btec1> deleted
Copying an MS/TP Device
Copying a Device on the MS/TP FLN
HMI
A, N, M, E, C (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Edit, Copy)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Copy from MSTP name
Type the name of the device you want to
copy.
MSTP Device system name
Type the new system name.
MSTP Device name
Specify a new MS/TP device name and
type the name.
Keep the MS/TP device name the same
as the MS/TP device system name.
Field panel
MSTP Device Instance Number
Specify the ALN device ID of the field
panel. To specify:
The field panel where you are
connected.
Type the field panel ALN device ID.
A particular field panel.
Type the MS/TP device instance number
or leave blank for system to provide.
MSTP <TECn> added is displayed (where TECn is the system name of the new
device).
Example
>Copy from device system name : ----------------------------->MSTP Device system name : mstp new------------------------>Device name : mstp new--------------------->Field panel : ------>MSTP Device Instance Number : ------>MSTP Device Mac Address : --MSTP < mstp new > added
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
209 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
Modifying an MS/TP Device On the MS/TP FLN
NOTE:
This procedure does not modify the end device. To change TEC settings, you must
use the tool at that device.
Modifying a Device on the MS/TP FLN
HMI
A, N, M, E, M (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Edit, Modify)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP name to modify
Type the MSTP Device system name of
the device you want to modify.
MSTP Device name
Specify a new MS/TP device name and
type the name.
Keep the MS/TP device name the same
as the MS/TP device system name.
Descriptor
Type the MS/TP device descriptor.
Access group(s)
Specify the access group(s) to which the All access groups (1 through 30).
new MS/TP device belongs. To specify:
Type the number of that access group.
A single access group.
Type the number of each access group
Two or more access groups.
separated by commas, or use two
periods to indicate a range (for example,
1..4,7,9,12..20).
Master, Slave
M or S
MSTP Device Instance Number
Type the MS/TP device instance
number.
MSTP <TECn> modified is displayed (where TECn is the system name of the
modified device).
Example
>Device system name : ----------------------------->Device name : mstp------------------------->Descriptor : mstp----------->Access group(s) : 1-10, 15--------------------->Master, Slave : s
>MSTP Device Instance Number : 123---MSTP < mstp > modified
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Discovering FLN Devices
The Device Discovery feature, in Field Panel Web Server User Interface, is available if
the field panel has been enabled for MS/TP FLN and has Firmware Revision 3.3 or
210 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
later. The field panel automatically triggers a discovery process on startup for the local
MS/TP FLN(s).
NOTE:
When data is modified in the Device Discovery table, the device reference that is
stored in the field panel database is modified when the device is added. Modifying
data in the Device Discovery table does not modify the properties that are stored in
the FLN device.
Use the following procedure to manually trigger a discovery process:
1. In the FLN Editor, select a field panel with Firmware Revision 3.3 or later.
2. Select the desired FLN.
3. Click the Discover Devices
button at the bottom of the FLN
Editor device tree pane.
4. Complete the following steps if they apply to your network:
–
–
If the field panel has Firmware Revision 3.4 or later, you can enter a range of
instance numbers to filter the discovered list and reduce the impact to panel
performance.
During the first device discovery on a routed MS/TP FLN or IP FLN, the
following window displays. Enter the range of instance numbers to discover.
This range will then be used for any subsequent discoveries of the same
network.
 The Device Discovery pane displays a list of all devices that are physically
connected to the network but have not been added to the field panel database.
5. Do one of the following:
–
–
Select the ALL check box to select all devices in the table to be added to the
database.
Select the check box for individual devices to be added to the database.
6. Enter or modify any device information. For more information, see the User
Interface Description for FLN Device Discovery section.
NOTE: A field with an invalid entry displays a red border. Move your cursor over
the field to display the valid entry parameters.
7. Click the Add Selected button to add all selected devices to the panel database.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
211 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Procedures
NOTE:
Before adding a UEC to the database, the UEC must be made ready.
If device discovery is in progress, the Refresh List button is available. To refresh the
list of discovered devices, click the Refresh List button at the bottom of the pane.
CAUTION
Changes made to the Device Discovery table are overwritten when you click the
Refresh List button. Before refreshing the list, click the Add Selected button to add all
selected devices to the database.
Restarting Device Discovery
Selecting the Restart Discovery button triggers a new discovery process and updates
the list to include any changes to the physical network. The Restart Discovery button is
available if discovery is complete.
To restart the device discovery process:
1. Click the Restart Discovery button in the bottom right corner of the Device
Discovery pane.
–
If the field panel has Firmware Revision 3.4 or later, you can enter a range of
instance numbers to filter the discovered list and reduce the impact to panel
performance.
 A Discover Devices dialog box displays.
2. Click Yes to continue.
 A Discovering Devices progress bar displays:
If you click the Cancel button to close the progress window, a current (partial) list of
discovered devices displays in the Device Discovery pane. While the discovery
process continues, you can work with the current list of devices.
If Discovery is in progress, the Refresh List button is available. To refresh the list of
discovered devices, click the Refresh List button at the bottom of the pane.
212 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
CAUTION
Changes made to the Device Discovery table are overwritten when the Refresh List
button is clicked. Before refreshing the list, click the Add Selected button to add all
selected devices to the database.
MS/TP Device Reports
Displaying an MS/TP Device Report
This report displays the properties of the specified MS/TP device objects, including:
● MSTP device name for each MS/TP device object
● Supported services and object types
● BACnet encoded name and object name for each object within an MS/TP device
● Number of objects within an MS/TP device
NOTE:
Failed MS/TP devices are not displayed.
Displaying an MS/TP Device Report
HMI
A, N, M, D, V (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Display, deVice)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Specify all MS/TP devices across the
network.
Specify a range of MS/TP devices using
wild cards.
Type a specific MS/TP device name.
The system displays the MS/TP Device report.
Example
NOTE:
Lines have been removed from the example for the sake of brevity.
>MSTP Device name : *------------------------03/17/2008 MON MSTP DEVICE REPORT 04:49
-------------------------------------------------------------------------ALERTON
.Object name : "BTEC2"
.Object type : device
.System status : operational
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
213 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
.Vendor name : "Siemens Industry, BAU-NA"
.Vendor id : 7
.Model name : "VAV Actuator Series 2 Bacnet ASC Controller"
.Firmware revision : "BY20 Rev 1.0"
.APP Software Version : "Appl Rev 1.2"
.Location : "DEFAULT LOCATION"
.Description : "DEFAULT DESCRIPTION"
.Protocol version : 1
.Protocol revision : 3
.Services supported : Atomic Read File
: Atomic Write File
: Read Property
: Read Property Multiple
: Write Property
: Write Property Multiple
: Device Communication Control
: Reinitialize Device
: I Am
: I Have
: Time Synchronization
: Who Has
: Who Is
.Object types supported : Analog Input
: Analog Output
: Analog Value
: Binary Input
: Binary Output
: Binary Value
: Device
: File
: Program
.Max APDU length accepted : 480
.Segmentation supported : no-segmentation
.Max segments accepted : {}
End of report
>Definitions, Subpoints, deVice, Quit? –
>MSTP Device name : *------------------------03/17/2008 MON MSTP DEVICE REPORT 04:49
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ALERTON
.Object name : "BTEC2"
.Object type : device
214 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
.System status : operational
.Vendor name : "Siemens Industry, BAU-NA"
.Vendor id : 7
.Model name : "VAV Actuator Series 2 Bacnet ASC Controller"
.Firmware revision : "BY20 Rev 1.0"
.APP Software Version : "Appl Rev 1.2"
.Location : "DEFAULT LOCATION"
.Description : "DEFAULT DESCRIPTION"
.Protocol version : 1
.Protocol revision : 3
.Services supported : Atomic Read File
: Atomic Write File
: Read Property
: Read Property Multiple
: Write Property
: Write Property Multiple
: Device Communication Control
: Reinitialize Device
: I Am
: I Have
: Time Synchronization
: Who Has
: Who Is
.Object types supported : Analog Input
: Analog Output
: Analog Value
: Binary Input
: Binary Output
: Binary Value
: Device
: File
: Program
.Max APDU length accepted : 480
.Segmentation supported : no-segmentation
.Max segments accepted : {}
End of report
>Definitions, Subpoints, deVice, Quit? -
Displaying an MS/TP Look Report
This procedure displays a Look for BACnet TECs and third-party devices. The MS/TP
Look report contains location information for one or more BACnet TECs or third-party
devices.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
215 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
Displaying an MS/TP Look Report
HMI
A, N, M, E, L (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Edit, Look)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Type the MS/TP device name.
The system displays an MS/TP Look report, as shown in the following example:
Example
>MSTP Device name : btec4------------------------07/20/2008 SUN MSTP LOOK REPORT 11:35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <btec4>
Field Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------MSTP Device system name : BTEC4
MSTP Device name : BTEC4
MSTP Device Instance Number : 4
Application number : 2587
Descriptor : BACnet TEC
Access group(s) : <all>
Field panel name : 22054
Master, Slave : Master
MSTP Device Network Number : 22054
MSTP Device Mac Address : 4
Initial Value Priority : 16
Save Relinquish Defaults : YES
Device Init Password :
End of report
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Example
The following example shows a DXRE Look report. The MS/TP Device MAC Address
is the IP address of the DXRE:BAC0 (BACnet UDP point number).
>MSTP Device name : DXR--------------------------04/11/2016 MON MSTP LOOK REPORT 13:39
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <DXR>
216 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
Field Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------MSTP Device system name : DXR
MSTP Device name : DXR
MSTP Device Instance Number : 15052
Application number : 14052
Descriptor :
Access group(s) : <all>
Field panel name : 13041
Master, Slave : Master
MSTP Device Network Number : 42
MSTP Device Mac Address : 192.168.1.24:BAC0
Initial Value Priority : 16
Save Relinquish Defaults : YES
Device Init Password : <password>
End of report
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Displaying an MS/TP Device Definition Report
This report displays the:
● MSTP device name
● Device Instance Number
● Field Panel device is connected to
● Device Network Number
● Device MAC Address
● Example
The following example shows an MS/TP Device Definition report.
>MSTP Device name : DXR-------------------------->Here, Printer : H
04/11/2016 MON MSTP DEFINITION DISPLAY REPORT 15:00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <DXR>
Field Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------MSTP Device system name : DXR
MSTP Device name : DXR
MSTP Device Instance Number : 15052
Application number : 14052
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
217 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
Descriptor :
Access group(s) : <all>
Field panel name : 13041
Master, Slave : Master
MSTP Device Network Number : 42
MSTP Device Mac Address : 192.168.1.24:BAC0
Initial Value Priority : 16
Save Relinquish Defaults : YES
Device Init Password : <password>
End of report
>Definitions, Subpoints, deVice, Quit? HMI
A, N, M, D, D (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Display, Definition)
Displaying an MS/TP Log Report
The MS/TP Log report displays address, name, and status information for the selected
MS/TP device.
Displaying an MS/TP Log Report
HMI
A, N, M, L (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Type the MS/TP device name.
The system displays an MS/TP Log report.
Notice that in the DXRE, the MAC displays as IP to show that this device is on the
BACnet/IP FLN. To determine more information, see the Look Report or the Display
Definition Report.
Example
The following example shows an MS/TP Log report.
>MSTP Device name : -----------------------------05/06/2008 TUE MSTP LOG REPORT 00:01
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
"Field panel"
MSTP Device Name Application Device
Master Number Status Instance NetNum MAC Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------------"7135"
218 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
ALBERTA YES 11223 -N- 3032 55 32 -NBTEC06 YES 2587 -N- 6 55 6 -NDXR YES 14052 -N- 15052 42 IP -N"4194303"
VAV CTLR YES 2587 *F* 2 65534 2 -NEnd of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Initvalues, Quit? -
Displaying an MS/TP Device Subpoint Log
HMI
A, N, M, D, S (Application, flNdevice, Mstp, Display, Subpoints)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
MSTP Device name
Type the device name.
Application number
Type the application number.
Subpoint name
Type the subpoint name.
Here, Printer
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The system displays an MS/TP Device Subpoint Log report as shown in the following
example.
Example
07/20/2008 SUN MSTP SUBPOINT DISPLAY REPORT 11:47
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <btec4:*>
MSTP Device name
:Suffix (Description) Value State Priority
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BTEC4
:CTLR ADDRESS 4 -N- NONE
:APPLICATION 2587 -N- NONE
:RMTMP OFFSET 0 DEG F -N- NONE
:ROOM TEMP 74 DEG F *F* NONE
:DI 6 OFF -N- NONE
:RM STPT DIAL 74 DEG F *F* NONE
:AUX TEMP AI5 38 DEG F *F* NONE
:WALL SWITCH NO -N- NONE
End of report
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
219 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 5—MS/TP FLN and BACnet/IP Devices
MS/TP Device Reports
>Definitions, Subpoints, deVice, Quit? -
220 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Alarm Basics
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Chapter 6 describes the functions and process tasks of the alarm application. The
following topics are discussed:
● Alarm Basics
● Why Should I Define Points as Alarmable?
● Types of Alarming
● Alarm Counters
● Displaying Points in Alarm
● Acknowledging Alarms
● Using Standard (Intrinsic) Alarming
● Using Event Enrollment (Algorithmic Alarming)
● Uploading Alarm History to the TALON View workstation
Before You Begin
Before using the information in this section, you should have a working understanding
of the following concepts:
● HVAC equipment of the facility
● Point database
● General knowledge of the TALON Automation System
Alarm Basics
An alarm is a status that indicates whether a point value or state is above or below a
defined value. Alarm management is the strategy used to define, route, acknowledge,
and resolve those alarms.
Example of an Alarm
Point values can be monitored to ensure proper operation. If a point value falls outside
its normal operating range or state, an alarm can alert you to this possible problem.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
221 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Alarm Basics
Figure 2: Figure. Example of Analog Value Tracking.
Figure. Example of Analog Value Tracking shows an example of an analog point value
being tracked over a period of time. In this case, the desired value is 72°F within a
±3°F operating range. When the point value exceeds 75°F, the point status changes to
ALARM. When the point value decreases and falls below 75°F, the point returns to
NORMAL.
An example of a digital point used in alarming is an L2SL point with a proof switch. The
status of both the DO and DI points is set to NORMAL. If the state of the points
becomes unequal for a length of time greater than specified in the proof delay (in
seconds), the point status changes to ALARM.
Reporting Alarms with Notification Classes
Alarms automatically routed to the field panels defined in the selected Notification
class. To verify which field panels are defined in the associated notification classes,
see the TALON View Online Documentation window of TALON View 3.x help, which
you can access from the TALON View Main Menu or the TALON View program group.
The field panel sends alarm messages to the destinations in the associated notification
class if the following conditions are met:
● the alarm is enabled for Offnormal events
● the destination is enabled for Offnormal events
● the destination is active based on day of week and time of day
● the panel status is Ready in the node table
The field panel sends normal messages to the destinations in the associated
notification class if the following conditions are met:
● the alarm enabled for Normal events
● the destination is enabled for Normal events
● the destination is active based on day of week and time of day
● the panel status is Ready in the node table
The field panel sends fault messages to the destinations in the associated notification
class if the following conditions are met:
222 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Alarm Basics
●
●
●
●
the alarm is enabled for Fault events
the destination is enabled for Fault events
the destination is ‘active’ based on day of week and time of day
the panel status is Ready in the node table
Alarm Priority
Alarm priorities within a notification class object have a value of 0 through 255. See
Table TALON to BACnet Alarm Severity Cross-reference for a TALON to BACnet
alarm severity comparison.
Table. TALON to BACnet Alarm Severity Cross-reference.
TALON Priority
Level
TALON Name
BACnet Alarm Priority Value
1
Life Safety
0-31
2
Property Safety
32-63
3
Supervisory
64-95
4
Trouble
96-127
5
High Priority Alarms
128-191
6
Low Priority Alarms
192-255
BACnet alarm priority values are mapped to TALON Priority levels using these values.
Alarm Acknowledgement
Acknowledgment indicates to other users on the network that a particular alarm has
been seen by a user. Once an alarm is acknowledged, any other user that views the
alarm message might assume that someone has already taken action to investigate
the ALARM condition. Acknowledgement is commonly used with critical alarms that
require immediate response.
After an alarm is acknowledged, the system does the following:
● Adds an additional line of text to the standard alarm message, identifying the
initials of the last user to acknowledge the alarm.
● Reissues the alarm message, displaying the new status and the user
acknowledging the alarm.
The acknowledgment text remains with the alarm until a different user acknowledges a
new alarm condition. The status of the alarm returns to NORMAL when the point value
also returns to NORMAL. An alarm can also be defined to require an acknowledgment
on a return to NORMAL.
BACnet supports individual alarm acknowledgement for all states of an alarmable
object. The panel with the alarmable object saves the time stamp for the last
notification time, so that the acknowledgement time can be verified before setting the
acknowledgement flags for each event.
Alarm Messages
When an object is in alarm, the system issues an alarm message. The following
example illustrates an intrinsic alarming message:
15:55 11-15-2003
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
223 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Alarm Basics
BLD990.AHU01.MAT (MIXED AIR TEMP) 54.0 DEG F *A* NONE
***********************
* Mixed Air Alarm *
***********************
This message informs you that BLD990.AHU01.MAT went into ALARM at 3:55 P.M.
and the space temperature is currently 54°F. When the point value returns to
NORMAL, the system issues another message informing you of the change of status.
Tokens in Message Text
To enhance generic messages, tokens can be incorporated into the message. A token
is inserted into the message text and when an alarm occurs, the system replaces the
token with the information that the token represents. Tokens can help reduce the
number of alarm messages that must be entered into a field panel.
Information to Insert
Text String (case sensitive)
System point name
%SYSTEMNAME%
Point name
%USERNAME%
Point value
%VALUE%
Descriptor
%DESCRIPTOR%
Engineering units
%ENGS%
Number of state changes
%CHANGES%
Time when point was acknowledged
%TIMEACK%
Time when point last went into alarm
%TIMEOCC%
Time when point first went into alarm
%TIMEFIRST%
Current time
%TIME%
Point status
%STATUS%
Point priority
%PRIORITY%
Alarm Priority
%ALARMPRI%
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>mEssage, Acknowledge, eVent, Quit? e
>Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Quit? e
>Field panel : ------>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Help, Quit? d
>First message number ? 2->Last message number ? 2->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Command successful
224 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Why Should I Define Points as Alarmable?
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Help, Quit? a
>Message number : 2->Line 1: ? **********************************--------------->Line 2: ? * value, units, status, pri ****--------------->Line 3: ? * %VALUE% %ENGS% %STATUS% %PRIORITY%------------->Line 4: ? **********************************---------------Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Help, Quit? l
>First message number ? 2->Last message number ? 2-Field panel name 31
Message number 2 Enabled
**********************************
* value, units, status, pri ****
* %VALUE% %ENGS% %STATUS% %PRIORITY%
Example
In this example, you can see what the alarm message, with tokens having been
defined, could look like for a point.
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Help, Quit? >Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? c
>Value, resetTotal, Quit? v
>Point name : lao1---------------------------->Current value = 10.0 DEG F New: 90--------------->BACnet Command Priority (8 - 16): -----------------lao1 commanded to 90.0 DEG F
>Value, resetTotal, Quit? 14:52 10-06-2009
lao1 90.0 DEG F *A3* BN08
**********************************
* value, units, status, pri ****
* 90.0 DEG F *A3* BN08
**********************************
Why Should I Define Points as Alarmable?
Points are defined as alarmable for the following reasons:
● To prevent critical problems. Points that affect human safety or can cause a severe
problem in building operation should be defined as alarmable. For example, an
alarm that notifies you that the temperature of a heating coil is too low and action
must be taken before it freezes.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
225 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Types of Alarming
Objects are defined as alarmable for the following reasons:
● To prevent critical problems. Objects that affect human safety or can cause a
severe problem in building operation should be defined as alarmable. For example,
an alarm that notifies you that the temperature of a heating coil is too low and
action must be taken before it freezes.
● To notify you when equipment is not functioning properly. Sometimes problems
may occur and go unnoticed. Alarming is a useful tool to identify equipment that is
not working properly and to prevent other devices from becoming damaged.
● To announce scheduled maintenance. For example, an alarm can notify you when
it is time to change air filters.
The following are some examples of equipment that is monitored with alarms:
● Temperature sensors
● Heating and cooling coils
● CO2 detectors
● Door sensors
● Proof switches
Types of Alarming
Two methods of BACnet alarming are available: Intrinsic, and Event Enrollment
(algorithmic). Intrinsic alarming is relatively simple; the point is defined as alarmable
and configured with a few basic user supplied alarm criteria.
Event Enrollment (EE) is an enhanced alarming feature more flexible and powerful
than Intrinsic Alarming. It employs an Event Enrollment object (stored separately from
the point object) which is combined with a Notification class object for multiple
messaging to multiple locations.
Supported Events
Event
Object Type
Event State
CHANGE_OF_STATE
Binary Input,
Binary Value,
Multi-state Value
NORMAL
OFFNORMAL
FAULT
Time_Delay
List_Of_Values
Based on a change in
present value.
COMMAND_FAILURE
Binary Output, Multistate Output
NORMAL
OFFNORMAL
FAULT
Time_Delay
Feedback_Property_R
eference
Based on a difference
Intrinsic
between reference point Event Enrollment
and feedback point.
FLOATING_LIMIT
Analog Input, Analog NORMAL
Output, Analog Value HIGH_LIMIT
LOW_LIMIT
FAULT
Time_Delay
Setpoint_Reference
Low_Diff_Limit
High_Diff_Limit
Deadband
Based on a difference
between setpoint and
error limit.
Event Enrollment
OUT_OF_RANGE
Analog Input, Analog NORMAL
Output, Analog Value HIGH_LIMIT
LOW_LIMIT
FAULT
Time_Delay
Low_Limit
High_Limit
Deadband
Based on a change in
present value.
Intrinsic
Event Enrollment
226 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Event Parameters
User's Manual
Description
Alarming Type
Intrinsic
Event Enrollment
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Types of Alarming
NOTE:
Change_of_ Bitstring, Change_of_Value, Buffer_Ready, and Change_of_Life_Safety
events are not supported in our field panels, but are supported at TALON View for
event enrollment in third-party devices.
Siemens Industry, Inc. field panels only support the Present-Value property for all
referenced objects.
CHANGE_OF_STATE
When the present value of a referenced property is equal to a value in the
List_Of_Values for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the object goes into alarm
(OFFNORMAL). When the present value of the reference property is not equal to a
value in the List_Of_Values for the amount of time set in Time _Delay, the alarm clears
(returns to NORMAL). A FAULT occurs when the reference object fails.
This event can only be applied to the following objects: MSV/BI/BV.
Example
05/19/2009 TUE EVENT ENROLLMENT REPORT 08:45
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Device Instance Number : 111
Event Enrollment Name : testing2
Event Enrollment Instance : 2
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Alarm
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : Enabled
NORMAL transitions : Enabled
FAULT transitions : Enabled
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC 111 BV 0
Event type : ChangeOfState
TimeDelay (sec) : 0
Alarm value : 1
End of report
COMMAND_FAILURE
When a disagreement occurs between the present value of a referenced property and
the Feedback_Property_Reference for a time greater than Time_Delay, the object goes
into alarm (OFFNORMAL). For example, it is used to verify a process change occurs
after writing to a property. A FAULT occurs when either the reference or feedback
object fails.
When the value of the referenced property and the Feedback_Property_Reference
become equal for a time period greater than the Time_Delay, the alarm clears (returns
to NORMAL).
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
227 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Types of Alarming
This event can only be applied to properties with an enumerated value (MO) or
Boolean (BO).
Example
05/19/2009 TUE EVENT ENROLLMENT REPORT 08:43
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Device Instance Number : 111
Event Enrollment Name : testing1
Event Enrollment Instance : 1
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Alarm
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : Enabled
NORMAL transitions : Enabled
FAULT transitions : Enabled
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC 111 BO 0
Event type : commandFAiLure
TimeDelay (sec) : 0
Feedback point name : BAC 111 BO 1
End of report
FLOATING_LIMIT
Floating limit event enrollment objects trigger when the value of the referenced
property exceeds a defined offset from a setpoint that may vary over time (i.e. a
setpoint object whose value changes based on a schedule. Out of range event
enrollment objects trigger when the value of the referenced property exceeds a specific
value.
When a referenced property leaves a range of values based on the current value of the
Setpoint_Reference, High_Diff_Limit, Low_Diff_Limit and Deadband, the object goes
into alarm (OFFNORMAL). A FAULT occurs when either the reference or feedback
object fails.
When the present value of a reference property returns to the range of values defined
by the High_Limit and Low_Limit for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the alarm
clears (returns to NORMAL).
HIGH_LIMIT – When the reference property is greater than Setpoint_Reference +
High_Diff_Limit for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the object goes into alarm
(OFFNORMAL). When the reference property is less than Setpoint_Reference +
High_Diff_Limit – Deadband for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the alarm clears
(returns to NORMAL).
LOW_LIMIT – When the reference property is less than Setpoint_Reference Low_Diff_Limit for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the object goes into alarm
(OFFNORMAL). When the reference property is greater than Setpoint_Reference Low_Diff_Limit + Deadband for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the alarm clears
(returns to NORMAL).
This event can only be applied to an AO, AI, or AV point.
228 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Types of Alarming
NOTE:
Both differential limits should be entered as positive numbers.
Example
05/19/2009 TUE EVENT ENROLLMENT REPORT 08:41
------------------------------------------------------------------------Device Instance Number : 111
Event Enrollment Name : testing
Event Enrollment Instance : 0
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Alarm
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : Enabled
NORMAL transitions : Enabled
FAULT transitions : Enabled
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC 111 AV 0
Event type : floatingLIMit
Setpoint reference : BAC 111 AV 1
High diff limit : 2.000000
Low diff limit : 2.000000
Deadband : 0.000000
TimeDelay (sec) : 0
OUT_OF_RANGE
Out of range event enrollment objects trigger when the value of the referenced
property exceeds a specific value.
When the present value of a reference property has left a range of values defined by
the High_Limit and Low_Limit for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the object
goes into alarm (OFFNORMAL). A FAULT occurs when either the reference or
feedback object fails.
When the present value of a reference property returns to the range of values defined
by the High_Limit and Low_Limit for the amount of time set in Time_Delay, the alarm
clears (returns to NORMAL).
HIGH_LIMIT – When the reference property is greater than High_Limit for the amount
of time set in Time_Delay, the object goes into alarm (OFFNORMAL). When the
reference property is less than High_Limit – Deadband for the amount of time set in
Time_Delay, the alarm clears (returns to NORMAL).
LOW_LIMIT – When the reference property is less than Low_Limit for the amount of
time set in Time_Delay, the object goes into alarm (OFFNORMAL). When the
reference property is greater than Low_Diff_Limit + Deadband for the amount of time
set in Time_Delay, the alarm clears (returns to NORMAL).
This event can only be applied to an AO, AI, or AV point.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
229 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Types of Alarming
Example
05/19/2009 TUE EVENT ENROLLMENT REPORT 08:46
------------------------------------------------------------------------Device Instance Number : 111
Event Enrollment Name : testing3
Event Enrollment Instance : 3
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Alarm
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : Enabled
NORMAL transitions : Enabled
FAULT transitions : Enabled
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC 111 AV 2
Event type : OutOfRange
High limit : 8.000000
Low limit : 2.000000
Deadband : 0.000000
TimeDelay (sec) : 0
End of report
Intrinsic Alarming
TALON BACnet field panels support intrinsic alarming. Intrinsic alarming allows a
BACnet device to provide one or more event sources, locally, that generate
notifications that can be directed to a number of destinations. TALON BACnet standard
objects support intrinsic reporting by supporting properties that define the type of event
to be generated and options for handling and routing notifications. Internal status
changes and alarms can also use intrinsic reporting to generate diagnostic
notifications.
Intrinsic alarming features:
● Easy setup.
● Alarms can be separated into groups for customized reporting.
● Multiple reporting devices based on type of alarm.
● Customized alarm messages with user-defined text.
● Limit nuisance alarms using Deadband and Time Delay.
● Separate print enabling for Offnormal, Normal, and Fault.
● Separate time stamp for Offnormal, Normal, and Fault.
● Separate acknowledgement of Offnormal, Normal, and Fault.
Objects Using Intrinsic Alarming
An intrinsic alarming criterion is entered when an object is initially defined in the
database. During point database entry, you have an option to make the object
alarmable and can choose notification class, message number and whether or not
notification is enabled for OFFNORMAL, NORMAL and FAULT conditions.
230 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Types of Alarming
Proof Delay for Unbundled Points
The proof delay is the time (in seconds) that must elapse before the system checks the
digital input point for ALARM status. It is used to verify that a digital point is truly in an
alarm condition. When a digital input point changes to PROOF status, the system
begins the proof delay counter. If the time defined as the proof delay expires, and the
point value is in ALARM, then the system reports the alarm. If the point value is
NORMAL when the proof delay expires, then the system does not report the alarm.
For example, an L2SL point named BLD990.AHU01.SFN has a proof point. When the
fan starts up, the flow sensor monitors the downstream pressure. If there is not enough
downstream pressure, the sensor will not provide a proof signal and the fan will shut
down (causing an ALARM). When the fan first starts, there may not be enough
pressure and the sensor will not provide a proof signal. The result is that the fan shuts
off and the system issues an alarm. When a proof delay is incorporated, the system
does not check for proof status until the delay time has expired. During this time, the
fan can increase speed and provide enough pressure for the sensor to engage. When
the delay time expires, the system checks the digital point and reacts accordingly.
Event Enrollment (Algorithmic Alarming)
TALON BACnet field panels supporting Firmware Revision 3.2 or later support Event
Enrollment (algorithmic alarming). Event Enrollment (EE) is an extension of intrinsic
alarming, and uses the event enrollment object in combination with the notification
class object. The EE object is entered independently of when a point is defined. During
EE definition, the point associated with the EE object is referenced.
BACnet devices supporting event enrollment objects are able to define any number of
unique conditions that trigger alarm or event notifications. Event objects can identify
their state from moment to moment as one of any number of unique event states.
Notifications are triggered by the transition of conditions for an object, typically from
one state to another. A transition to an event state can be used to identify specific or
unique handling for the notification generated by the object. The main purpose for
event enrollment objects is to define an event and provide a connection between the
occurrence of the event and the transmission of a notification message to one or more
recipients.
Algorithmic alarming features:
● Ability to monitor and alarm point objects on other devices (off-node) that do not
support intrinsic/algorithmic alarming.NOTICE! It is not recommended that you use
Event Enrollment for Off-node trending to another ALN level device.
● Algorithmic functions: floating limit and out of range for analog points, change of
state for binary or multi-state output points and command failure for binary or multistate points.
● Provides more than two alarm limits.
● Provides multiple alarm levels instead of just using a simple deadband to
determine the normal operational range.
● Automatically adjusts to setpoint changes at different times of the day.
● Can accommodate multiple environments where the temperature range is more
critical in some than others.
● Can associate custom alarm messages with the severity of the alarm. For example,
as the temperature in a data center moves further away from setpoint, the alarm
messages become more urgent and the messages are sent to more locations
(different notification classes are used).
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
231 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Intrinsic Alarming
Using Intrinsic Alarming
BACnet field panels support intrinsic alarming, which uses the BACnet notification
class object to incorporate alarm destinations within a single alarm message.
Adding an Intrinsic Alarm
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point system name
Enter name of point.
Instance number
Point name
Point type
Descriptor
Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time.
Number of decimal places
Number of decimal places
Access group(s)
Alarmable
Y
OFFNORMAL event enabled
Y
N
NORMAL event enabled
Y
N
FAULT event enabled
Y
N
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? e
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? a
>Point system name : Cooling Fan Switch----------->Instance Number : ------>Point name : Cooling Fan Switch----------->Point type : LAO-->Descriptor : --------------->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: F
>Number of decimal places : 5
>Engineering units : ------
232 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Intrinsic Alarming
>Access group(s) : --------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N) : Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Notification ID : 3----->Alarm Message number : 18>High limit : 76--------------->Low limit : 54--------------->Deadband : ----------------->TimeDelay (sec) : 3----->Field panel : ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: P
> FLN : 0-> Drop : 0-> Point : 3--->Actuator type : V
>Slope : .003255---------->Intercept : 0---------------->COV limit : .1--------------->Relinquish Default : 66---------------Command successful
Acknowledging Alarms
This procedure acknowledges an alarm. Points that require acknowledging are
specified in the database definition.
Acknowledging Alarms
HMI
P, A, A (Point, Alarm, Acknowledge)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Press ENTER.
For all points.
Type that point name.
For a particular point.
Type the point name including wildcards. For a range of points.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A point using a query. The system
list.
displays all points matching the criteria.
The system acknowledges an alarm for the specified points.
Example
16:48 07/17/2008
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
F
*A1*
NONE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
80.0 DEG
233 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Intrinsic Alarming
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>Setup, Mode, mEssage, Acknowledge, Quit? a
>Point name : LDO-POINT-----------------------------Acknowledged
16:48 07/17/2008
BLD990.AHU01.SAT (SUPPLY AIR TEMP)
F
*A1*
NONE
Last Acknowledged by TAS
80.0 DEG
>Setup, Mode, mEssage, Acknowledge, Quit? -
Status of a Point
When a point value is within the normal operating range, the status is NORMAL. When
viewing a report that displays point status, NORMAL displays as -N-. For example:
07/17/2008 THU
POINT LOG
REPORT
03:55pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990.AHU01.MAT:>
Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
Value/State
Status Prio
rity
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.MAT (MIXED AIR TEMP)
73.0 DEG F
NNONE
End of report
When a point value is outside of the normal operating range, the point status changes
to ALARM.
The ALARM status displays as *A* . For example:
07/17/2008 THU
POINT LOG
REPORT
03:55pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990.AHU01.MAT:>
Point name
:Suffix
(Description)
rity
234 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Value/State
User's Manual
Status
Prio
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Intrinsic Alarming
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.MAT (MIXED AIR TEMP)
54.0 DEG
F
*A*
NONE
End of report
Displaying an Intrinsic Alarm Report
HMI
P, E, L (Point, Edit, Look)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the exact point name you want to delete.
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
The POINT LOOK REPORT displays.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? e
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? l
>Point name : Cooling Fan Switch------------------------09/29/2009 TUE POINT LOOK REPORT 15:26
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <Cooling Fan Switch:>
Field
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name :
Cooling Fan Switch
Instance Number :
0 (BAC_130_AO_0)
Point name :
Cooling Fan Switch
Point type :
LAO
Descriptor :
Value :
66.0
Condition :
*F*
Priority :
NONE
Analog representation :
Float
Number of decimal places :
5
Engineering units :
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
235 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Intrinsic Alarming
Access group(s) :
Point enabled for
OFFNORMAL event :
NORMAL event :
FAULT event :
Notification ID :
Alarm Message number :
High alarm limit :
Low alarm limit :
Deadband :
TimeDelay (sec) :
Device Instance Number :
Point address :
HOA switch number :
Actuator type :
Slope :
Intercept :
COV limit :
Relinquish Default :
<all>
alarming
YES
YES
YES
3
18
76.0
54.0
0.0
3
130
130 0 00 03
Not defined
Voltage
0.003255
0.0
0.1
66.0
End of report
Removing an Intrinsic Alarm
HMI
P, E, D (Point, Edit, Delete)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the exact point name you want to delete.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Description
Type ?, and then type a number from the list.
A query. The system lists points at the
specified status.
Y, N
Verify that you want to delete the specified
point.
The system deletes the specified point.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? e
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? d
>Point name : Cooling Fan Switch----------->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Command successful
236 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Using Algorithmic Alarming
Adding Algorithmic Alarms
This procedure adds the information necessary for event enrollment alarming. Before
beginning, you should gather the following information:
● Reference point name
● Event enrollment name
● Alarm Message number
● Event type
Adding an Algorithmic Alarm
HMI
P, A, V, A (Point, Alarm, eVent)
Add, Remove, Look, Quit?
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel
Location of the EE object, blank means
the current location.
Event Enrollment Name
30 characters.
Event Enrollment Instance
7 digit maximum (0 to 4,194,303)
or leave blank.
Event Enrollment Description
16 characters maximum.
Report as Alarm
OFFNORMAL event enabled
NORMAL event enabled
FAULT event enabled
Y
Alarm
N
Event for Notify type.
Y
OFFNORMAL notification is enabled.
N
OFFNORMAL notification is disabled.
Y
NORMAL notification is enabled.
N
NORMAL notification is disabled.
Y
FAULT notification is enabled.
N
FAULT notification is disabled.
Notification ID
Specifies the instance of the notification
class object.
Alarm Message number
Specifies the number of the message
that needs to be displayed when the
object is in alarm.
Reference point name
Reference point (Point whose property is
monitored by this EE object).
Event Type
Query available (?),displays supported
event types for the reference point type.
Floating Limit
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
237 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
Setpoint reference
Setpoint name.
High diff limit
Offset from setpoint value to determine
the High Limit.
Low diff limit
Offset from setpoint value to determine
the low limit.
Deadband
Range between high limit and low limit
within which the reference point value
should be present to go to NORMAL
state.
TimeDelay (sec)
Time in seconds (0 to 4,194,303).
Out of Range
High limit
Low limit
Deadband
TimeDelay (sec)
Change of state
TimeDelay (sec)
Alarm value
value can be text also, values for which
point should be in alarm.
Add another alarm value (Y/N)
Y = Add another alarm value.
N=
Command Failure
TimeDelay (sec)
Feedback point name
30 characters, enumerated or Boolean
(Point whose value is used as a
feedback to reference point to determine
whether EE object is in OFFNORMAL or
NORMAL state).
Command successful displays.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>mEssage, Acknowledge, eVent, Quit? v
>Add, Remove, Look, Quit? a
>Point system name : Cooling Fan Switch----------->Instance Number : ------>Point name : Cooling Fan Switch----------->Point type : LAO-->Descriptor : --------------->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: F
>Number of decimal places : 5
>Engineering units : -----238 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
>Access group(s) : --------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N) : Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Notification ID : 3----->Alarm Message number : 18>High limit : 76--------------->Low limit : 54--------------->Deadband : ----------------->TimeDelay (sec) : 3----->Field panel : ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: P
> FLN : 0-> Drop : 0-> Point : 3--->Actuator type : V
>Slope : .003255---------->Intercept : 0---------------->COV limit : .1--------------->Relinquish Default : 66---------------Command successful
Acknowledging Algorithmic Alarms
Event state transitions that can be acknowledged are OFFNORMAL, NORMAL and
FAULT. The Event Enrollment Object is specified by Device Id and instance number.
You can acknowledge event notification from a local or remote field panel’s HMI.
HMI
P, A, V, A (Point, Alarm, eVent, Acknowledge)
Offnormal, Normal, Fault
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel
location of the EE object, blank means
the current location.
Instance
7 digit maximum (0 to 4,194,303)
or leave blank.
Acknowledged displays, if successful.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? a
>Offnormal, Normal, Fault : n
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
239 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
>Field panel : ------>Instance : 45----Acknowledged
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? 08:32 09-22-2009
BAC_660_EE_45 From: Normal To: Normal
Cooling Fan OFF -N- NONE
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? -
Displaying Algorithmic Alarms
Event enrollment objects can be displayed locally or remotely. Leaving the field panel
prompt blank will display all event enrollment objects on the network (excluding thirdparty devices).
HMI
P, A, V, D (Point, Alarm, eVent)
Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit?
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel
Location of the EE object, blank means
the entire network (excluding third-party
devices).
First Id
Use First Id and Last Id to specify a
range of instance numbers.
.Last Id
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
> Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? d
06/24/2009 WED EVENT ENROLLMENT REPORT 09:47
----------------------------------------------------------------------Device Instance Number : 111
Event Enrollment Name : hjsd
Event Enrollment Instance : 1
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Event
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : YES
NORMAL transitions : YES
240 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
FAULT transitions : YES
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC_111_BV_0
Event type : ChangeOfState
TimeDelay (sec) : 60
Alarm value : 1
Device Instance Number : 111
Event Enrollment Name : hajg
Event Enrollment Instance : 2
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Event
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : YES
NORMAL transitions : YES
FAULT transitions : YES
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC_111_BV_0
Event type : ChangeOfState
TimeDelay (sec) : 60
Alarm value : 1
Device Instance Number : 134
Event Enrollment Name : hagfg
Event Enrollment Instance : 0
Event Enrollment Description :
Notify Type : Alarm
Event state : Offnormal
OFFNORMAL transitions : YES : 08:55:27 06/22/2009 MON : ACKed
NORMAL transitions : YES
FAULT transitions : YES
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC_134_BV_0
Event type : ChangeOfState
TimeDelay (sec) : 0
Alarm value : 1
End of report
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
241 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
Displaying an Event Enrollment Log
Event Enrollment objects can be displayed locally or remotely. Leaving the field panel
prompt blank will display all event enrollment objects on the network (excluding thirdparty devices).
HMI
P, A, V, L (Point, Alarm, eVent, Log)
Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit?
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel
Location of the EE object, blank means
the entire network (excluding third-party
devices).
First Id
Use First Id and Last Id to specify a
range of instance numbers.
Last Id
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>mEssage, Acknowledge, eVent, Quit? v
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? l
>Field panel : ------>First Id : 45---->Last Id : 45----09/22/2009 TUE EVENT ENROLLMENT LOG 08:33
-----------------------------------------------------------------------<45 to 45>
Device Id
Instance Object Name Description Event state
-----------------------------------------------------------------------660
45 Cooling Fan Alarm (Change of State ) Normal
End of report
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? -
242 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Using Algorithmic Alarming
Displaying an Event Enrollment Report
HMI
P, A, V, L (Point, Alarm, eVent, Look)
Add, Remove, Look, Quit?
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel
Location of the EE object , blank means
the current location.
Instance
Only one instance number will be
allowed at a time, cannot be blank.
The system displays an Event Enrollment report.
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>mEssage, Acknowledge, eVent, Quit? v
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? e
>Add, Remove, Look, Quit? l
>Field panel : ------>Instance : 45-----
09/22/2009 TUE EVENT ENROLLMENT REPORT 08:33
------------------------------------------------------------------Device Instance Number : 660
Event Enrollment Name : Cooling Fan Alarm
Event Enrollment Instance : 45
Event Enrollment Description : Change of State
Notify Type : Alarm
Event state : Normal
OFFNORMAL transitions : YES
NORMAL transitions : YES
FAULT transitions : YES
Notification ID : 0
Alarm Message number : 0
Reference point name : BAC_660_BV_3
Event type : ChangeOfState
TimeDelay (sec) : 4
Alarm value : 1
End of report
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
243 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Alarm Counters
Removing Algorithmic Alarms
HMI
P, A, V, R (Point, Alarm, eVent, Remove)
Add, Remove, Look, Quit?
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Field panel
Location of the EE object , blank means
here.
First Id
First Id and Last Id will be used to
specify the range of instance numbers to
remove, cannot be blank.
Last Id
Example
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? p
>Log, Display, Command, Edit, Operation, Monitor, Alarm, Trend,
Quit? a
>Log, Display, Acknowledge, Edit, Quit? e
>Add, Remove, Look, Quit? r
>Field panel : ------>First Id : 45---->Last Id : 45----660 45
Command successful
>Add, Remove, Look, Quit? -
Alarm Counters
The field panel has a resident point; alarm count (ALMCNT). This point automatically
maintains a running tally of points in any alarm status. When a point enters ALARM,
the ALMCNT point is incremented by one. When the point returns to NORMAL,
ALMCNT is reduced by one.
● ALMCNT is automatically activated when a point is specified as alarmable.
● Acknowledging an alarm does not affect the value of the ALMCNT resident point.
ALMCNT maintains specific counts of points in the actual ALARM state.
NOTE:
ALMCNT is a resident point that is automatically maintained by the field panel.
Altering the point definition of this resident point may interfere with field panel
operations.
244 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Uploading Alarm Buffer History to the Workstation
Uploading Alarm Buffer History to the Workstation
Uploading alarm history to the TALON View workstation minimizes the loss of alarm
messages in the event of a communications loss between the field panel and the
Insight workstation.
Systems containing Firmware Revision 2.6 or later and Insight Revision 3.5.1 or later
support the Buffer and Send all Alarms feature.
Earlier firmware revisions do not buffer any alarm history.
Setting up Alarm Buffering
The Buffer and Send all Alarms feature can only be enabled or disabled from the
Insight workstation. For more information, see the Setting up Soft Controller book in
the Insight online help, which is accessed from the Insight Online Documentation
screen.
How Alarm Buffering Works at the Workstation
The workstation receives the current point status and alarm message first, followed by
a sequence of alarm messages. The method for acknowledging alarm messages does
not change.
Buffer and Send all Alarms to the Workstation
The Buffer and Send all Alarms feature captures up to ten messages per alarmable
point to ensure that the earliest alarm history is sent to the Insight workstation. All
buffered alarm messages include the point value and point status.
● When the workstation is online, messages are continuously buffered and uploaded.
● When the workstation is offline, it is estimated that this feature will accommodate
typical system operations during several hours of network outage.
Due to memory requirements, the Buffer and Send all Alarms feature limits the number
of points that can be configured on a field panel. The limits are determined by the
individual network configuration.
CAUTION
Whenever Buffer and Send all Alarms is enabled or disabled,
The field panel coldstarts and reloads the database
●
●
The system allocates a buffer for each alarmable point as soon as alarm buffering
is enabled.
The default buffer size is automatically set in the firmware during startup.
What Messages are Sent to the Workstation
The following messages are buffered for delivery only to the workstation main mass
storage device (MSD):
● The initial alarm message
● Intermediate alarm messages
● Every alarm COV
● Every return to normal COV
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
245 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 6—Alarm Management
Uploading Alarm Buffer History to the Workstation
How Alarm Buffering Works at the Field Panel
Each time a point goes into alarm, the history buffer records the point’s current alarm
status, point value, and time of occurrence.
When an alarm is communicated, the current point status and alarm message, plus up
to ten buffered messages for each alarmable point, are sent to the workstation.
● Buffer size is limited to ten alarms per alarmable point.
● The buffer stops collecting data when it reaches its limit.
If the Alarm Buffer is Full
When the buffer is full, alarm buffering operates as follows:
● The oldest alarms are preserved in the alarm buffer.
● New alarm messages are discarded until the buffer for that point is uploaded to the
workstation.
● New alarm messages are collected once the system clears the buffer.
If Network Status Prevents the Alarm Message from Being Sent
The following occurs if an alarm message cannot be immediately sent due to network
traffic or a network disconnect:
1. The system immediately begins buffering messages for the points in alarm.
–
–
Up to ten alarm messages per point are stored in the buffer.
Buffered alarm messages are available only for the main MSD.
2. When the network is available, alarm messages are sent to the MSD in time
sequence per point (first-in-first-out).
246 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 7—License Management
License Manager
Chapter 7—License Management
License Manager
License Manager adds applications or functionality to a field panel without the need to
replace the hardware or perform a firmware flash. Field panels with Firmware Revision
3.1 or later support the License Management attribute.
Contact your Siemens Solution Partner, Authorized TALON Dealer for more
information on applications and functionality that can be activated through License
Manager.
License Manager Definitions
●
●
●
A feature is an application or additional functionality that can be added to a field
panel without the need to replace the hardware. Some features require a firmware
flash.
A license is the code provided by Siemens Industry to unlock a feature.
The ID_STRING is a unique identifier that distinguishes an individual piece of
hardware. It is composed of the panel's part number, revision, year and week of
manufacture, and serial number. Therefore, a license for one field panel will not
work on another field panel.
How does License Manager Work?
Field panels can either be ordered with licensed features and functionality pre-loaded,
for example, FLN support, or upgraded to add special features, for example, TX-I/O
island bus support.
NOTE:
The installation of some features and licenses require that the field panel be
coldstarted, while others do not.
Any or all of the licensed features can be activated at any time using licenses acquired
from Siemens.
When the field panel is powered, the firmware reviews the inventory of installed
features, comparing that list to the License Vault, where all installed licenses are
stored. Every feature with a corresponding license is initiated and run. Because
licenses are loaded into non-volatile memory, powering down the field panel will not
erase them.
Ordering and Installing Licenses
In order for the desired functionality features to operate, a license for each feature
must be ordered and installed. Contact your branch representative to order the
license(s). To install each license, you must have the feature name for each feature
being added, and the device ID_STRING for each device to which the feature is being
added, and the Purchase Order (PO) number.
After ordering a feature that will be enabled using License Manager, contact your
Siemens Solution Partner, Authorized TALON Dealer to have them verify the order and
generate the license for the licensed feature. The resulting license will be emailed to
you.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
247 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 7—License Management
Displaying the License Manager Report
Displaying the License Manager Report
The field panel ID_String is required to generate a license. The field panel’s ID_String
is a unique device-specific identifier that is "burned" into the field panel’s non-volatile
memory.
Use this procedure to:
● Display the field panel ID_String
● Verify that features are installed
● Verify that licenses are installed
HMI
S, H, L, D, S (System, Hardware, Licensemanager, Display, Singlenode)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Here, Print
H, P
Specify to display report.
The system displays a License Manager report.
● If the feature is not listed (following the Application Name field), it is neither
installed nor licensed.
● If Tasks Attached = 1or higher, the feature is installed.
● If Tasks Attached = 0, the feature is not installed.
Example
NOTE:
The following example report has been truncated.
248 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 7—License Management
Installing a License
Figure 3: License Manager Report Example.
Installing a License
Once you have the licenses, place each one separately into a file with a .lic extension
(for TALON View software), or type the licenses directly from the HMI using the
following method.
NOTE:
The HyperTerminal or DOS window you use to connect to the field panel must be
wide enough to accommodate the entire license entry line.
NOTE:
Licenses must be typed exactly as they appear. Make sure to type all spaces as they
occur, and extend the entry to several lines to fit the entire license as described in the
following procedure.
Installing a License for a Licensed Feature
HMI
S, H, L, A (System, Hardware, Licensemanager, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
License
Begin typing the license number.
Stop typing before the end of the line.
Press ENTER.
License prompt displays.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
249 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 7—License Management
Removing Licenses
Continue typing the license.
Repeat until the entire license number is
entered.
Press ENTER.
Blank line indicates the end of text entry.
The following text is displayed for a
successful license entry:
License 1 accepted
Licenses received 1, Licenses
accepted 1, Licenses rejected 0
Log, Display, Add, dElete,
Removall, Quit? -
A
To add more licenses.
Removing Licenses
Removing the license will disable the associated feature and, in certain cases cause a
coldstart of the panel.
Removing the License Associated with a Licensed Feature
HMI
S, H, L, E (System, Hardware, Licensemanager, dElete)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
License
Type the name of the license you wish to
remove.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Command Successful displays. The license is removed.
Example
>License
: TXIO------------------------>Are you sure (Y/N)
: y
>Log, Display, Add, dElete, Removall, Quit? –
Command successful
250 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Background Information
Chapter 8—Trending
Background Information
Trending is a function that records point data over time. Each field panel can trend
points. The records created by each trend log object can be set to start and stop at
specific times. The TALON View workstation can also be notified to upload the log
records when the internal trend log buffer reaches a specified percent of its capacity.
When a point is defined for trending, the trend definition and data are stored as a
BACnet trend log object in the field panel that owns the point (local trending), or in a
different field panel of the user's choosing (remote trending - the point and the trend log
object are in separate devices).
See Using BACnet Trend in this chapter for information on using the BACnet Trend
features.
Why Trend HVAC Devices?
HVAC devices are trended to:
● Keep a historical record of a point over time
● Track system operating conditions
● Track energy consumption
● Track device run-time schedules
● Assist in designing maintenance and service schedules
● Assist with loop tuning
● Assist with troubleshooting
What Devices Can be Trended?
Commonly trended devices include:
● Boiler and chiller temperature sensors
● Outside air temperature sensors
● Outside humidity sensors
● Discharge air temperature sensors
● Flow sensors
● Proof points
Using BACnet Trend
TALON BACnet Trend has been designed to match the existing Trend functions as
closely as possible. The Trend feature changes between TALON and BACnet are
explained in the following sections.
Firmware Revision 3.1 or later field panels can store BACnet Trend Log Objects for:
● their own logical points (local trending), and
● points owned by devices that do not support the BACnet Trend Log Object (remote
trending).
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
251 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Using BACnet Trend
Local Trending
Local trending stores the trend log object at the field panel that owns the logical point
object (the point and the trend log object are in the same device).
Remote Trending
Remote trending can store the trend log object in any field panel on the network (the
point being trended and the trend log object are in separate devices). This feature was
designed so that the field panel can trend the points of BACnet devices connected
through an MS/TP FLN—such as BACnet TECs or third-party devices—that cannot
store their own trend log objects.
NOTE:
BACnet TEC subpoints are "owned" by the BACnet TECs that contain them.
However, because BACnet TECs cannot store trend log objects, all trending of their
points must be remote—the trend log object must be assigned to and stored in a
specified field panel.
TALON BACnet revision 3.1 and later support both local and remote trending.
NOTE:
While Firmware Revision 3.1 will allow remote trending across an MS/TP ALN, this
will increase MS/TP ALN network traffic and can affect network speed.
Trend Log Enable/Disable
Trend Log Enable/Disable is a BACnet feature that replaces TALON Conditional
Trending. This feature allows trend sampling to start and stop based on user selected
constraints. If trend start/stop times are not specified during trend set-up, the trend
point behaves in the traditional manner—always trending. Trend Log Enable/Disable
allows you to troubleshoot the system by filtering records to relevant data only.
BACnet Trend Log Buffer
BACnet Trend Log objects have an internal, fixed size buffer, which fills as log records
are added. When the buffer becomes full, one of two things happens. If you selected
‘Stop when Full’ when you created the object, trending stops until you reset the buffer
to zero. Otherwise, the oldest record is overwritten when a new record is added.
Trend Log Buffer Reset
The trend log object buffer can be reset to zero using the Reset command.
CAUTION
Resetting a trend log object clears all records in the trend log buffer for that object.
All trend data not backed up to the TALON View workstation is lost.
252 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Using BACnet Trend
Trend Log Buffer Notification Threshold
Trend log objects also contain a notification threshold, which is used to trigger trend
data collection from Insight. The notification threshold is set when you create a trend
log object. The default value is eighty percent of the maximum number of samples
(also set when you create the trend log object). The maximum number of samples
cannot exceed 100 for points with multiple trends.
Unresolved Points
A point is considered unresolved if the name is used in an application (most commonly
PPCL), but not found on the network. A trend log will display points as unresolved until
they are discovered. If points remain unresolved, the name was entered incorrectly, or
there is a break in the MS/TP ALN network.
Resetting the Trend Log Buffer for A Trend Record
To disable logging of a trend record, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, T, I (Point, Trend, dIsable)
Prompt / Field
Option / Entry
Description
Point name
Type that point name or device instance
number
A particular point
Type ?, and then type a number from the A point using a query. The system
list
displays all points matching the criteria.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list
Trend records for the point are
displayed.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type the number of the trend record you
want to disable
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Disable the trend record.
N
Do not disable the trend record.
Trend log disabled is displayed. The trend record is disabled.
Trending Best Practices
To reduce network traffic, improve accuracy, and avoid losing the data link, follow
these guidelines:
● Whenever possible, FLN devices should be defined in the panel that is physically
routing to that MS/TP segment.
● For FLN points, try to keep the trend log object in the panel that is physically
routing to that MS/TP segment (accept the default trend storage location
suggested by the system).
● For ALN points, try to keep the trend log object in the panel that owns the point
being trended (accept the default trend storage location suggested by the system).
● Do not define a trend to a point that is in a panel on a different ALN.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
253 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Using BACnet Trend
BACnet Trending and Third-Party Device Limitations
With Firmware Revision 3.1, trend log objects in third-party devices are subject to the
following limitations:
● Firmware Revision 3.1 does not allow you to create, modify, or delete trend log
objects in third-party devices. This means you cannot use the Add, Copy to,
Modify, or Delete trend operations when handling trend log objects in a third-party
device. Other trend operations, including Copy from, are supported.
● To perform trend operations other than Add, Copy to, Modify, or Delete upon trend
log objects in third-party devices (such as Copy from, Enable/Disable, Reset,
Display, Look, and Log) you must use the BACnet encoded name of the trend log
object (BAC_<DeviceInstance>_TL_<ObjectInstance>). The system will not
recognize regular point names of trend log objects in third-party devices.
Off-Node Trending
TALON BACnet Revision 3.1 and later supports both on-node and off-node object
trending.
Off-node trending allows a field panel to keep the trend log for a point that is owned by
another BACnet device. This feature was designed to allow a field panel to trend
objects in devices connected to the field panel through an MS/TP FLN. It can also
trend objects in devices across an MS/TP ALN.
NOTE:
Off-node trending across an MS/TP ALN to another ALN level device is not
recommended and will increase network traffic.
In order to trend an off-node point, the local (operator) field panel needs:
● the point name
● the device ID of the trending field panel
See Figure. Location of point and trend log for Off-node trend.
254 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Using BACnet Trend
Figure 4: Figure. Location of point and trend log for Off-node trend.
Unresolved Points In Off-Node Trend Logs
A point is considered unresolved if the name is used in an application (most commonly
PPCL), but not found on the network. An off-node trend log will display points as
unresolved until they are discovered across the network. If points remain unresolved,
the name was entered incorrectly, or there is a break in the MS/TP ALN network.
In the following example:
● tec1:ROOM TEMP shows as unresolved (by ‘U’ at the end of the Point system
name value)
● the trending field panel is identified as the local (operator) field panel by a blank
entry.
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look,
>Offnode Trend (Y/N)
:
>Field panel
:
>Point name
:
------------> 1) Point COV
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Quit? l
y
------tec1:ROOM TEMP---------------5 Samples
1-
01/03/2006 TUE
TREND EDIT LOOK
REPORT
23:33
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <tec1:ROOM TEMP>
Field
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Value
User's Manual
255 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending Diagram
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name
: tec1:ROOM TEMP
(BAC_11_??_4194303) U
Maximum number of samples
: 5
Record every
: Point COV
Instance Number
: 0 (BAC_11_TL_0)
Trend log name
: APO_11_TL_0
Trend log description
:
Start time
: (no start time specified)
Stop time
: (no stop time specified)
Trend log enabled
: Y
Stop when full
: N
Notification threshold count : 4 (80%)
Notification class number
: 0
Event Enable, to-Normal
: Y
Event state
: NORMAL
Total samples recorded
: 0
Current samples
: 0
Last notification time
: (no notifications issued)
Last record at notification
: 0
Records since notification
: 0
End of report
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Trending Diagram
Figure 5: Point Ownership and Trend Log Object Support - BACnet 3.1 with MS/TP FLNs
256 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
Three reports or logs are possible: the Trend Log report (a report showing point(s)
being trended with some general information about the trend(s); the Trend Data report
which displays trend data values; and the Trend Edit Look report which shows the
specific configured parameters of a trend definition.
Displaying a Trend Log Report
In order to display trend points, the field panel should have one or more points
assigned to trending. If no trend points are assigned, then this report is blank.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
To display a Trend Log report, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, T, L (Point, Trend, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Press ENTER.
To specify all trends across the network.
The system displays the Trend Log
report.
Type the point name.
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
To search within a range.
CAUTION: When wildcards are used to
specify a point range for multi-point trend
deletion, the deletion occurs globally
across the network on every point
matching the description.
Specify a point range using wildcards.
For multi point trend deletion.
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
User's Manual
257 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
The system skips this step if the point
name was entered manually at the Point
name prompt.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
The system displays the Trend Log report.
Example
07/24/2008 THU TREND LOG REPORT 13:48
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <btec*:*>
Point Name:Suffix (Description)
Point Trend Log Record Max Pct Logging
Encoded Name Encoded Name Every Samples Full Enabled
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BTEC1:CTL TEMP
BAC_21_AO_78 BAC_7020_TL_2 Point COV 100 79% Y
BAC_21_AO_78 BAC_7020_TL_6 1 Hours 100 4% Y
BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
BAC_21_AI_4 BAC_7020_TL_0 Point COV 5 100% Y
BTEC2:CTL TEMP
BAC_22_AO_78 BAC_7020_TL_3 Point COV 100 10% Y
BAC_22_AO_78 BAC_7020_TL_7 1 Hours 100 7% Y
BTEC2:ROOM TEMP
BAC_22_AI_4 BAC_7020_TL_1 Point COV 5 100% Y
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? –
Displaying a Trend Data Report
The Trend Data report can be performed for a single trended point or multiple (up to
six) trended points.
To perform this procedure, the field panel should already have points being trended.
The amount of data in the report depends on the time and change in value
experienced by the point, and the number of samples collected.
In addition to point values, a single point trend data report includes the Normal/Fail
status of the point. A multiple point trend data report does not include the Normal/Fail
status of the points.
258 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
To display a Trend Data report, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, T, D (Point, Trend, Display)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
Point name
Type the point name.
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
To search within a range.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
The system returns to the Specify Field
Panel (Y/N) prompt and the pattern
repeats.
You can enter up to six points on a
single report. The point name prompts
are numbered to match the number of
points selected for the report. When you
are done entering points, ignore the
Specify Field Panel (Y/N) prompt and
press ENTER.
Start date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter the start date.
Start time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter the start time.
Display in Hours, Minutes
H or M
Hours between displayed lines or
Minutes between displayed lines
Enter the desired number of hours or
minutes.
Here, Print
H, P
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Specify to display report.
User's Manual
259 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
The system displays a Trend Data report.
Example
Trend Single Data report
>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
>Field panel : 7010-->1) Point name : ?-----------------------------------------> 1) TEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 2) TEC2:ROOM TEMP
> 3) TEC2:CTL TEMP
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 2> 1) Point COV 100 Samples
> 2) 1 Hours 100 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 2>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : >Start date (MM/DD/YYYY) : ---------->Start time (HH:MM:SS) : 12:00:00-->Here, Printer : H
07/24/2008 THU TREND SINGLE DATA REPORT 15:03
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Point name: <TEC2:ROOM TEMP> () (APO_7010_TL_4)
Start time <07/24/2008, 12:00:00>
1 Hours between displayed lines
Time Value State
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Entries for: 07/24/2008
12:00:00 76.25 DEG F -N13:00:00 76.0 DEG F -N14:00:00 76.0 DEG F -N15:00:00 76.25 DEG F -NEnd of report
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? Trend Multi Data report
>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
>Field panel : 7020-->1) Point name : ?-----------------------------------------> 1) BTEC1:CTL TEMP
> 2) BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 3) BTEC2:CTL TEMP
> 4) BTEC2:ROOM TEMP
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 2> 1) Point COV 5 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
260 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
>Field panel : 7020-->2) Next point name : ?----------------------------------------> 1) BTEC1:CTL TEMP
> 2) BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 3) BTEC2:CTL TEMP
> 4) BTEC2:ROOM TEMP
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 4> 1) Point COV 5 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : >Start date (MM/DD/YYYY) : ---------->Start time (HH:MM:SS) : 12:00:00-->Display in Hours, Minutes : h
>Hours between displayed lines : 1--->Here, Printer : H
07/24/2008 THU TREND MULTI DATA REPORT 15:09
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Start time <07/24/2008, 12:00:00>
< 1 Hours> between displayed lines
Column Name (Description)
Trigger Name (Description) Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------P1-- BTEC1:ROOM TEMP () (APO_7020_TL_0)
--P2-- BTEC2:ROOM TEMP () (APO_7020_TL_1)
---P1--- ---P2--- ---P3--- ---P4--- ---P5--- ---P6--Time DEG F DEG F
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Entries for: 07/24/2008
12:00:00 81.25 74.25
13:00:00 81.0 74.5
14:00:00 81.0 74.25
15:00:00 81.25 74.5
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? -
Displaying a Trend Edit Look Report
The Trend Edit Look report shows the configured parameters of a trend definition.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
261 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
To display a Trend Edit Look report, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, T, E, L (Point, Trend, Edit, Look)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
Point name
Type the point name.
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
To search within a range.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
The system displays the Trend Edit Look report.
Example
>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : n
>Point name : ?-----------------------------------------> 1) TEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 2) TEC2:ROOM TEMP
> 3) TEC2:CTL TEMP
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1> 1) Point COV 100 Samples
> 2) 1 Hours 100 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 207/24/2008 THU TREND EDIT LOOK REPORT 13:19
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <TEC1:ROOM TEMP>
Field Value
262 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Generating Trending Logs and Reports
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name : TEC1:ROOM TEMP (BAC_7010_AI_10104)
Maximum number of samples : 100
Record every : 1 Hours
Instance Number : 3 (BAC_7010_TL_3)
Trend log name : APO_7010_TL_3
Trend log description :
Start time : (no start time specified)
Stop time : (no stop time specified)
Trend log enabled : Y
Stop when full : N
Notification threshold count : 80 (80%)
Notification class number : 0
Event Enable, to-Normal : Y
Event state : NORMAL
Total samples recorded : 54
Current samples : 4
Last notification time : (no notifications issued)
Last record at notification : 0
Records since notification : 4
End of report
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
The following example shows BACnet/IP trend points:
>Point name
: oat--------------------------------------> 1)
1 Minutes
100 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 104/17/2006 MON
TREND EDIT LOOK
REPORT
01:56
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <OAT:>
Field
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name
: oat
Maximum number of samples
: 100
Record every
:
1 Minutes
Instance Number
: 3 (BAC_9005_TL_3)
Trend log name
: oat_tr1
Trend log description
:
Start time
: (no start time specified)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
263 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending a Point by Change of Value (COV)
Stop time
Trend log enabled
Stop when full
Notification threshold count
Notification class number
Event Enable, to-Normal
Event state
Total samples recorded
Current samples
Last notification time
Last record at notification
Records since notification
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
(no stop time specified)
Y
N
80 (80%)
0
Y
NORMAL
14
14
(no notifications issued)
0
14
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Trending a Point by Change of Value (COV)
This procedure adds a point to trending and records data by change of value (COV).
Before you start this procedure, determine the points to trend, as well as the maximum
number of samples.
CAUTION
When wildcards are used, the trend operation executes globally across the network
on every point matching the description.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
To trend a point by COV, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, T, E, A (Point, Trend, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the point name.
Description
Type ?, and then type the point name
with wildcard(s).
264 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
To query available points.
NOTE: For ALN points only, type ?.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list.
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending a Point by Change of Value (COV)
Specify a point range using wildcards.
To select multiple points for the same
trend
CAUTION: When wildcards are used for
multi point trend addition, the trend add
operation occurs globally across the
network on every point matching the
description.
NOTE: If you select a multi point trend,
you must verify that you want to perform
a multi-point trend by typing Y (Yes) at
the Multi point trend. Are you sure (Y/N)
prompt.
COV, Time
C
Maximum number of samples
Specify the maximum number of
samples you want collected.
NOTE: If trending a point by multiple
intervals, the maximum number of
samples per trend type is 100; if trending
a point by one interval, the maximum
number of samples is 2,500. If you
exceed the maximum number of
samples, the prompt is displayed again.
Trend log instance number
Type a BACnet object instance number
from 0 through 4194303.
Press ENTER to automatically assign
the next available instance number to
this trend log object.
Trend log name
Type a name for the trend log
.
Press ENTER to automatically assign a
name in the following format:
APO_<DeviceInstance>_TL_<ObjectInst
ance>.
Trend log description
Type a description for the trend log.
Enable start date/time (Y/N)
Y
To set a starting date and time for this
trend and then continue with next step.
N
To start the trend immediately and then
proceed to the Enable stop date/time
(Y/N) prompt.
Start date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter a starting date for this trend in the
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Start time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter a starting time for this trend in the
HH:MM:SS format.
Enable stop date/time (Y/N)
Y
To set an ending date and time for this
trend, continue with the Stop date
(MM/DD/YYYY) prompt.
N
To let the trend run continuously after
the starting date/time and then proceed
to Notification threshold count prompt.
Stop date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter an ending date for this trend in the
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Stop time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter an ending time for this trend in the
HH:MM:SS format.
Trend log enabled (Y/N)
Y
Enable trend log.
N
Disable trend log.
Y
To stop trending once the maximum
number of samples is reached.
Stop when full (Y/N)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
265 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending a Point by Change of Value (COV)
N
To continue trending after the log is full
by writing over existing trend samples.
Notification threshold count
Type a value between 1 and the
maximum number of samples for this
trend.
Press ENTER to accept the default (80
percent of the maximum number of
samples).
Notification class number
Type a value from 0 through 4194302
or press ENTER to accept the default
(0).
Specify the field panel that will receive
the notification threshold alarm
NOTE: The Notification Class number
must be assigned to a field panel.
Field panel
Press ENTER.
Accept the field panel name supplied by
the system
Type a different field panel name
Specify the name of the field panel that
will store the trend log object
NOTE: The default field panel location
is the field panel that owns the point (or
FLN of the device subpoint) to which you
are adding the trend.
The message <Point Name> is now trending by Change-Of-Value
successfully in field panel <field panel name> displays.
Example
>Point name : ? btec1:*---------------------------------> 1) BTEC1:CTLR ADDRESS
> 2) BTEC1:APPLICATION
> 3) BTEC1:RMTMP OFFSET
> 4) BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 5) BTEC1:HEAT.COOL
> 6) BTEC1:DAY CLG STPT
> 7) BTEC1:DAY HTG STPT
> 8) BTEC1:NGT CLG STPT
> 9) BTEC1:NGT HTG STPT
> 10) BTEC1:RM STPT MIN
> 11) BTEC1:RM STPT MAX
> 12) BTEC1:RM STPT DIAL
> 13) BTEC1:STPT DIAL
> 14) BTEC1:AUX TEMP AI3
> 15) BTEC1:FLOW START
> 16) BTEC1:FLOW END
> 17) BTEC1:WALL SWITCH
> 18) BTEC1:DI OVRD SW
> 19) BTEC1:OVRD TIME
> 20) BTEC1:NGT OVRD
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 4>Cov, Time : c
>Maximum number of samples : --->Trend log instance number : 123--->Trend log name : abc--------------------------266 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
>Trend log description : def------------>Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 4----->Notification class number : 0----->Field panel : 7020--BTEC1:ROOM TEMP is now trending by Change-Of-Value successfully
in Field panel <7020>
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Example - multi-point trend add
>Point name : btec*:room temp--------------------------->Multi point trend. Are you sure (Y/N): y
>Cov, Time : c
>Maximum number of samples : -->Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 4----->Notification class number : 0-----BTEC1:ROOM TEMP is now trending by Change-Of-Value successfully
in Field panel <7020>
BTEC2:ROOM TEMP is now trending by Change-Of-Value successfully
in Field panel <7020>
End of commanding
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Trend Procedures
Modifying a Trend
Trend definitions can be modified after having been created, if desired.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
Modifying a Trend Definition
HMI
P, T, E, M (Point, Trend, Edit, Modify)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
267 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Specify Source Field Panel (Y/N)
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
NOTE: Pressing ENTER without
specifying a field panel defaults to the
local panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
Point name
Type the point name.
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>
To search within a range.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
Specify the maximum number of
samples you want collected.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Are you sure (Y/N)
NOTE: If trending a point by multiple
intervals, the maximum number of
samples per trend type is 100; if trending
a point by one interval, the maximum
number of samples is 2,500. If you
exceed the maximum number of
samples, the prompt is displayed again.
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Modify (or accept as is) the trend
definition parameters as desired,
pressing ENTER after each one.
The system displays the first of several
trend definition parameters.
Y
To accept changes and modify the trend.
The system warns that all current data
for selected trend(s) will be lost.
Example
>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
>Field panel : 7020-->Point name : ?-----------------------------------------> 1) BTEC1:CTL TEMP
> 2) BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 3) BTEC2:CTL TEMP
> 4) BTEC2:ROOM TEMP
268 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1> 1) 1 Hours 5 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Cov, Time : t
Maximum number of samples : 100>Trend in Hours, Minutes : m
>Minutes between samples : 10>Trend log description : --------------->Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 80---->Notification class number : 0----->All current data for selected trend(s) will be lost. Are you
sure (Y/N): y
BTEC1:CTL TEMP is now trending every 10 Minutes successfully in
Field panel <7020>
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Deleting Trend Log Objects
Trend delete can be performed on single or wildcarded points.
CAUTION
When wildcards are used, the trend operation executes globally across the network
on every point matching the description.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
Deleting Trend Log Object
HMI
P, T, E, D (Point, Trend, Edit, Delete)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the point name.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Description
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
To search within a range.
CAUTION: When wildcards are used to
specify a point range for multi-point trend
deletion, the deletion occurs globally
across the network on every point
matching the description.
Specify a point range using wildcards.
For multi point trend deletion.
User's Manual
269 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
The system skips this step if the point
name was entered manually at the Point
name prompt.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
To delete trending.
Trending deleted for <pointname> displays.
Example
>Point name : ? BTEC*:*--------------------------------->Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : Y
>Field panel : 7020--> 1) BTEC1:CTL TEMP
> 2) BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
> 3) BTEC2:CTL TEMP
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 2> 1) Point COV 100 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Are you sure (Y/N) : Y
Trending deleted for BTEC1:ROOM TEMP (by Change-Of-Value)
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Disabling Trend Logging
When you disable a trend, the trend definition and trend data (if any) is retained, but
you are not collecting new trend data from the point. Trend disable can be performed
on single or wildcarded points.
270 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
CAUTION
When wildcards are used, the trend operation executes globally across the network
on every point matching the description.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
Disabling Trend Logging
HMI
P, T, I (Point, Trend, dIsable)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the point name.
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Description
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
To search within a range.
CAUTION: When wildcards are used to
specify a point range for multi-point trend
deletion, the deletion occurs globally
across the network on every point
matching the description.
Specify a point range using wildcards.
For multi point trend deletion.
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
User's Manual
271 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
The system skips this step if the point
name was entered manually at the Point
name prompt.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
To disable trending.
Trend log disabled for <pointname> displays.
Example
>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : n
> 1) Point COV 100 Samples
> 2) 1 Hours 100 Samples
> 3) > > All trends < <
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Trend log disabled for TEC1:ROOM TEMP (by Change-Of-Value)
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? Example - Multi-Trend Disable
>Point name : btec*:room temp--------------------------->Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Trend log disabled for BTEC1:ROOM TEMP
Trend log disabled for BTEC2:ROOM TEMP
End of commanding
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? -
Enabling Trend Logging
Use trend enable to start collecting trend data for a previously disabled trend log
object.
Trend enable can be performed on single or wildcarded points.
CAUTION
When wildcards are used, the trend operation executes globally across the network
on every point matching the description.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
272 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Enabling Trend Logging
HMI
P, T, N (Point, Trend, eNable)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the point name.
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
To search within a range.
CAUTION: When wildcards are used to
specify a point range for multi-point trend
deletion, the deletion occurs globally
across the network on every point
matching the description.
Specify a point range using wildcards.
For multi point trend deletion.
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
The system skips this step if the point
name was entered manually at the Point
name prompt.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
To enable trending.
Trend log enabled for <pointname> displays.
Example
>Point name : btec2:ctl temp---------------------------->Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
>Field panel : ------> 1) Point COV 100 Samples
> 2) 1 Hours 100 Samples
> 3) > > All trends < <
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
273 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 2>Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Trend log enabled for BTEC2:CTL TEMP (every 1 Hours)
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? -
Resetting the Trend Buffer
Resetting the trend buffer clears the stored trend data at the field panel. Trend reset
can be performed on single or wildcarded points.
NOTE:
To save the trend buffer data before a reset, upload the trend data to the mass
storage device.
CAUTION
When wildcards are used, the trend operation executes globally across the network
on every point matching the description.
Resetting Trend Buffer
HMI
P, T, R (Point, Trend, Reset)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Point name
Type the point name.
Description
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*.>
To search within a range.
Specify a point range using wildcards.
For multi point trend deletion
CAUTION: When wildcards are used to
specify a point range for multi-point trend
deletion, the deletion occurs globally
across the network on every point
matching the description.
Specify Field Panel (Y/N)
274 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Are you sure (Y/N)
Y
The system skips this step if the point
name was entered manually at the Point
name prompt.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
To reset trend buffer.
Trend buffer reset for <pointname> displays.
Example
>Point name : btec1:ctl temp---------------------------->Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
>Field panel : 7020--> 1) 10 Minutes 100 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Are you sure (Y/N) : y
Trend buffer reset for BTEC1:CTL TEMP (every 10 Minutes)
>Log, Display, Edit, eNable, dIsable, Reset, Quit? -
Copying a Trend
Copying a trend allows you to establish a trend definition that is similar to the copied
trend.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
Applying an Existing Trend Definition to Another Point
HMI
P, T, E, C (Point, Trend, Edit, Copy)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Specify Source Field Panel (Y/N)
Y, and then type the field panel device
instance number.
To filter for both locally and remotely
trended points residing in a specific field
panel.
NOTE: Pressing ENTER without
specifying a field panel defaults to the
local panel.
N
To filter for locally trended points only,
residing in any field panel on the
network.
Copy from point name
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Type the point name.
User's Manual
275 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trend Procedures
Type ? and then press ENTER.
To query the database for trended
points. Displays the first 20 trended
points.
Type ?, a space, and then a point range
using wildcards <? BTEC*:*>.
To query the database for trended points
within a point range.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list and
press ENTER.
NOTE: If you manually entered a point
name at the Point name prompt, and the
system reprompts it, then one of three
conditions exists: there are no trends for
the point in the specified field panel; the
point name (and/or the field panel device
instance number, if specified) does not
exist or was entered incorrectly; the
trend log object is trending remotely but
N was typed at the Specify Field Panel
(Y/N) prompt.
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
Type a number from the list of point
trends.
Copy to point name
Type the point name.
Type ?, a space, and then the point
range using wildcards.
To query for points within a point range.
Type ? and then press ENTER.
To query for ALN points only.
Trend log instance number
Specify the instance number.
Trend log name
Specify a trend log name.
Trend Log description
Specify a description.
Field panel
Press ENTER.
Accept the field panel name supplied by
the system.
Type a different field panel name.
Specify the name of the field panel that
will store the trend log object
NOTE: The default field panel location
is the field panel that owns the point (or
FLN of the device subpoint) to which you
are adding the trend.
The message <pointname> is now trending by <trend type> displays.
Example
The following example shows how to copy a BACnet/IP trend definition:
>Copy from point name
: oat--------------------------------------> 1)
1 Minutes
100 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Copy to point name
: matemp----------------------------------->Trend log instance number
: ------276 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending a Point by Time Interval
>Trend log name
>Trend log description
matemp is now trending every
: -----------------------------: ---------------1 Minutes
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Trending a Point by Time Interval
This procedure adds a point to trending and records data by time interval. Before you
start this procedure, determine the points to trend, as well as the number and
frequency of the samples. See Time Sampling Guidelines in this section for more
information.
CAUTION
When wildcards are used, the trend operation executes globally across the network
on every point matching the description.
NOTE:
See Using BACnet Trend [➙ 251] in this chapter for more information about trending,
including remote trending and third-party device limitations.
Trending a Point by Time Interval
HMI
P, T, E, A (Point, Trend, Edit, Add)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Point name
Type the point name.
Type ?, and then type the point name
with wildcard(s).
To query available points.
NOTE: For ALN points only, type ?.
NOTE: Queries return up to 20 items in
a list. If the item (point name/trend) you
want is not in the list, press ENTER
again to display the next 20 items. When
you see your item, type the
corresponding number from the list.
Specify a point range using wildcards.
To select multiple points for the same
trend.
CAUTION: When wildcards are used for
multi point trend addition, the trend add
operation occurs globally across the
network on every point matching the
description.
NOTE: If you select a multi point trend,
you must verify that you want to perform
a multi-point trend by typing Y (Yes) at
the Multi point trend. Are you sure (Y/N)
prompt.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
277 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending a Point by Time Interval
COV, Time
T
Maximum number of samples
Specify the maximum number of
samples you want collected.
Trend in hours, Minutes
H or M
Hours between samples or Minutes
between samples
Enter the number of hours or minutes
between trend samples.
Trend log instance number
Type a BACnet object instance number
from 0 through 4194303.
Press ENTER to automatically assign
the next available instance number to
this trend log object.
Trend log name
Type a name for the trend log.
Press ENTER to automatically assign a
name in the following format:
APO_<DeviceInstance>_TL_<ObjectInst
ance>.
Trend log description
Type a description for the trend log.
Enable start date/time (Y/N)
Y
To set a starting date and time for this
trend and then continue with the next
step.
N
To start the trend immediately and then
proceed to the Enable stop date/time
(Y/N) prompt.
NOTE: If trending a point by multiple
intervals, the maximum number of
samples per trend type is 100; if trending
a point by one interval, the maximum
number of samples is 2,500. If you
exceed the maximum number of
samples, the prompt is displayed again.
Start date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter a starting date for this trend in the
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Start time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter a starting time for this trend in the
HH:MM:SS format.
Enable stop date/time (Y/N)
Y
To set an ending date and time for this
trend and then continue with next step.
N
To let the trend run continuously after
the starting date/time and then proceed
to Notification threshold count prompt.
Stop date (MM/DD/YYYY)
Enter an ending date for this trend in the
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Stop time (HH:MM:SS)
Enter an ending time for this trend in the
HH:MM:SS format.
Trend log enabled (Y/N)
Y
Enable trend log.
N
Disable trend log.
Y
To stop trending once the maximum
number of samples is reached.
N
To continue trending after the log is full
by writing over existing trend samples.
Stop when full (Y/N)
278 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Trending a Point by Time Interval
Notification threshold count
Type a value between 1 and the
maximum number of samples for this
trend.
Press ENTER to accept the default (80
percent of the maximum number of
samples).
Notification class number
Type a value from 0 through 4194302 or
press ENTER to accept the default (0).
Specify the field panel that will receive
the notification threshold alarm
NOTE: The Notification Class number
must be assigned to a field panel.
Field panel
Press ENTER.
Accept the field panel name supplied by
the system.
Type a different field panel name.
Specify the name of the field panel that
will store the trend log object.
NOTE: The default field panel location
is the field panel that owns the point (or
FLN of the device subpoint) to which you
are adding the trend.
The message <Point Name> is now trending every x <unit of time>
successfully in field panel <field panel name> displays.
Example
>Point name : btec2:ctl temp---------------------------->Cov, Time : t
>Maximum number of samples : --->Trend in Hours, Minutes : h
>Hours between samples : 1->Trend log instance number : ------>Trend log name : ----------------------------->Trend log description : --------------->Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 4----->Notification class number : 0----->Field panel : 7020--BTEC2:CTL TEMP is now trending every 6 Hours successfully in
Field panel <7020>
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? Example - multi-point trend add
>Point name : btec*:ctl temp---------------------------->Multi point trend. Are you sure (Y/N): y
>Cov, Time : t
>Maximum number of samples : -->Trend in Hours, Minutes : h
>Hours between samples : 1->Trend log description : --------------->Enable start date/time (Y/N) : N
>Enable stop date/time (Y/N) : N
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
279 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
BACnet COV Poll Period Overview
>Trend log enabled (Y/N) : Y
>Stop when full (Y/N) : N
>Notification threshold count : 4----->Notification class number : 0-----BTEC1:CTL TEMP is now trending every 1 Hours successfully in
Field panel <7020>
BTEC2:CTL TEMP is now trending every 1 Hours successfully in
Field panel <7020>
End of commanding
BACnet COV Poll Period Overview
There are four configurable Change of Value (COV) poll period settings in BACnet 3.1
or later.*
These four settings affect devices on the ALN or the FLN, as follows:
On BACnet/IP ALN or MS/TP ALN networks:
●
●
Use the Intranet COV Poll Period between ALN devices with the same Site Name
(local ALN devices).
Use the Internet COV Poll Period between ALN devices with different Site Names
(remote ALN devices).
On MS/TP FLN networks:
●
Use the MSTP FLN local COV Poll Rate between FLN devices physically on the
local router MS/TP port network number (local FLN devices).
● Use the MSTP FLN remote COV Poll Rate between FLN devices which are not
physically on the local router MS/TP network number (remote FLN devices).
Communication between local devices is generally faster than communication between
remote devices, because there are no 'hops' between local devices. The Intranet COV
Poll Period and MSTP FLN Local COV Poll Rate could be set lower (faster) than the
Internet COV Poll Period and MSTP FLN Remote COV Poll Rate for these reasons.
The default value for both the Intranet COV Poll Period and the MSTP FLN Local COV
Poll Rate is 60 seconds.
Communication between remote devices is generally slower and generates more
network traffic due to the number of 'hops' between devices. To reduce the effect that
COV polling has on both the local and remote networks, the Internet COV Poll Period
and MSTP FLN Remote COV Poll Rate should be set slower than the Intranet COV
Poll Period and MSTP FLN Local COV Poll Rate. The default value for both the
Internet COV Poll period and the MSTP FLN Remote COV Poll Rate is 60 seconds.
* BACnet 3.0.x supports Intranet COV Poll Period and Internet COV Poll Period only.
BACnet Trend Log Enable/Disable
BACnet replaces the TALON Conditional Trending event trigger point with Trend Log
Enable/Disable feature. See Trend Log Enable/Disable in this chapter for information.
Example - Unresolved Point in Remote Trend Log
In the following example:
280 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 8—Trending
Example - Unresolved Point in Remote Trend Log
●
●
tec1:ROOM TEMP shows as unresolved (by ‘U’ at the end of the Point system
name value).
the trending field panel is identified as the operator field panel by a blank entry.
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? l
>Specify Field Panel (Y/N) : y
>Field panel : ------>Point name : tec1:ROOM TEMP----------------------------> 1) Point COV 5 Samples
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 101/03/2006 TUE TREND EDIT LOOK REPORT 23:33
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <tec1:ROOM TEMP>
Field Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Point system name : tec1:ROOM TEMP (BAC_11_??_4194303) U
Maximum number of samples : 5
Record every : Point COV
Instance Number : 0 (BAC_11_TL_0)
Trend log name : APO_11_TL_0
Trend log description :
Start time : (no start time specified)
Stop time : (no stop time specified)
Trend log enabled : Y
Stop when full : N
Notification threshold count : 4 (80%)
Notification class number : 0
Event Enable, to-Normal : Y
Event state : NORMAL
Total samples recorded : 0
Current samples : 0
Last notification time : (no notifications issued)
Last record at notification : 0
Records since notification : 0
End of report
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
281 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
PPCL Editor Concepts
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
PPCL Editor Concepts
PPCL is a language developed and optimized to control equipment, such as HVAC
and other related building systems, and to perform energy management functions. This
language provides complex functionality using English-based text commands.
Information about the field panel editor for PPCL is contained in this section. To learn
more about the PPCL language, see the TALON Powers Process Control Language
(PPCL) User's Manual (588-583).
PPCL Program Attributes
A field panel can contain multiple PPCL programs that execute simultaneously.
Creating multiple programs provides for better organization of PPCL code. Standard
functionality can also be copied and customized for each program with minimal
modifications. Each program has its own set of line numbers from 1 to 32767.
Each program in a field panel must have a unique 30-character name. The following
example names a program that will control the safety mode of Air Handler Unit 1 in
Field Panel 22:
PANEL22.AHU1.SAFETYMODE
If you create a program without a program name, the system automatically saves the
program using a default program name. The name format of the default program is the
number of the field panel:
>Program name ? 01
There is only one default program per panel.
PPCL Program Attributes
A field panel can contain multiple PPCL programs that execute simultaneously.
Creating multiple programs provides for better organization of PPCL code. Standard
functionality can also be copied and customized for each program with minimal
modifications. Each program has its own set of line numbers from 1 to 32767.
Each program in a field panel must have a unique 30-character name. The following
example names a program that will control the safety mode of Air Handler Unit 1 in
Field Panel 22:
PANEL22.AHU1.SAFETYMODE
If you create a program without a program name, the system automatically saves the
program using a default program name. The name format of the default program is the
number of the field panel:
>Program name ? 01
There is only one default program per panel.
BACnet/IP Priority For Writing
BACnet/IP uses Priority For Writing to specify the Priority Array slot that is used by
point commands and releases. For more information on the Command Priority Array,
see Point Priority/Command Priority in the Point Database chapter.
282 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
PPCL Editor Concepts
NOTE:
Existing PPCL that uses @Priority may have to be re-written to operate correctly
under BACnet.
Point Names in PPCL Programs
The point database can be set up so that the points have different point system and
point names. However, the PPCL editor only uses the point system name to identify
points. Using only the point system name in programs eliminates the need to update
programs should the point name be modified. Even if the user account is set to display
point names, the system name appears when editing PPCL programs.
PPCL also uses an optional statement called DEFINE to improve operator efficiency
when entering longer point names. The DEFINE statement assigns text abbreviations
to all or part of point system names. When used in program code, the abbreviation
assigned by the DEFINE statement is used.
Examples
System names:
BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.RETURN_FAN
BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SUPPLY_FAN
BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SETPOINT
DEFINE statement:
DEFINE (B2F3,"BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.")
Program code:
ON("%B2F3%RETURN_FAN%")
ON("%B2F3%SUPPLY_FAN")
SET(75.0,"%B2F3%SETPOINT")
Is the same as:
ON("BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.RETURN_FAN")
ON("BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SUPPLY_FAN")
SET(75.0,"BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SETPOINT")
The DEFINE statement is program-specific and cannot be used to pass point values
between field panels or programs within a field panel. Point names that use special
characters (such as "_") must have double quotes around them when used in PPCL.
Point Names in PPCL Programs
The point database can be set up so that the points have different point system and
point names. However, the PPCL editor only uses the point system name to identify
points. Using only the point system name in programs eliminates the need to update
programs should the point name be modified. Even if the user account is set to display
point names, the system name appears when editing PPCL programs.
BACnet/IP allows the use of the point system name, the BACnet encoded name, and
the BACnet device specific name in PPCL. All names are case sensitive in BACnet.
PPCL also uses an optional statement called DEFINE to improve operator efficiency
when entering longer point names. The DEFINE statement assigns text abbreviations
to all or part of point system names. When used in program code, the abbreviation
assigned by the DEFINE statement is used.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
283 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
PPCL Editor Concepts
Examples
System names:
BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.RETURN_FAN
BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SUPPLY_FAN
BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SETPOINT
DEFINE statement:
DEFINE (B2F3,"BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.")
Program code:
ON("%B2F3%RETURN_FAN%")
ON("%B2F3%SUPPLY_FAN")
SET(75.0,"%B2F3%SETPOINT")
Is the same as:
ON("BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.RETURN_FAN")
ON("BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SUPPLY_FAN")
SET(75.0,"BUILDING.2.FLOOR.3.SETPOINT")
The DEFINE statement is program-specific and cannot be used to pass point values
between field panels or programs within a field panel. Point names that use special
characters (such as "_") must have double quotes around them when used in PPCL.
Comment Lines
A program may contain comment lines to identify information such as who wrote the
program, what the program does, or the points the program uses. Comment lines are
not compiled in the field panel. The following example shows comment lines mixed
with program code:
07/17/2008 THU
PPCL DISPLAY
REPORT
08:09pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
Line numbers <1 to 32767>
PPCL program <BLD990.AHU01.PGM>
Field panel <1>
State Line Statement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ET
150 C
****************************************************************
*
ET
160 C
SET OA TEMP VIRTUAL TO ACTUAL OA TEMP
ET
170 C
ET
200 SAMPLE (60) MTEOAT = (MOAT + @3TOAT1) / 2
ET
300 C
****************************************************************
*
ET
310 C
GARAGE GATE CONTROL PROGRAM
ET
320 C
ET
400 IF (G3GAT .EQ. ON ) THEN ON (G3GATE) ELSE OFF
(G3GATE)
ET
410 C IF (G7GATS .EQ. ON ) THEN ON (G7GATE) ELSE OFF
(G7GATE)
284 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
PPCL Editor Concepts
End of report
Creating a Notepad at the Field Panel with PPCL Comment
Lines
With Firmware Revision 3.1 and later, a PPCL program containing only comment lines
can be used as a notepad for the field panel. This allows you to record information
regarding activities, modifications, a to-do list, special instructions to follow-up
personnel, or general notes.
● The comment lines can be added and viewed from any HMI or front-end device.
● The program can be archived for historical purposes.
A PPCL program that contains only comment lines is not executed, and, therefore,
does not affect system performance.
PPCL Line Status Indicators
When viewing a PPCL program report, the beginning of each line of code contains one
or more status indicators. These indicators, maintained by the system, allow you to
quickly evaluate if a program is running. The following example shows a sample
program and the indicators. See PPCL Status Indicator Descriptions for a description
of the PPCL status indicators:
07/17/2008 THU
PPCL DISPLAY
REPORT
08:09pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
Line numbers <1 to 32767>
PPCL program <BLD990.AHU01.TEST>
Field panel <1>
State Line Statement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ET
100
IF(SECND4 .LT. 7) THEN GOTO 300
D
200
SECND4 = 0
ET
300
IF(SECND4 .GT. 0 .AND. SECND4 .LT. 5) THEN
ON("greenlight") ELSE
OFF("greenlight")
ET
400
IF(SECND4 .GE. 5) THEN ON("redlight") ELSE
OFF("redlight")
ET
500
GOTO 100
End of report
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
285 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
PPCL Editor Concepts
PPCL Status Indicator Descriptions.
Column Position
Possible Character
Description
1
E
Line of code is enabled.
D
Line of code is disabled and will not execute.
T
System executed the line of code at least once after the last time the trace bit was
cleared.
<BLANK>
Program has not tried to execute the line of code since the last time the trace bit
was cleared.
U
Point unresolved; at least one point used in the line of code cannot be found in the
system point database, or the field panel has not been made ready.
<BLANK>
All points in the line of code have been found in the system point database.
F
System tried to execute the line of code but failed.
<BLANK>
Line of code is not failed.
L
Line of code is currently being tested or has been tested by the loop tuning
application.
<BLANK>
Line of code is not being tuned by the loop tuning application.
3
3
4
5
PPCL Assist
The PPCL Assist feature assists you in creating PPCL statements:
● The Assist Bubble offers a selection of commands.
● The Referenced Points list allows you to see current point values.
● The Device/Points bar in the navigation tree allows you to easily add points to your
program using the Drag and Drop feature.
● The error table guides you in creating accurate PPCL statements.
See the BACnet Field Panel Web Server (FPWeb) (125-3584T) for more information
and a full description of the PPCL Assist feature.
Manual Programming
PPCL programs can be created and modified manually (without automatic PPCL Assist
features) using the PPCL Editor. You may simply type or copy/paste PPCL lines,
including statements, point information, and punctuation, into the program pane in the
PPCL Editor. Be sure that the Assist Pop-up Enable check box in the Editor Settings
window is deselected. See the Creating a PPCL Program section for more information.
Please note:
● The PPCL Assist category pop-up does not display when you stop typing.
● The ability to drag and drop commands from the Commands list is still available
when using manual programming.
● The Assist Bubble is active and supplies one instance of assistance each time you
click it.
Accelerator Key Refresher
Accelerator keys provide a quick means for navigating through the program lines. For a
complete list of accelerator keys, type ? at the prompt.
286 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports
NOTE:
A VT emulator is required for the accelerator keys to function properly.
Common PPCL Editor Accelerator Keys.
Name
Accelerator Key
Function
Home
CTRL+D
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the program line.
End
CTRL+F
Moves the cursor to the end of the program line.
Cursor Left
CTRL+Q
Moves the cursor one character left in the current field.
Cursor Right
CTRL+W
Moves the cursor one character right in the current field.
Delete Left
CTRL+H
Deletes character left of cursor and moves the cursor one space to left.
Delete Right
CTRL+J
Deletes character right of the cursor leaving the cursor in its current position.
Delete to end of line
CTRL+K
Deletes the characters from the current cursor position to the end of the field.
Delete Field
CTRL+U
Deletes the current field’s input.
Redisplay
CTRL+R
Redisplays the current line keeping any field input.
Toggle Insert/
Overstrike
CTRL+T
Toggles the insert/overstrike mode.
Define String
CTRL+P
Defines string in the cut & paste buffer.
Insert String
CTRL+I
Adds string from paste buffer to current cursor position. Follows current
insert/overstrike mode.
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports
Displaying a List of PPCL Programs
This procedure displays a log of all the available PPCL programs on the network.
Displaying Available PPCL Programs on the Network
HMI
A, P, L (Application, Ppcl, Log)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Press ENTER.
All programs.
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type the program name, including
wildcard characters.
A range of programs.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list .
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
Here, Print
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
H, P
Specify to display report.
User's Manual
287 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports
The field panel displays a PPCL Log report.
Example
The following example shows a log of available PPCL programs on the network:
NOTE:
The Priority For Writing field applies to BACnet only.
07/17/2008 THU
PPCL LOG
REPORT
08:11pm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
Program name
Field panel name
Priority For Writing
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BLD990.AHU01.PGM
1
16
BLD990.CHL01.PGM
1
16
BLG990.BLR02.PGM
1
16
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Find, eNable, dIsable, Trace, Pdl, Quit? l
Displaying a PPCL Program
This procedure displays the lines of code contained in a PPCL program.
Displaying the Code in PPCL Programs
HMI
A, P, D (Application, Ppcl, Display)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Press ENTER.
All programs.
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type the program name, including
wildcard characters.
A range of programs.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list .
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
First line number
288 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Press ENTER.
The first available line number.
Type the starting line number.
A particular line number.
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports
Last line number
Here, Print
Press ENTER.
The last available line number.
Type the ending line number.
A particular line number.
H, P
Specify to display report.
The system displays the PPCL Display report based on the specified information.
Example
The following example shows the code in PPCL programs:
07/17/2008 THU
PPCL DISPLAY
REPORT
08:13pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <BLD990.AHU01.PGM>
Line numbers <1 to 32767>
PPCL program <BLD990.AHU01.PGM>
Field panel <1>
State Line Statement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------E
100
IF(SECND4 .LT. 7) THEN GOTO 300
E
200
SECND4 = 0
E
300
IF(SECND4 .GT. 0 .AND. SECND4 .LT. 5) THEN
ON("greenlight") ELSE
OFF("greenlight")
E
400
IF(SECND4 .GE. 5) THEN ON("redlight") ELSE
OFF("redlight")
E
500
GOTO 100
End of report
Displaying Unresolved Points in PPCL
This procedure displays points that are used in PPCL that are unresolved and not
found on the network.
Displaying Unresolved Points in PPCL Programs
HMI
A, P, R (Application, Ppcl, unReslv
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Specify the program name.
Press ENTER.
All programs.
Type that program name.
A particular program.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program using a query. The system
list.
display all programs.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
289 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports
Field panel name
Specify the field panel ALN name.
If an Ethernet ALN panel.
First line number
Press ENTER.
The first available program line number.
Type that program line number.
A particular program line number that
begins the range.
Press ENTER.
The last available program line number.
Type that program line number.
A particular program line number that
completes the range.
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Specify the program name.
Last line number
Here, Print
Press ENTER.
All programs.
Type that program name.
A particular program.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program using a query. The system
list.
display all programs.
Field panel
Specify the ALN address number of the
field panel.
If an RS-485 panel.
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are
connected.
Type that field panel ALN address
number or device instance number.
A particular field panel.
NOTE: The ALN address number can
be from 0 to 100, but must be unique for
each field panel on the ALN. The node
name must contain fewer than 30
characters, and cannot contain periods
or special characters. The device
instance number can be from 0 through
4,194,302, but must be unique for each
device on the ALN.
Press ENTER.
The first available program line number.
Type that program line number.
A particular program line number that
begins the range.
Press ENTER.
The last available program line number.
Type that program line number.
A particular program line number that
completes the range.
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Specify the program name.
First line number
Last line number
Here, Print
Press ENTER.
All programs.
Type that program name.
A particular program.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program using a query. The system
list.
display all programs.
290 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Generating PPCL Program Logs and Reports
Field panel
First line number
Last line number
Here, Print
Specify the ALN address number of the
field panel.
Press ENTER.
The field panel where you are
connected.
Type that field panel ALN address
number or device instance number.
A particular field panel.
NOTE: The ALN address number can
be from 0 to 100, but must be unique for
each field panel on the ALN. The node
name must contain fewer than 30
characters, and cannot contain periods
or special characters. The device
instance number can be from 0 through
4,194,302, but must be unique for each
device on the ALN.
Press ENTER.
The first available program line number.
Type that program line number.
A particular program line number that
begins the range.
Press ENTER.
The last available program line number.
Type that program line number.
A particular program line number that
completes the range.
H
Field panel where you are connected.
P
ALN report printer.
The field panel displays a PPCL Display report.
Example
The following example shows unresolved points in all PPCL programs of field panel 1:
07/17/2008 THU
PPCL DISPLAY
REPORT
02:57pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
Line numbers <1 to 32767>
PPCL program <1>
Field panel <1>
State Line Statement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------D U
10
ON(TEST)
PPCL program <BLD990.BLR01.PGM>
Field panel <1>
State Line Statement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------D U
450
OFF(FAN)
End of report
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
291 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
The Effects of Program Changes
The Effects of Program Changes
When you work on a program, be aware that any change can affect facility operations.
A running program controls some aspect of the system. If the controls are changed or
removed, how will the system react? To avoid problems when enabling, disabling,
adding, modifying, or removing a program, review the following list:
● Identify any points associated with life safety, fire, or smoke control. Take any
necessary precautions when working with these types of points.
● Identify any points that influence the operation of other points. Evaluate how a
change will affect those points and take the necessary precautions.
● Understand and follow any system shutdown or maintenance procedures.
NOTE:
It is highly recommended that an entire program be disabled before making changes
to that program.
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
Adding PPCL Program Lines
This function adds a line of PPCL code to a program in a field panel. Before using this
function, identify the code to be added, and the field panel and program where it will be
added. If a new program is being created, then a name is needed for the program.
NOTE:
Before running a program, the field panel must be made ready and the code must be
enabled. To make ready a field panel, see the System Setup chapter.
Adding PPCL Program Lines
HMI
A, P, E (Application, Ppcl, Edit)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type the program name, including
wildcard characters.
A range of programs.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
NOTE: If you are starting a new
program, type the field panel number
where the program will reside.
292 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
Line
A
For Add.
Type the line of code, and then press
TAB or SPACE.
To type one line of code and the line
number.
Type the line number, press TAB or
SPACE, and then start typing the line of
code.
To type code that extends beyond one
line. Type & at the end of the first line.
Complete the line of code.
The system adds a line of PPCL code to a program in a field panel.
Example
The following example shows how to add a PPCL program line:
>Program name
: BLD990.AHU01.PGM------------->Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? A
>Line ? 450 IF(SECND4 .GE. 3) THEN ON("bluelight") ELSE
OFF("bluelight")--PPCL Line Added Program name: BLD990.AHU01.PGM
Modifying PPCL Program Lines
This function modifies existing PPCL program lines. Before using this function, identify
the program and changes you want to make.
NOTE:
Accelerator keys shorten the modifying process (for example, CTRL+Q, CTRL+W,
and CTRL+T).
This procedure can change the control of the system.
Modifying Program Lines
HMI
A, P, E (Application, Ppcl, Edit)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
M
For Modify.
Line number
Type the line number you want to
modify.
The system displays the text for the line
number.
NOTE: If the system re-displays the
>LINE NUMBER prompt, no code is
available for the line number.
Line
Type the changes you want to make.
The system updates the line of PPCL code for the specified program.
Example
The following example shows how to modify a program line:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
293 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
>Program name
: BLD990.AHU01.PGM------------->Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? M
>Line number ? 450---->Line ? 450 IF(SECND4 .GE. 2) THEN ON("BLUE LIGHT") ELSE
OFF("BLUE LIGHT")PPCL Line Added Program name: BLD990.AHU01.PGM
Copying PPCL Programs
This function copies an existing PPCL program to another program name. It also
allows PPCL code from one program to be merged with another. Before using this
function, identify the name of the program to copy (known as the source) and the name
and location of the program to copy to (known as the destination).
NOTE:
If the destination program contains line numbers that exist in the source program, the
newer lines are not copied. Care should be taken when merging PPCL code from one
program to another.
Copying a PPCL Program
HMI
A, P, E (Application, Ppcl, Edit)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
Copy to program name
C
For Copy.
Type the exact program name.
A particular existing program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays program matching the
criteria.
Field panel of Field panel name
Type the new program name.
A new program.
Type the field panel identifier.
The system prompts you for the identifier
of the field panel where the program will
be stored, if the program does not
already exist.
See Field Panel Identifier in the How to
Use this Manual section for information
on field panel identifiers.
If you specified a new program name, the system copies an existing PPCL program to
another program name. If you specified an existing program name, the system merges
the old and new programs.
Example
The following example shows how to copy a PPCL program:
>Program name
294 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
:
User's Manual
BLD990.AHU01.PGM--------------
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? C
>Copy to program name ? BLD990.BLR01.PGM------------->Field panel ? 1-PPCL Line Added Program name: BLD990.BLR01.PGM
Deleting PPCL Program Lines
This function removes PPCL lines from a program. If all of the lines in a PPCL program
are deleted, the system automatically deletes the program name.
NOTE:
This procedure can change the control of the system.
Deleting Program Lines
HMI
A, P, E (Application, Ppcl, Edit)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
First line number
Last line number
Are you sure (Y/N)
D
For Delete.
Press ENTER.
The first available line number.
Type the starting line number.
A particular line number.
Press ENTER.
For the last available line number.
Type the ending line number.
A particular line number.
Y
Verify you want to delete the specified
lines of code.
N
Cancel deletion of line of code.
If you verified the deletion, the system removes the specified PPCL lines from the
program.
Example
The following example shows how to delete program lines:
>Program name
: BLD990.AHU01.PGM------------->Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? D
>First line number
: 1000--->Last line number
: 2000--->Are you sure (Y/N)
: Y
PPCL line removed from program BLD990.AHU01.PGM
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
295 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
Searching for Specific Program Code
This procedure searches programs for point system names or program statements.
Searching for Point System Names and Program Statements
HMI
A, P, F (Application, Ppcl, Find)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Press ENTER.
All programs.
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
Field panel of Field panel name
Statement type
Point system name
Type the field panel where you are
connected.
Type the field panel identifier.
The system prompts you for the identifier
of the field panel where the program will
be stored, if the program does not
already exist.
See Field Panel Identifier in the How to
Use this Manual section for information
on field panel identifiers.
Press ENTER.
All PPCL statements.
Type the exact statement.
A particular PPCL statement.
Type that point name.
A particular point system name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A point system name using a query. The
list.
system displays point system names
matching the criteria.
Here, Print
H, P
Specify to display report.
The system displays a PPCL Search report based on the specified information.
Example
The following example shows how to search programs for program statements:
07/17/2008 THU
PPCL SEARCH
REPORT
08:16pm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Program name
: <BLD990.AHU01.PGM>
Statement type : <ON>
Point system name : <>
PPCL program <BLD990.AHU01.PGM>
State Line Statement
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ET
700
IF(SECND1 .LT. 20) THEN GOTO 900
296 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
ET
10
900
IF(SECND1 .GT. 0 .AND. SECND1 .LT. 10) THEN AOE00 =
.0 ELSE AOE00 = 0
End of report
Enabling or Disabling PPCL Program Lines
This procedure enables or disables PPCL programs. When enabled, the system
executes those lines of code. Disabled lines of code are not executed. You can enable
or disable all or part of the program.
NOTE:
This procedure can change the control of the system.
Enabling or Disabling Lines of Program Code
HMI
A, P (Application, Ppcl)
Prompt/Field
Program name
Option/Entry
Description
E
Enable PPCL lines.
I
Disable PPCL lines.
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
First line number
Last line number
Press ENTER.
The first available line number.
Type the starting line number.
A particular line number.
Press ENTER.
The last available line number.
Type the ending line number.
A particular line number.
The system enables or disables lines of code in the PPCL program.
Example
The following example shows how to enable program lines:
>Program name
>First line number
>Last line number
PPCL lines enabled for program
: BLD990.AHU01.PGM-------------: -------: -------BLD990.AHU01.PGM
Clearing Program Trace Bits
A trace bit indicates that a program line has been executed at least once since the
trace bit was last cleared. Clearing trace bits restarts PPCL from the first line of the
program. This allows the flow of a program to be examined.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
297 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 9—PPCL Editor
Changing a PPCL Program—Procedures
Clearing Trace Bits
HMI
A, P, T (Application, Ppcl, Trace)
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Program name
Type the exact program name.
A particular program name.
Type ?, and then type a number from the A program name using a query. The
list.
system displays programs matching the
criteria.
The system clears the program trace bits.
Example
The following example shows how to clear trace bits:
>Program name
: BLD990.AHU01.PGM-------------PPCL lines trace bits cleared for program BLD990.AHU01.PGM
298 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
What is PDL?
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
What is PDL?
Electric utilities calculate demand by recording the kilowatts used during a short
(typically 15 minutes) time period called a demand interval. The highest demand
interval for a specified calendar period (usually one to eight months) in turn determines
a facility's peak demand charge. In the past, the most common demand interval has
been the fixed (set) demand interval, which records the kilowatts consumed in a
specified time period. However, most utilities currently use a sliding window demand
interval. It more accurately measures the actual peak demand by recording
consumption every minute for the entire demand window period, then calculating the
average demand for that period. This process continually moves along in one-minute
increments. When the next minute's demand value is recorded, the oldest demand
value is dropped and a new average demand for the demand window is calculated.
Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) is an application implemented through PPCL that limits
consumption of electricity with the intent to prevent higher demand rate charges. In
most cases, PDL will be useful on days of extreme temperature variances that place
excessive demand on the equipment in the facility. For those days, PDL will prevent
higher demand charges by shutting off or reducing the capacity of non-essential
electrical loads. The loads will be reactivated once the overall demand decreases and
the loads can be restored without adversely affecting the overall demand.
While the PDL application prevents excessive demand charges, it should not be used
to duty cycle equipment. If the PDL application continually turns equipment on and off
on a daily basis, then the application is not being applied correctly. Also, be aware that
duty cycling equipment in some cases, void warranties, shortens the life of equipment,
and does not allow PDL to accurately control equipment. For more information, see the
TALON Powers Process Control Language (PPCL) User's Manual (588-583).
Will PDL Help My Facility?
To effectively implement PDL, a facility must have enough loads that can be turned off,
slowed, or moved to other time periods without adversely affecting building operations.
As a general rule, PDL is effective when it controls at least 10% of a facility demand. If
a power consumption audit of the facility reveals that the lighting (indoor and outdoor),
ventilation, cooling, comfort heating, refrigeration, water heating, and motor loads are
being used efficiently, then PDL should not be used. Also, electrical loads cannot be
turned off during peak times of demand should not be used in PDL.
The best candidates for PDL involve loads that can be shed during building peak hours
without having any adverse affects on building operations. The first loads to consider
for PDL control are: lighting, heating, air conditioning, refrigeration, and ventilation
equipment. Some common examples of loads include (listed in order of consideration):
● Florescent lighting (for facilities that have split-ballast wiring, one or two lamps per
fixture can be shut off).
● Speed reductions on variable speed air handler fans and secondary chilled water
pumps. When considering these types of loads, consult your Siemens Industry
representative.
● Small, non-essential fans, such as rest room and cafeteria exhaust fans, which
typically run during the occupied hours of a facility.
● Air handler unit fans (preferably those fans rated at 10HP and under, which allow
for multiple start and stops per hour) and can be shut off without violating building
codes or regulations.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
299 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Basic PDL Functions
These types of loads are considered first because they can be temporarily shut off or
reduced in capacity to avoid the demand charge, and later restarted before residents in
the facility experienced discomfort.
While reviewing the equipment, note the charges for demand and consumption on the
electric bills. A high demand charge influences the number of loads that should be
considered for PDL. Reviewing past electric bills can also provide a good history of
demand levels. This knowledge can assist you in making decisions concerning what
the demand setpoints should be.
CAUTION
Always consider building codes and regulations for control equipment before
assigning loads to PDL.
If you have concerns or questions related to building codes and regulations, please
contact your Siemens Industry, Inc. representative.
Basic PDL Functions
Each PDL program performs the following major functions to help the operator avoid
unnecessary high peak electrical demand:
Monitor electrical consumption. PDL continuously tracks the amount of electricity being
consumed, by monitoring one or more electrical kilowatt-hour/demand meters. These
meters can measure the electrical consumption (kWh), electrical demand (kW), or
both.
Forecast demand. PDL samples meter data to continuously forecast the demand likely
to be used during successive time intervals.
Shed loads. If the PDL forecasted demand indicates that electricity usage is likely to
exceed a preset maximum allowable level, then automatic action is taken to shed (or
turn off) electrical loads. Turning off certain electrical loads before the preset maximum
is reached helps you reduce the electrical costs of the facility.
Restore loads. Once the demand peak has passed, loads that have been shed must
be restored (reactivated) and returned to normal control.
Principal of Operation
All meter monitoring and demand prediction for a meter area is done through a PPCL
program residing in one specific field panel (known as the predictor field panel).
Normally, all meter inputs from the field connect directly to the predictor field panel.
Based on a comparison between the actual demand and predicted demand, the
predictor field panel sends a target value to up to seven other field panels containing
loads controlled by PDL. During the span of one day, up to seven demand targets can
be issued by the predictor field panel, allowing for adjustments to the demand charge
Schedule (making it necessary to know when these changes occur). The predictor field
panel also decides how many kilowatts of load must be shed from the meter area and
is responsible for keeping data for the reports.
The definition of the loads under control of a meter area, and the direct control of the
shedding and restoring of those loads, are accomplished by PPCL in one or more field
panels (known as load handling field panels). The order in which loads are shed and
restored, and the assurance that loads are not kept off too long or short-cycled, is left
to these field panels. Load handling field panels are also responsible for keeping track
300 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PDL Specific Attributes
of the total loads available to be controlled and for feeding this available load
information back to the predictor field panel.
In facilities without an ALN, one field panel handles both the predicting and load
handing responsibilities. Facilities with networks may also design their PDL
applications in this same manner.
PDL Specific Attributes
The PDL application contains some specific attributes concerning the meters, types of
load points controlled, control variables and how the application reports information.
Meter Inputs
The PDL application uses any of the following inputs:
● Pulsed Digital Input representing consumption (kWh) from the utility meter
● 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to 10 Vdc Analog Input representing demand (kW)
● A mix of pulsed consumption (kWh) and analog demand (kW) inputs
If a meter signal is lost due to an ALN communications failure, PDL will control loads in
order to maintain each field panels load target at the last assigned value. PPCL has
the ability to define default values for the individual meters. You have the choice to use
a historical value determined by the PDL application or an actual value defined in
kilowatts.
Maximum Number of Meters
A single meter area can sum up to five physical meter inputs. If more than five meters
exist per meter area, additional PPCL will have to be written that will sum the LPACI or
LAI meter inputs into a virtual LAO point which will serve as the meter input point.
Example 2 of the Example of PDL Applications section addresses this practice.
Contact your Siemens Industry, Inc. representative for more information about
extending the maximum number of meters.
Meter Areas
A meter area is defined as a collection of meters and loads for which a unique demand
prediction is made, a unique group of loads can be shed and restored, and a unique
set of PDL reports is generated.
It is common for a facility to sum the inputs from several meters to determine total
electrical consumption and demand for a facility. Some larger facilities may be billed
separately for different groups of meters, requiring each of the meter groups to have
separate definitions, separate demand predictions and separate shed and restore
groups of loads.
Type of Load Points Controlled
PDL can control the following types of points:
● Any single or bundled digital output (ON/OFF) point. This includes LDO, L2SL,
L2SP, LOOAL, and LOOAP point types.
● Loads can be controlled over multiple ALNs. Up to four ALNs can be connected to
a given Insight workstation. If the loads to be controlled are defined on more than
four ALNs, an additional Insight workstation is required.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
301 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PDL Specific Attributes
For control of analog points, contact your Siemens Solution Partner, Authorized
TALON Dealer.
Shedding and Restoring
Each of the individual PDL loads residing in a field panel is associated to one of four
priority groups. The order of shedding can be selected as either fixed sequence or
round robin within each priority group of the field panel. All load sheds by demand
limiting are also subject to user-defined minimum on, minimum off, and maximum off
times. Equipment with internal protection devices may also dictate minimum on and off
times.
Demand limiting shedding is done at a higher priority than normal load control (PDL
priority versus NONE). Loads restored by demand limiting after shedding are kept at
PDL priority until their minimum on times have elapsed.
Setpoint (Demand Limit) Definition
The day may be divided into a maximum of seven separate demand limits (setpoints).
Setpoints may be entered as variables to be altered by operator command or seasonal
programming without interruption of demand limiting operation.
Prediction Method
The PDL application uses a sliding window (drop oldest sample) average predictor with
an adjustable weighting factor to more recent and less recent samples. The adjustable
demand window can store up to 30 calculation intervals (samples). The calculation
interval (sample time) can use a value as small as one minute.
Warning Messages
The PDL application can issue the following warning messages:
● The network alarm device can receive warning messages whenever the predicted
demand crosses the 90% and 100% threshold levels of the setpoint.
● An LDO point can be toggled at the end of any setpoint interval during which the
actual sliding window demand exceeded the setpoint.
Database Requirements (Per Meter Area)
The following items are required to define PDL:
● Three PPCL statements (PDLMTR, PDLSET, PDLDPG) to monitor meter input
points, make demand predictions, define setpoints, update reports, and issue
demand targets. PDLMRT and PDLSET statements are mandatory for monitoring
input.
● One virtual LDO load point is required per meter area, which is toggled whenever
actual demand exceeds setpoint. Each load handling field panel requires one
PPCL statement (PDL) to receive demand targets and manage its loads. Each of
these statements require two virtual LAO points (one to hold the demand target,
the second to hold the total available kW value under the control of the field panel).
● One PPCL statement (PDLDAT) is required to define each load under demand
limiting control. Each statement is entered in the field panel that handles the load
even if the load itself is not entered in that field panel.
302 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PPCL Statements Required for PDL
NOTE:
This is not recommended due to lack of load shed/restore control in the field panel in
the event of a communication interrupt.
●
Other virtual points may be required if demand limiting PPCL statement
parameters (such as setpoints and kW values of loads) are needed for
commanding.
If required, additional PPCL is necessary to support automatic report generation.
PPCL Statements Required for PDL
This section discusses the individual PPCL statements needed to accomplish PDL. If
PDL is implemented across the ALN where two or more field panels are used, then the
predictor and load handling field panels may be different. If PDL is implemented in a
single field panel, then that panel serves as both the predictor and load-handling field
panel.
The PPCL programming code needed to create the PDL application requires a specific
sequence. The following sections generically discuss the necessary PPCL commands
and their functionality. For an explanation of the PPCL code, see the TALON Powers
Process Control Language (PPCL) User's Manual (588-583).
Single Field Panel PDL
When PDL is implemented in a single field panel (the predictor and load-handling field
panels are the same), that field panel performs all of the functions of PDL. The
program code must be entered in the following sequence:
1. PDLMTR
2. PDLSET
3. PDLDPG
4. PDL
5. PDLDAT
Multiple Field Panel PDL
When PDL is implemented over an ALN, the program code is divided between a
predictor and one or more load-handling field panels. The predictor field panel requires
three statements (defined in the following order), PDLMTR, PDLSET, PDLDPG. These
statements use meter inputs and total kilowatt information from load handling field
panels. They monitor and predict demand and determine the correct value of the LAO
target points for PDL statements in a meter area.
Each load-handling field panel requires two statements (defined in order), PDL and
PDLDAT. A single PDL statement and a group of PDLDAT statements work as a team
to define load parameters and maintain a kilowatt level, or a target for that group of
loads.
PPCL Commands
The following commands are used to implement PDL in the field panels:
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
303 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PPCL Statements Required for PDL
PDL
This statement is responsible for the direct control of a group of PDLDAT statements.
The PDL command performs the following functions:
● Maintains a target kW value by shedding and restoring loads. This value is passed
to the PDL statement by the PDLDPG statement, through a LAO point value.
● Keeps track of the total available kilowatts under its control. The PDL statement
determines which of the loads defined in the PDLDAT statements associated with it
are actually available for peak demand limiting control and places the total
kilowatts available to it in a LAO point.
● Defines which of four priority groups each load under its control belongs. This is
accomplished by checking the line numbers of PDLDAT statements.
● Defines and controls the sequence of shedding and restoring (fixed sequence or
round robin) for each priority group.
The PDL command contains the following parameters:
Meter area number
The number assigned to a particular meter area.
Total available kilowatt value
Total amount of power consumed by all of the loads under control of PDL in the field panel. A power
consuming load is any point defined with a PDLDAT command.
The value of this LAO point is calculated by the PDL command and must correspond to the point
defined in the available kilowatt total parameter of the PDLDPG point.
Target value
The power consumption limit that the PDL command should maintain.
The value of this LAO point is calculated by the PDLDPG command and must correspond to the point
defined in the target value parameter of the PDLDPG command.
NOTE: To prevent any unnecessary shedding of loads on an initial field panel startup or a return from
power failure, and to assure that PDL starts from a "steady-state" condition, do the f following:
- Recommand the target point with an ONPWRT statement that jumps to a section of code resetting
the target point to a value slightly above the sum of the KW value of all point under PDL control in that
cabinet (see Example of PDL Applications in this chapter).
Priority group definition (one to
four groups possible)
Up to four priority groups can be defined, each group containing three specific values: a beginning
PPCL line number, an ending PPCL line number, and the type of shed action. The first priority group
defined is shed, followed by the second group, and so on.
The beginning and ending line numbers define a range of PPCL code containing PDLDAT commands.
The shed type determines how the field panel sheds the loads contained within the range (either a
fixed sequence shedding or round robin).
PDLDAT
A PDLDAT (PDL data) command is the description of the load controlled by PDL. The
PDLDAT command contains the following parameters:
Point name of load
Point name of the load controlled by PDL.
Minimum on-time
Minimum time in minutes that PDL must keep the load ON after being restored.
Minimum off-time
Minimum time in minutes that a load must remain OFF before it can be restored by PDL.
Maximum off-time
Maximum time in minutes that PDL can keep a load switched off before it must be restored.
Maximum off-time also has special importance for supply air fans providing a mixture of outdoor air
and supply air to a space. Maximum off-time should be chosen so that the total amount of outside air
does not fall below the specifications required by code.
Kilowatt rating
304 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
Kilowatt rating of the load.
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PPCL Statements Required for PDL
The choice of minimum on, minimum off and maximum off times for a given load
depend on the type of equipment and kW rating of the load. During periods of heavy
PDL activity, a load may be shed and restored several times in a short period of time.
Before assigning values to these parameters, you must consider the limitations of the
equipment so that the equipment can operate in a safe manner.
The minimum on-time, minimum off-time, maximum off-time and kilowatt rating values
can also be determined by consulting the technical specifications for a particular piece
of equipment. If the specifications are unavailable, you can consult National Electric
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) documentation for the latest general specifications.
The following table provides specifications, as determined by NEMA, for single speed
and two speed motor sizes:
Single Speed Motor Size
Recommended Maximum
Number of Starts per Hour
Minimum ON Time in Minutes Minimum OFF Time in
Minutes
1 HP
(0.746 kW)
10
3
3
2 HP
(1.49 kW)
8
4
3
5 HP
(3.73 kW)
6
5
5
10 HP
(7.46 kW)
4
8
7
25 HP
(18.65 kW)
1
30
30
Greater than 25 HP
Consult motor manufacturer
Two Speed Motor Size
Recommended Maximum
Number of Starts per Hour
Minimum ON Time in Minutes Minimum OFF Time in
Minutes
1 HP
(0.746 kW)
12
3
2
2 HP
(1.49 kW)
10
3
3
5 HP
(3.73 kW)
8
4
3
10 HP
(7.46 kW)
6
5
5
25 HP
(18.65 kW)
2
20
20
Greater than 25 HP
Consult motor manufacturer
Controlling Loads over the ALN with PDLDAT
Although a PDLDAT statement in one field panel can control a load in another field
panel (whether on that ALN or on another ALN), it is recommended that you avoid this
design. If communication is lost between these two field panels and PDL determines
that a load must be shed, the command to shed the load will fail. PDL does not
incorporate a status feedback to confirm the shedding and restoring of loads.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
305 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PPCL Statements Required for PDL
PDLMTR
The PDLMTR (PDL meter) statement has the primary role in monitoring meters,
making predictions, and keeping report data up to date. There is only one of these
statements per meter area. This statement defines the following:
● Meters by logical point name.
● Calculation interval (how often are demand predictions made).
● Sliding prediction window width.
● Historical weighting factor for sliding window prediction, default values to be used if
meters cannot be read.
● Whether or not warning messages will be issued as the predicted demand nears or
exceeds setpoint.
● Full scale demand for time versus demand plot section of reports.
The PDLMTR statement is responsible for the following actions:
● Making sliding window demand predictions.
● Updating report information pertaining to demand and consumption.
● Deciding when warning messages should be issued.
● Initializing and restarting a meter area.
The PDLMTR contains the following parameters:
Meter area number
The number assigned to a particular meter area.
Historical forecast weighting
factor
The historical weighting factor defined as a percentage. This factor multiplies the calculated average of
the last (most recent) half window demand values recorded by PDL. The default value is 30% of the
anticipated demand.
Calculation interval
Defines the calculation interval in minutes.
Demand window interval
Defines the sliding window interval in minutes.
Plot
Defines the maximum value for the time versus demand plot section of the PDL activity report.
Warning messages
Determines if PDL will issue warning messages.
Meter point names (up to five
points possible)
The first value of a corresponding pair defining the point names of up to five demand or consumption
meters. Each meter point requires an associated default value.
Default values (up to five points The second value of a corresponding pair defining the default values used as the meter reading when
or values possible)
communication is lost on the ALN. You have the option to use a historical value or a value defined in
kilowatts.
PDLSET
The PDLSET setpoint statement is responsible for defining the peak demand levels for
a meter area, and the time of day during which those setpoints are in effect. The
demand predictions made by the PDLMTR command are compared to the appropriate
setpoints as determined by this statement to determine how many kilowatts, if any, are
to be shed or restored for the meter area.
The PDLSET contains the following parameters:
306 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PDL Activity Report
Meter area number
The number assigned to a particular meter area.
Exceeded setpoint indicator
A DO point that is commanded OFF at the end of each interval. The point is commanded ON if the
demand exceeds the setpoint during the interval.
Demand setpoint (total of seven First value of a corresponding pair defining a demand setpoint value that the meter area should not
possible)
exceed. Each demand setpoint requires an ending time value.
Ending time (total of seven
possible)
Second value of a corresponding pair defining the ending time for the associated setpoint. Each
ending time requires a demand setpoint.
PDLDPG
The PDLDPG (PDL Digital Point Group) statement keeps track of how many kilowatts
worth of load are available in each load handling field panel, and how many of those
kilowatts should be shed or restored at any time in each of those panels. This
statement is also responsible for setting the target value for each PDL command
associated with a meter area.
The PDLDPG contains the following parameters:
Meter area number
The number assigned to a particular meter area.
Total available kilowatt (up to
seven points possible)
First point of a corresponding pair defining the amount of power consumed by the loads under control
of the PDL command. This point should be defined as a virtual LAO point and requires an associated
target point.
The value of this point is calculated by the PDL command and must correspond to the point name
defined in the total kilowatt parameter of the PDL command.
Target value (up to seven
points possible)
Second point of a corresponding pair defining the power consumption limit that the PDL command
should maintain.
The value of this point is calculated by the PDLDPG command and must correspond to the point name
defined in the target value parameter of the PDL command.
NOTE: To prevent any unnecessary shedding of loads on an initial field panel startup or a return from
power failure, and to assure that PDL starts from a "steady-state" condition, do the following:
- Recommand the target point with an ONPWRT statement that jumps to a section of code resetting
the target point to a value slightly above the sum of the kW value of all points under PDL control in that
cabinet (see Example of PDL Applications [➙ 312] in this chapter).
PDL Activity Report
The PDL application provides a single report for each meter area. The report can be
displayed at any field panel on a network or sent to the system printer. The PDL
Activity report consists of the following three sections:
● The Billing Period Summary section contains consumption and actual sliding
window peak demand for an adjustable billing period (monthly, semi-monthly, and
so on).
● The 24-hour Summary section contains: setpoint interval begin and end times,
setpoints, actual sliding window peak demand values during the setpoint interval,
time of occurrence for those demand vales, and consumption for the previous
twenty-four hours.
● The Demand vs. Time Plot section contains the plot of demand at fifteen minute
intervals for the previous twenty-four hours.
This report may be triggered automatically through PPCL, and also resides as part of
the field panel interface.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
307 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PDL Activity Report
Generating a PDL Activity Report
The following example demonstrates how to generate the PDL Activity report:
HMI
A, P, P, D, H or P (Application, Ppcl, Pdl, Display, Here or Printer)
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? a
>Ppcl, flNdevice, Schedule, Quit? p
>Log, Display, Edit, Find, eNable, dIsable, Trace, Pdl, tUne,
Quit? p
>Display, Restart, Initsummary, Quit? d
>Here, Printer
: h
>Meter area
PDL Activity Report
Meter Area 1 15:00 29-Sep-96
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Billing Period Summary
Shed
Peak
Time and
Date
Consumption
Begin
End
Setpoint
Demand
of Peak
-------------------------------------------------------------------------23:59
00:00
100
KW
10.0
KW
23:59 28Sep
0.166666 KWH
00.00
04:00
200
KW
202.6666 KW
18:38 28Sep
90.83301 KWH
04:00
08:00
300
KW
10.0
KW
04:00 29Sep
40.0
KWH
08:00
12:00
400
KW
10.0
KW
08:00 29Sep
40.0
KWH
12:00
16:00
500
KW
10.0
KW
12:00 29Sep
29.0
KWH
16:00
20:00
600
KW
467.3333 KW
18:00 28Sep
78.83314 KWH
Total
349
.6659 KWH
24 Hour Summary
Shed
Peak
Time and
Date
Consumption
Begin
End
Setpoint
Demand
of Peak
-------------------------------------------------------------------------308 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
PDL Activity Report
23:59
Sep
00.00
Sep
04:00
Sep
08:00
Sep
12:00
Sep
16:00
Sep
20:00
Sep
00:00
0.166666
04:00
90.83301
08:00
40.0
12:00
40.0
16:00
29.0
20:00
78.83314
23:59
39.8334
100
KWH
200
KWH
300
KWH
400
KWH
500
KWH
300
KWH
100
KWH
KW
10.0
KW
23:59 28-
KW
202.6666
KW
18:38 28-
KW
10.0
KW
04:00 29-
KW
10.0
KW
08:00 29-
KW
10.0
KW
12:00 29-
KW
467.3333
KW
18:00 28-
KW
10.0
KW
20:00 28-
Demand vs Time Plot
Begin Day
Percentage of 500.0
KW
================================================================
======
17:30
Y
0
KW
? |
|
17:45
Y
0
KW
? |
|
18:00
Y
0
KW
? |
|
18:15
Y
1
KW
? |X
|
18:30
Y
402
KW
D
|XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
|
18:45
Y
75
KW
D |XXXXXXX
|
19:00
Y
10
KW
D |X
|
19:15
Y
10
KW
D |X
|
19:30
Y
10
KW
D |X
|
Billing Period Summary Section
This section of the report logs data on actual sliding window peak demand and
consumption during daily setpoint intervals, as well as total consumption since the last
initialization (reset to zero) of the data in this section. Zeroing the billing period
summary data has no effect on data in the other two sections of the report.
The billing period summary section is intended to provide summary information for
comparison with utility bills. Data is kept until reset by operator action. The billing
period is typically one month. The data in this section of the report is always displayed
in chronological order from midnight by setpoint interval end time.
24-Hour Summary Section
This section of the report provides a summary of peak demand and consumption for
the previous twenty-four hours. It is updated each time a new setpoint interval is
entered (This is much less frequently than the billing period section). The data in this
section of the report is always displayed in chronological order from midnight by
setpoint interval.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
309 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO)
Demand vs. Time Plot
The demand versus time section provides a graphical profile of average demand (kW)
for each quarter hour (15 minutes) during the past twenty-four hours. This data is
updated on each fifteen minute clock boundary. Data is displayed as oldest at the top,
and a "Y" or "T" (Yesterday or Today) besides the data serves as a reminder of this to
the observer. This section also provides an indication that a meter default value used
by PDL (shown by the letter "D" appearing next to the plot for the 15-minute interval). If
a power failure occurs or the PDLMTR statement was disabled or failed, the report will
indicate invalid data by displaying a question mark (?) next to the plot for the interval.
Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO)
See the BACnet Field Panel Web Server (FPWeb) (125-3584T) for more information
and a full description of the Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) feature.
TALON View software provides you the ability to configure and enable SSTO for
BACnet schedules.
When the Schedule Optimization Enabled checkbox is selected:
● The 12 default SSTO Action Titles are added to the Action list (see table below).
● The + and - buttons of the Action list are grayed out.
● You can add commands to the action.
● You cannot change the name of the actions. The Action Title field in the Actions
dialogue box is grayed out.
Index
Action Title
Description of “State”
1
VAC
Actions for vacant (unoccupied) time
periods
2
OCC1
Actions for 1st occupied time period
3
OCC2
Actions for 2nd occupied time period
4
OCC3
Actions for 3rd occupied time period
5
OCC4
Actions for 4th occupied time period
6
OCC5
Actions for 5th occupied time period
7
WARMUP
Early start time actions used to heat the
zone to occupied setpoint
8
COOLDOWN
Early start time actions used to cool the
zone to occupied setpoint
9
NGHT_HTG
Night time actions for controlling heating
10
NGHT_CLG
Night time actions for controlling cooling
11
STOP_HTG
Early stop time actions used when in
heating
12
STOP_CLG
Early start time actions used when in
cooling
When you save the Command object:
● The Schedule Optimization Enabled checkbox is grayed out.
● The Command Object is saved to the field panel.
310 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Important Notes and Cautions on PDL Operation
Important Notes and Cautions on PDL Operation
The following items cover some important points about PDL operation over an ALN.
PDL is started by the PDLMTR statement the first time it is executed.
PDL may be restarted by an operator command sequence through the Operator
Interface Program at the field panel. Following a PDL Restart command, all report data
is zeroed out and one-half of a demand window interval must pass before any
warnings or new triggers are set by the PDLMTR statement. It is suggested that PDL
be restarted whenever you change any PDL statement other than the PDLDAT
statement. Performing a Disable/Enable or Remove/Add of any PDL statements are
handled gracefully, but data logging in reports may not be correct.
If you are unsure of the gain value of an LPACI meter input point, make sure that you
disable the PDLMTR statement before removing and re-adding the point to change its
gain. Remember that removing a point causes a statement, which references it into the
unresolved state. In this state, the PDLMTR statement will not execute until the point is
re-added, and demand predictions and table updates will become unsynchronized.
The PDL statement will run with whatever target value it sees, regardless of what other
PDL statements are doing. For example, the PDL statement will maintain its target
even if PDLMTR is removed or disabled. This is an important feature, since it allows
you to set targets for PDL(…) statements to some safe value if communication is lost
with the predictor field panel.
Following warmstarts, statement enables, and PDL restarts, PDLMTR(…) will not issue
warning messages or set demand targets (shed loads) until one-half of a demand
window interval has passed. If you are afraid of exceeding a setpoint after a return
from a power failure, set a safe target value as part of your ONPWRT code.
There is a resident point in each field panel called $PDL. This point represents the
value of the demand prediction made by the PDLMTR statement each calculation
interval. This point may be equated to a virtual LAO point and displayed, trended, and
so on to check that PDL is operating correctly.
The time arguments in the PDLSET statement must be in ascending order. If these
times are entered as point names, they may be changed by commanding the points,
but ascending order must be preserved and you should not change the end time of the
current interval to a time before the present. Please note that any times on reports are
current, and therefore peaks and consumptions may appear out-of-whack with times if
you do this. The reports store data by setpoint interval, not the times used to define
those intervals.
If setpoint arguments are entered as point names, they may be changed at any time;
however, realize that the reports will reflect only what is current.
PDL sheds loads by issuing an OFF command at PDL priority. If the command is
successful, PDL begins the minimum off and maximum off timers for that load. PDL will
not command the load ON before it minimum off timer has expired. PDL will
automatically turn a load ON once its maximum off timer has expired.
When PDL restores a load, it issues an ON command at PDL priority, waits until the
load’s minimum on time has expired, and then changes the load’s priority to NONE.
Operator commands and PPCL emergency commands can override commands issued
by PDL.
For proper operation, do not set points controlled by PDL to PDL priority by operator
command.
It is a good idea to release any loads under PDL control to priority NONE on return
from power failure. It is the best way to assure that PDL does not lose control of loads
that were in the minimum-on time period when the power failure occurred.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
311 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
Examples of PDL Applications
The following applications are generic examples of implementing PDL. The examples
should only be used for the purpose of learning how the PDL application is
implemented through PPCL. Please contact your Siemens Solution Partner,
Authorized TALON Dealer concerning specific PDL application solutions for your
facility.
Example 1
The system contains five field panels with TALON firmware installed, all of which are
involved with demand limiting. Field panel 1B serves as both a predictor and load
handling field panel; the remaining field panels are load-handling only. Three meter
input points are physically wired to field panel 1B. One physical meter input is wired to
field panel 1A and one physical meter input is wired to field panel 2A. Meter points 1, 2,
and 3 are pulsed inputs (LPACI point type), while meter points 4 and 5 are analog
inputs, reading instantaneous kW.
The following diagram illustrates Example 1:
312 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
Point List
The following table lists the loads that the field panels control:
Field Panel 1A
Field Panel 2A
Field Panel 1AB
Field Panel 2B
Field Panel 3B
FAN01
PUMP01
CHLR01
LITE01
ZONE01
FAN02
PUMP02
CHLR02
LITE02
ZONE02
FAN03
PUMP03
CHLR03
LITE03
ZONE03
FAN04
PUMP04
CHLR04
LITE04
FAN05
LITE05
FAN06
LITE06
FAN07
FAN08
Example PPCL Code
WARNING
This generic program code is intended for the sole purpose of demonstrating how to
set up a Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) application. Do not use the example code
contained in this chapter as a programming template.
If you are new to PDL concepts or to any concept discussed in this chapter, please
contact your Siemens Solution Partner, Authorized TALON Dealer before attempting
to implement PDL in your facility.
Example code for field panel 1A:
50 PDL(1,TKW1A,TGT1A,100,110,1,200,210,1,300,310,1,400,410,1)
100 PDLDAT(FAN01,10,10,60,7.46)
110 PDLDAT(FAN02,10,10,60,7.46)
200 PDLDAT(FAN03,10,10,60,7.46)
210 PDLDAT(FAN04,10,10,60,7.46)
300 PDLDAT(FAN05,10,10,60,7.46)
310 PDLDAT(FAN06,10,10,60,7.46)
400 PDLDAT(FAN07,10,10,60,7.46)
410 PDLDAT(FAN08,10,10,60,7.46)
Example code for field panel 2A:
10 PDL(1,TKW2A,TGT2A,100,120,0,200,200,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
100 PDLDAT(PUMP01,10,20,60,14.92)
110 PDLDAT(PUMP01,10,20,60,14.92)
120 PDLDAT(PUMP01,10,20,60,14.92)
200 PDLDAT(PUMP01,10,20,60,14.92)
Example code for field panel 1B:
5
ONPWRT(10000)
10 VMETER=METER4+METER5
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
313 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
20
PDLMTR(1,30,1,15,2000,1,METER1,200,METER2,150,METER3,100,VMETER,
400)
30 PDLSET(1,EXCEED,KWSET1,06:00,KWSET2,20:00)
40
PDLDPG(1,TKW1A,TGT1A,TKW2A,TGT2A,TKW1B,TGT1B,TKW2B,TGT2B,TKW3B,T
GT3B)
50 PDL(1,TKW1B,TGT1B,100,199,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,400,499,0)
100 PDLDAT(CHLR01,20,30,480,25.0)
400 PDLDAT(CHLR02,20,30,480,25.0)
410 PDLDAT(CHLR03,20,30,480,25.0)
420 PDLDAT(CHLR04,20,30,480,25.0)
…………………
(Rest of program)
……………………
9960 GOTO 12000
9970 C
9980 C
ONPWRT ROUTINE TO RESET DEMAND TARGETS
9990 C
10000 TGT1A=65.0
10010 TGT2A=65.0
10020 TGT1B=110.0
10030 TGT2B=30.0
10040 TGT3B=15.0
10050 C
10060 C
12000 GOTO 5
Example code for field panel 2B:
10 PDL(1,TKW2B,TGT2B,100,199,1,200,299,1,300,399,1,0,0,0)
100 PDLDAT(LITE01,10,10,60,4.0)
110 PDLDAT(LITE02,10,10,60,4.0)
200 PDLDAT(LITE03,10,10,60,4.0)
210 PDLDAT(LITE04,10,10,60,4.0)
300 PDLDAT(LITE05,10,10,60,4.0)
310 PDLDAT(LITE06,10,10,60,4.0)
Example code for field panel 3B:
10 PDL(1,TKW3B,TGT3B,100,199,0,200,299,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)
100 PDLDAT(ZONE01,10,10,60,4.0)
110 PDLDAT(ZONE02,10,10,60,4.0)
200 PDLDAT(ZONE03,10,10,60,4.0)
Application Notes
The following notes apply to the various field panels:
● Notes for Field Panel 1A
● Notes for Field Panel 2A
314 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
●
●
●
Notes for Field Panel 1B
Notes for Field Panel 2B
Notes for Field Panel 3B
Notes for Field Panel 1A
The PDL statement defines the following:
● The meter area is 1.
● The point in which it keeps the total of all the kW values of loads defined under its
control and available for PDL control is TKW1A.
● The point that tells this statement what kW target to maintain is TGT1A.
● The line ranges in which PDLDAT statements define loads in each of four priority
groups are:
– Group 1 between lines 100 and 110 inclusive
– Group 2 between lines 200 and 210 inclusive
– Group 3 between lines 300 and 310 inclusive
– Group 4 between lines 400 and 410 inclusive
The PDLDAT statements define which loads are under the control of the PDL
statement and the time constraints and kW values for each. The shedding mode, fixed
sequence (0) or round robin (1), for each priority group is as follows:
● Group 1: Round Robin
● Group 2: Round Robin
● Group 3: Round Robin
● Group 4: Round Robin
Notes for Field Panel 2A
The PDL statement defines the following:
● The meter area is 1.
● The point in which it keeps the total of all the kW values of loads defined under its
control and available for PDL control is TKW2A.
● The point that tells this statement what kW target to maintain is TGT2A.
● The line ranges in which PDLDAT statements define loads in each of four priority
groups are:
– Group 1 between lines 100 and 120 inclusive
– Group 2 between lines 200 and 200 inclusive
The PDLDAT statements define which loads are under the control of the PDL
statement and the time constraints and kW values for each. The shedding mode, fixed
sequence (0) or round robin (1), for each priority group is:
● Group 1: Fixed Sequence
● Group 2: Fixed Sequence
● Group 3: Does not matter – fixed sequence entered here
● Group 4: Does not matter – fixed sequence entered here
Notes for Field Panel 1B
The point VMETER is a virtual LAO point and stores the sum of analog input meter
points METER4 and METER5. Note that this statement is valid only for meter points of
the analog input point type. For summing LPACI meter input points, see Example 2.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
315 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
The PDLMTR statement defines the following:
● The meter area number is 1.
● The historical weighting factor is 30%.
● The calculation interval is 1 minute.
● The prediction window is 15 minutes.
● The Time vs. Demand section of the PDL Activity report has a full scale of 2000
kW.
● Warning messages are enabled to be sent to alarm devices.
● This meter area has four meters (METER1, METER2, METER3, and VMETER).
Their default values are 200, 150, 100, and 400 kW, respectively.
The PDLSET statement defines the following:
● The meter area is 1 to match the PDLMTR statement.
● The EXCEED virtual LDO point will toggle OFF/ON at the end of setpoint intervals
during which the setpoint was exceeded.
● This meter area has two daily setpoints which have been entered as variables:
KWSET1 and KWSET2. KWSET1 ends at 6:00 A.M. and KWSET2 ends at 8:00
P.M.
The PDLDPG statement:
● The meter area is 1 to match the PDLMTR statement.
● Keeps track of the total available kilowatts by adding the values of TKW1A,
TKW2A, TKW1B, TKW2B, and TKW3B. These are the total kilowatt points from the
PDL statements in field panels 1A, 2A, 1B, 2B, and 3B.
● Issues demand targets to those PDL statements by changing the values of TGT1A,
TGT2A, TGT1B, TGT2B, and TGT3B.
The PDL statement defines the following:
● The meter area is 1.
● The point in which it keeps the total of all the kW values of loads defined under its
control and available for PDL control is TKW1B.
● The point that tells this statement what kW target to maintain is TGT1B.
● The line ranges in which PDLDAT statements define loads in each of four priority
groups are:
– Group 1 between line 100 and 199 inclusive
– Group 2 between line 0 and line 0 has no loads in this group
– Group 3 between line 0 and line 0 has no loads in this group
– Group 4 between lines 400 and 499 inclusive
● The shedding mode, fixed sequence (0) or round robin (1), for each priority group
is:
– Group 1: Fixed
– Group 2: Does not matter – fixed sequence entered here
– Group 3: Does not matter – fixed sequence entered here
– Group 4: Fixed
The PDLDAT statements define which loads are under the control of the PDL
statement and the time constraints and kW values for each.
316 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
NOTE:
The loads CHLR01, CHLR02, CHLR03, and CHLR04 are meant to convey equal
incremental load reductions for a given chiller – not the turning ON/OFF of individual
chillers.
For example, line 400 specifies that the load name is CHLR02 and includes the
following information:
● Minimum ON time is 20 minutes
● Minimum OFF time is 30 minutes
● Maximum OFF time is 480 minutes
● Nominal kW value is 25.0 kW
Notes for Field Panel 2B
The PDL statement defines the following:
● The meter area is 1.
● The point in which it keeps the total of all the kW values of loads defined under its
control and available for PDL control is TKW2B.
● The point that tells this statement what kW target to maintain is TGT2B.
● The line ranges in which PDLDAT statements define loads in each of four priority
groups are:
– Group 1 between lines 100 and 199 inclusive
– Group 2 between lines 200 and 299 inclusive
– Group 3 between lines 300 and 399 inclusive
– Group 4 between lines 0 and 0 inclusive has no loads in this group
The PDLDAT statements define which loads are under the control of the PDL
statement and the time constraints and kW values for each. The shedding mode, fixed
sequence (0), or round robin (1), for each priority group is:
● Group 1: Round Robin
● Group 2: Round Robin
● Group 3: Round Robin
● Group 4: Does not matter—fixed sequence entered here
Notes for Field Panel 3B
The PDL statement defines the following:
● The meter area is 1.
● The point in which it keeps the total of all the kW values of loads defined under its
control and available for PDL control is TKW3B.
● The point that tells this statement what kW target to maintain is TGT3B.
● The line ranges in which PDLDAT statements define loads in each of four priority
groups are:
– Group 1 between lines 100 and 199 inclusive
– Group 1 between lines 200 and 299 inclusive
– Group 1 between lines 0 and 0 inclusive has no loads in this group
– Group 4 between lines 0 and 0 inclusive has no loads in this group
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
317 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
The PDLDAT statements define which loads are under the control of the PDL
statement and the time constraints and kW values for each. The shedding mode, fixed
sequence (0), or round robin (1), for each priority group is:
● Group 1: Fixed Sequence
● Group 2: Fixed Sequence
● Group 3: Does not matter—fixed sequence entered here
● Group 4: Does not matter—fixed sequence entered here
Example 2
Example 2 is identical to Example 1, except that another TALON View workstation has
been added that is connected to Insight 1 by an MLN, and two additional LPACI meter
inputs (point names METER6 and METER7) have been added.
The following diagram illustrates Example 2:
318 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
Point List
The following is a modified list of points for the example program code in field panel
1B:
Point Name
Description
Slope
Intercept
Point Type
LPAC1
Physical pulse accumulator points
representing kWh consumption
N/A
N/A
LPACI
Virtual LAO points representing the
previous kWh value of LPAC1, LPAC2,
LPAC3, LPAC6, and LPAC7
1.0
0.0
Virtual LAO
Calculated total kW serving as PDL meter 1.0
input point
0.0
Virtual LAO
LPAC2
LPAC3
LPAC6
LPAC7
VLAO1
VLAO2
VLAO3
VLAO6
VLAO7
VLAOKW
Additional/Modified for Example PPCL Code in Field Panel 1B
The PPCL required to code the PDL application in this example is identical to that for
Example 1, except that additional PPCL is needed to sum the meter inputs for the
LPACI meter points (METER1, METER2, METER3, METER6, and METER7), and the
PDLMTR statement in field panel 1B must be modified as shown in the following
example. This example also illustrates how this additional code would reside in Field
Panel 1B.
10 C
20 ONPWRT(10000)
30 C
60 C
SAMPLE THE PHYSICAL METER VALUES EVERY MINUTE. THE
SAMPLE
70 C
TIME (IN SECS) MUST MATCH THE CALCULATION INTERVAL
TIME (IN
80 C
MINUTES) IN THE PDLMTR STATEMENT.
90 C
100 SAMPLE (60) GOTO 115
110 GOTO 4000
115 VLAOKW=0.0
120 GOSUB 1040 LPAC1,VLAO1
130 GOSUB 1040 LPAC2,VLAO2
140 GOSUB 1040 LPAC3,VLAO3
150 GOSUB 1040 LPAC6,VLAO6
160 GOSUB 1040 LPAC7,VLAO7
170 VLAO1=LPAC1
180 VLAO2=LPAC2
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
319 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
190 VLAO3=LPAC3
200 VLAO6=LPAC6
210 VLAO7=LPAC7
210 C
220 GOTO 4000
230 C
1000
C ---------------------------------------------------------------------------1010
C
SUBROUTINE TO SUM FIVE (5) LPACI METER INPUTS
INTO ONE VIRTUAL
1020
C
LAO METER INPUT POINT FOR PDL
1030
C ---------------------------------------------------------------------------1040
$LOC1=$ARG1-$ARG2
1050
IF($ARG1.GE.32768.0) THEN $ARG1=$ARG1-32768.0
1060
$ARG2=$ARG1
1070
C
1080
C
IN THE FOLLOWING STATEMENT, "GAIN" REPRESENTS
THE KWH VALUE
1090
C
OF EACH PULSE FROM THE LPACI METER
POINT. HERE, IT IS ASSUMED
1100
C
THAT EACH LPACI METER HAS THE SAME GAIN VALUE.
1110
C
1120
VLAOKW=VLAOKW+$LOC1*GAIN*60.0
1130
RETURN
1140
C
1150
C
1160
C
PEAK DEMAND LIMITING STATEMENTS
1170
C
4000 VMETER=METER4+METER5
4010 PDLMTR(1,30,1,15,2000,1,VMETER,400,VLAOKW,600)
4020 PDLSET(1,EXCEED,KWSET1,06:00,KWSET2,20:00)
4030
PDLDPG(TKW1A,TGT1A,TKW2A,TGT2A,TKW1B,TGT1B,TKW2B,TGT2B,TKW3B,TGT
3B)
4040 PDL(1,TKW1B,TGT1B,4100,4199,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,4400,4499,0)
4100 PDLDAT(CHLR01,20,30,480,25.0)
4400 PDLDAT(CHLR02,20,30,480,25.0)
4410 PDLDAT(CHLR03,20,30,480,25.0)
4420 PDLDAT(CHLR04,20,30,480,25.0)
4430 C
……………………………………
(Rest of program)
……………………………………
9960 GOTO 12000
9970 C
9980 C
ONPWRT ROUTINE TO RESET DEMAND TARGETS
320 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Chapter 10—Peak Demand Limiting (PDL)
Examples of PDL Applications
9990
10000
10010
10020
10030
10040
10050
12000
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
C
TGT1A=65.0
TGT2A=65.0
TGT1B=110.0
TGT2B=30.0
TGT3B=15.0
C
GOTO 20
User's Manual
321 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Changes To HMI Prompting For BACnet/IP
Appendix A—Point Types
This section includes examples of adding each point type into the field panel. For more
information on point types and attributes, see the Point Database section.
CAUTION
When working on a network with multiple firmware revisions, always connect to the
operator interface at the field panel with the newest firmware revision. Otherwise, you
cannot view features in newer firmware revisions, or the field panel may coldstart.
Changes To HMI Prompting For BACnet/IP
BACnet/IP uses an Instance Number to identify points, and replaces standard and
enhanced alarming. An example of BACnet prompting is shown in Adding a Logical
Analog Output Point [➙ 322] in this section.
Changes To HMI Prompting For Super Universal
Points
Some points on TX-I/O Super Universal modules can be configured as either voltage
(V) or current (I), Examples of TX-I/O prompting are shown in Adding a Logical Analog
Output Point [➙ 322] and Adding a Logical Analog Input Point [➙ 324].
Adding a Logical Analog Output Point
This procedure adds a Logical Analog Output (LAO) point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● Relinquish default
● Point Alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Slope/Intercept values
● Point type
● Engineering units
● Addressing information
● COV limit
The information varies, depending on the type of point you add.
Adding a Logical Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point , Edit, Add)
322 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Analog Output Point
Prompt/Field
Option/Entry
Description
Specify the initial value.
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LAO point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LAO point to a BACnet device:
>Point system name
: damper----------------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: damper----------------------->Point type
: lao-->Descriptor
: damper--------->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: f
>Number of decimal places
: 1
>Engineering units
: pct---->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>Notification ID
: 1----->Alarm Message number
: 2->High limit
: 80--------------->Low limit
: 20--------------->Deadband
: 1---------------->TimeDelay (sec)
: 2----->Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: p
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 0-> Point
: 9--->Slope
: .0039------------>Intercept
: 0---------------->COV limit
: 1---------------->Relinquish Default
: 0---------------->Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
The following example shows how to add an LAO current point to a TX-I/O module.
The additional entry, Signal type, is in bold text.
>Point system name
>Instance Number
>Point name
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
:
:
damper-----------------------------damper-----------------------323 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Analog Input Point
>Point type
: lao-->Descriptor
: damper--------->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: f
>Number of decimal places
: 1
>Engineering units
: pct---->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>Notification ID
: 1----->Alarm Message number
: 2->High limit
: 80--------------->Low limit
: 20--------------->Deadband
: 1---------------->TimeDelay (sec)
: 2----->Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: p
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 0-> Point
: 9---> Signal Type
: I
>Slope
: .0039------------>Intercept
: 0---------------->COV limit
: 1---------------->Relinquish Default
: 0---------------->Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Adding a Logical Analog Input Point
This procedure adds a Logical Analog Input (LAI) point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● Sensor type
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Slope/Intercept values
● Point type
● Engineering units
● Addressing information
● COV limit
324 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Analog Input Point
Adding an LAI Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LAI point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LAI point to a BACnet/IP field panel:
>Point system name
: temp------------------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: temp------------------------->Point type
: lai-->Descriptor
: roomtemp------->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: f
>Number of decimal places
: 1
>Engineering units
: deg f-->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>Notification ID
: 1----->Alarm Message number
: 2->High limit
: 80--------------->Low limit
: 70--------------->Deadband
: 1---------------->TimeDelay (sec)
: 50---->Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: p
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 0-> Point
: 17--->Sensor type
: ?
> 1) I ( Current )
> 2) V ( Voltage )
> 3) P ( Pneumatic )
> 4) T ( Thermistor 100K )
> 5) O ( Thermistor 10K )
> 6) S ( Thermistor 10K Type 3 )
> 7) M ( RTD 1K Platinum 375 )
> 8) R ( RTD 1K Platinum 385 )
> 9) N ( RTD 1K Nickel )
> 10) J ( RTD 1K Nickel JCI )
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
325 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Analog Input Point
> 11) D ( RTD 1K Nickel DIN )
> 12) L ( L-Type )
> 13) C ( Custom )
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel>
>Slope
:
>Intercept
:
>COV limit
:
Command successful
100065104---------0----------------1-----------------
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
The following example shows how to add an LAI voltage point to a TX-I/O module. The
additional entry, Signal type, is in bold text.
>Point system name
: temp------------------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: temp------------------------->Point type
: lai-->Descriptor
: roomtemp------->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: f
>Number of decimal places
: 1
>Engineering units
: deg f-->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: y
>Notification ID
: 1----->Alarm Message number
: 2->High limit
: 80--------------->Low limit
: 70--------------->Deadband
: 1---------------->TimeDelay (sec)
: 50---->Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: p
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 0-> Point
: 17--->Signal type
: V
>Sensor type
: ?
> 1) I ( Current )
> 2) V ( Voltage )
> 3) P ( Pneumatic )
> 4) T ( Thermistor 100K )
> 5) O ( Thermistor 10K )
326 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Analog Input Point
> 6) S ( Thermistor 10K Type 3 )
> 7) M ( RTD 1K Platinum 375 )
> 8) R ( RTD 1K Platinum 385 )
> 9) N ( RTD 1K Nickel )
> 10) J ( RTD 1K Nickel JCI )
> 11) D ( RTD 1K Nickel DIN )
> 12) L ( L-Type )
> 13) C ( Custom )
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 1>Slope
: 00065104--------->Intercept
: 0---------------->COV limit
: 1----------------Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Adding an LAI Point to a Compact Series Controller
Before beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● Sensor type
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Slope/Intercept values
● Point type
● Engineering units
● Addressing information
● COV limit
To add an LAI point, complete the following steps:
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LAI point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LAI point to a TC Compact Controller:
>Point system name
: LAI EXAMPLE------------------>Point name
: LAI EXAMPLE------------------>Point type
: LAI-->Descriptor
: EXAMPLE LAI PT->Float, Integer, Time, Date, dAte-time: F
>Number of decimal places
: 2
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
327 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Pulsed Accumulator Point
>Engineering units
: UNITS>Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>Enhanced alarms (Y/N)
: N
>Print alarms (Y/N)
: Y
>Alarm count 2 (Y/N)
: N
>Normal ack enabled (Y/N)
: N
>High limit
: 90--------------->Low limit
: 60--------------->Totalize (Y/N)
: Y
>Totalize in Hours, Minutes, Seconds: M
>Field panel
: 1->Physical, Virtual Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 23> Point
: 1--->Sensor type
: ?
> 1) I ( Current )
> 2) V ( Voltage )
> 3) P ( Pneumatic )
> 4) T ( Thermistor 100K )
> 5) O ( Thermistor 10K )
> 6) S ( Thermistor 10K Type 3 )
> 7) M ( RTD 1K Platinum 375 )
> 8) R ( RTD 1K Platinum 385 )
> 9) N ( RTD 1K Nickel )
> 10) J ( RTD 1K Nickel JCI )
> 11) D ( RTD 1K Nickel DIN )
> 12) L ( L-Type )
> 13) C ( Custom )
Enter option # or <C> for Cancel> 4>Wire resistance adjustment
: -4.3244423------->Slope
: 1---------------->Intercept
: 0---------------->Dynamic COV limit (Y/N)
: N
>COV limit
: 2----------------Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Adding a Logical Pulsed Accumulator Point
This procedure adds a Logical Pulsed Accumulator (LPACI) point to the database.
Before beginning this procedure, identify the following:
328 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Pulsed Accumulator Point
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Point name information
Descriptor
Access groups
Gain value
Point alarm information
Point value type
COV limit
Count both edges?
Point type
Engineering units
Address information
Adding an LPACI Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LPACI point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
>Point system name
:
>Instance Number
:
>Point name
:
>Point type
:
>Descriptor
:
>Engineering units
:
>Access group(s)
:
--------->Alarmable (Y/N)
:
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) :
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
:
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
:
>Notification ID
:
>Alarm Message number
:
>High limit
:
>Deadband
:
>TimeDelay (sec)
:
>Field panel
:
>Physical, Virtual Point address:
> FLN
:
> Drop
:
> Point
:
>Gain
:
>Count both edges (Y/N)
:
>COV limit
:
Command successful
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
Pulse acc--------------------------Pulse acc--------------------lpaci---------------kW h---------------------------------y
y
y
y
1-----2-50000------------0----------------0-----------p
0-0-8---10---------------n
10----------------
329 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Digital Output Point
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Adding a Logical Digital Output Point
This procedure adds a Logical Digital Output (LDO) point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● Inverted value information
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Point type
● Engineering units
● State text
Adding an LDO Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LDO point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LDO point:
>Point system name
:
>Instance Number
:
>Point name
:
>Point type
:
>Descriptor
:
>State text table
:
>Access group(s)
:
--------->Alarmable (Y/N)
:
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) :
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
:
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
:
>Notification ID
:
>Alarm Message number
:
>Totalize (Y/N)
:
>Field panel
:
>Physical, Virtual Point address:
> FLN
:
330 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
LDO EXAMPLE------------------------LDO EXAMPLE------------------LDO--EXAMPLE LDO PT-----------------------------------------------------------y
y
y
y
2-----4-y
------p
1--
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Digital Input Point
> Drop
> Point
> Invert value (Y/N)
Command successful
:
:
:
2-3---n
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit?
Adding a Logical Digital Input Point
This procedure adds a Logical Digital Input (LDI) point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text information
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Addressing information
● Point type
● Inverted value
● Delay value
● Normally Open/Closed
Adding an LDI Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LDI point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LDI point:
>Point system name
>Instance Number
>Point name
>Point type
>Descriptor
>State text table
>Access group(s)
--------->Alarmable (Y/N)
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
>Notification ID
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LDI EXAMPLE------------------------LDI EXAMPLE------------------LDI--EXAMPLE LDI PT------------------------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
Y
Y
Y
Y
4-----331 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical 2-State Latched Point
>Alarm Message number
: 2->Totalize (Y/N)
: Y
>Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: 2-> Point
: 5---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: Y
Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Adding a Logical 2-State Latched Point
This procedure adds a Logical 2-State Latched (L2SL) point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Delay value
● Point type
● Addressing information
● Inverted commanding
● Proof information
Adding a L2SL Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the L2SL point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an L2SL point:
>Point system name
>Instance Number
>Point name
>Point type
>Descriptor
>State text table
>Access group(s)
---------332 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L2SL EXAMPLE-----------------------L2SL EXAMPLE-----------------L2SL-EXAMPLE L2SL PT-----------------------------------------------------------
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical 2-State Pulsed Point
>Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: N
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>Notification ID
: 3----->Alarm Message number
: 2->Totalize (Y/N)
: Y
>Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual ON OFF Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: 3-> Point
: 1---> Invert value (Y/N)
: N
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: 2-> Point
: 2---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: N
> Proof delay (seconds)
: 20--Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Adding a Logical 2-State Pulsed Point
This procedure adds a Logical 2-State Pulsed point to the database. Before beginning
this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Totalization information
● Delay value
● Point type
● Addressing information
Adding an L2SP Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the L2SP point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
333 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Latched Point
Example
The following example shows how to add an L2SP point:
>Point system name
: L2SP EXAMPLE----------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: L2SP EXAMPLE----------------->Point type
: L2SP->Descriptor
: EXAMPLE L2SP PT>State text table
: ----------------------------->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : N
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>Notification ID
: 1----->Alarm Message number
: 2->Totalize (Y/N)
: Y
>Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual ON Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 4-> Point
: 2--->Physical, Virtual OFF Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 5-> Point
: 2--->Proof (Y/N)
: Y
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 6-> Point
: 2---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: Y
> Proof delay (seconds)
: 10--Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Latched Point
This procedure adds a Logical ON/OFF/AUTO Latched (LOOAL) point to the database.
Before beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text
● Point alarm information
334 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Latched Point
●
●
●
●
●
●
Point value type
Proof information
Delay value
Point type
Addressing information
Inverted commanding
Adding an LOOAL Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LOOAL point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LOOAL point:
>Point system name
: LOOAL EXAMPLE---------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: LOOAL EXAMPLE---------------->Point type
: LOOAL>Descriptor
: EXAMPLE LOOAL PT
>State text table
: ----------------------------->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>Notification ID
: ------>Alarm Message number
: 2->Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual ON OFF Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: 1-> Point
: 1---> Invert value (Y/N)
: N
>Physical, Virtual AUTO Point address: >Physical, Virtual AUTO Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: 1-> Point
: 2---> Invert value (Y/N)
: N
>Proof (Y/N)
: Y
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: 2-Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
335 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Pulsed Point
> Point
> Normally closed (Y/N)
> Proof delay (seconds)
Command successful
:
:
:
1---N
30---
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? -
Adding a Logical ON-OFF-AUTO Pulsed Point
This procedure adds a Logical ON/OFF/AUTO Pulsed point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Proof information
● Delay value
● Point type
● Addressing information
● Inverted commanding
Adding an LOOAP Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LOOAP point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LOOAP point:
>Point system name
>Instance Number
>Point name
>Point type
>Descriptor
>State text table
>Access group(s)
--------->Alarmable (Y/N)
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
>Notification ID
>Alarm Message number
336 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LOOAP EXAMPLE----------------------LOOAP EXAMPLE----------------LOOAPEXAMPLE LOOAP PT
-----------------------------------------------------------
:
:
:
:
:
:
Y
Y
Y
Y
4-----2--
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Latched Point
>Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual ON Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 32> Point
: 1--->Physical, Virtual OFF Point address: P
> FLN
: 1-> Drop
: --> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 32> Point
: 2--->Physical, Virtual AUTO Point address: > Point
: 1--->Physical, Virtual AUTO Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 32> Point
: 3---> Invert value (Y/N)
: Y
>Proof (Y/N)
: Y
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 32> Point
: 4---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: N
> Proof delay (seconds)
: 30--Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Latched Point
This procedure adds a Logical FAST/SLOW/STOP Latched (LFSSL) point to the
database. Before beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Proof information
● Delay value
● Point type
● Addressing information
● Inverted commanding
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
337 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Latched Point
Adding an LFSSL Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LFSSL point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LFSSL point:
>Point system name
: LFSSL EXAMPLE---------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: LFSSL EXAMPLE---------------->Point type
: LFSSL>Descriptor
: EXAMPLE LFSSL PT
>State text table
: ----------------------------->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>Notification ID
: 8----->Alarm Message number
: 1->Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual FAST Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 35> Point
: 1---> Invert value (Y/N)
: Y
>Physical, Virtual SLOW Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 35> Point
: 2---> Invert value (Y/N)
: Y
>Proof (Y/N)
: Y
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 36> Point
: 1---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: N
> Proof delay (seconds)
: 30--Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
338 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Pulsed Point
Adding a Logical FAST-SLOW-STOP Pulsed Point
This procedure adds a Logical FAST/SLOW/STOP Pulsed (LFSSP) point to the
database. Before beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Access groups
● State text
● Point alarm information
● Point value type
● Proof information
● Delay value
● Point type
● Addressing information
● Inverted commanding
Adding an LFSSP Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LFSSP point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add an LFSSP point:
>Point system name
: LFSSP EXAMPLE---------------->Instance Number
: ------>Point name
: LFSSP EXAMPLE---------------->Point type
: LFSSP>Descriptor
: EXAMPLE LFSSP PT
>State text table
: ----------------------------->Access group(s)
: -------------------------------------->Alarmable (Y/N)
: Y
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) : Y
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
: Y
>Notification ID
: 8----->Alarm Message number
: 14>Field panel
: ------>Physical, Virtual STOP Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 37> Point
: 1--->Physical, Virtual FAST Point address: P
> FLN
: 0--
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
339 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Enumerated Point
> Drop
: 37> Point
: 2--->Physical, Virtual SLOW Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 38> Point
: 1--->Proof (Y/N)
: Y
>Physical, Virtual Proof Point address: P
> FLN
: 0-> Drop
: 39> Point
: 1---> Normally closed (Y/N)
: Y
> Proof delay (seconds)
: 30--Command successful
>Add, Modify, Copy, Delete, Look, Quit? –
Adding a Logical Enumerated Point
This procedure adds a Logical enumerated (LENUM) point to the database. Before
beginning this procedure, identify the following:
● Point name information
● Descriptor
● Addressing information
● Point alarm information
● Access groups
● Relinquish default information
● Point type
● State text
Adding a LENUM Point
HMI
P, E, A (Point, Edit, Add)
The system begins prompting for the attributes of the LENUM point type.
See the Point Type Attributes [➙ 145] topic in the Point Database section concerning
specific point attributes and values.
Example
The following example shows how to add a LENUM point:
>Point system name
>Instance Number
>Point name
>Point type
>Descriptor
>State text table
340 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
:
:
:
:
:
:
LENUM EXAMPLE----------------------LENUM EXAMPLE----------------LENUM---------------------------------------------
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix A—Point Types
Adding a Logical Enumerated Point
>Access group(s)
:
--------->Alarmable (Y/N)
:
>OFFNORMAL event enabled (Y/N) :
>NORMAL event enabled (Y/N)
:
>FAULT event enabled (Y/N)
:
>Notification ID
:
>Alarm Message number
:
>Alarm value
:
>Add another level (Y/N)
:
>Field panel
:
>Physical, Virtual Point address:
> FLN
:
> Drop
:
> Point
:
>Relinquish Default
:
Command successful
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
-----------------------------Y
Y
Y
Y
9-----2-1------N
------P
0-2-2---DAY-----
341 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
The following report lists the default state text tables that reside in a field panel:
>Point, Application, Time, Message, Cancel, System, passWord,
Bye? s
>Diagnostics, Users, dSt, Bacnet, Error_msgs, Hardware, Text,
Quit? h
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? d
>State text table name : ----------------------------->Here, Printer : H
02/13/2006 MON
STATE TEXT TABLE
REPORT
03:46
------------------------------------------------------------------------Search for <*>
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------ACTIVE_NTRAL
<default>
2
ACTIVE
NTRAL
0
1
ALARM_NORMAL
ALARM
NORMAL
AO
DO
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
AUTO_LEAD
AUTO
LEAD
0
1
AUTO_MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
Building Technologies
2
0
1
AO_DO
342 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------AUTO_OFF
<default>
2
AUTO
OFF
0
1
4AUTO_ON
<default>
AUTO
ON
0
1
AUX_DP_LOC_T
HOT_DUCT
DSCH_DCT
AVERGE
NEARST
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
AVERGE_NEARST
BACnet Fast Slow
Stop
STOP
SLOW
FAST
2
0
1
<default>
3
1
2
3
BACnet Multistate
Value
<default>
NIGHT
DAY
SPECIAL2
SPECIAL3
SPECIAL4
SPECIAL5
1
2
3
4
5
6
BACnet On Off
Auto
OFF
ON
AUTO
1
2
3
6
<default>
User's Manual
3
343 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_AUX_DP_LOC_T
<default>
2
HOT_DUCT
DSCH_DCT
1
2
BACnet_BOOLEAN
FALSE
TRUE
OFF
START
RUN
PRESHUTD
SERVICE
<default>
5
<default>
7
<default>
3
<default>
5
1
2
3
4
5
BACnet_DAYS_OF_WEEK_T
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACnet_DEFROST_MODE_T
AMBIENT
FORCED
SYNC
1
2
3
BACnet_DEFROST_STATE_T
STANDBY
PUMPDOWN
DEFROST
DRAINDWN
INJ_DLY
Building Technologies
2
1
2
BACnet_CHILLER_T
344 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
1
2
3
4
5
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_DEFROST_TERM_T
TEMP
TIME
FIRST
LAST
<default>
4
<default>
17
<default>
5
<default>
3
1
2
3
4
BACnet_DISABLE_TYPE_T
NONE
BYPASS
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DO1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
NVI_DIS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
4
BACnet_DISCRETE_LEVELS_T
OFF
LOW
MED
HIGH
ON
1
2
3
4
5
BACnet_DP_RANGE_T
DP2_INWC
DP1_INWC
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
1
2
User's Manual
345 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
DP_HALF
3
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_ECON_CONTROL_T
NONE
MAT
DAT
INTLK
NORMAL
PRESS
DEPRESS
PURGE
SHUTDOWN
FIRE
<default>
6
<default>
3
<default>
3
<default>
4
<default>
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
BACnet_EVAP_T
NO_CLG
COOLING
EMER_CLG
1
2
3
BACnet_EVENT_MODE_TYPE_T
LIST_END
SCENE
MODE
1
2
3
BACnet_FAN_COEF_SEL_T
CUSTOM
TYPE_3
TYPE_5
TYPE_7
1
2
3
4
BACnet_FIRE_INDICATOR_T
UNDEF
STROBE_U
STROBE_S
Building Technologies
4
1
2
3
4
BACnet_EMERG_T
346 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
1
2
3
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
HORN
4
CHIME
5
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BELL
6
SOUNDER
7
SPEAKER
8
UNIVERSL
9
BACnet_FIRE_TEST_T
NORMAL
RESET
TEST
NOTEST
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
AVERAGE
<default>
3
<default>
10
1
2
3
BACnet_HVAC_HVT_T
GENERIC
FAN_COIL
VAV
HEATPUMP
ROOFTOP
UNITVENT
CHILCEIL
RADIATOR
AHU
SELFCONT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BACnet_HVAC_OVERID_T
OFF
POSITION
FLOW_VAL
FLOW_PCT
OPEN
CLOSE
Building Technologies
4
1
2
3
4
BACnet_FNC_SELECT_T
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
<default>
49
1
2
3
4
5
6
User's Manual
347 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
MINIMUM
7
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------MAXIMUM
UNUSED8
UNUSED9
UNUSED10
UNUSED11
UNUSED12
UNUSED13
UNUSED14
UNUSED15
UNUSED16
POS_1
FLOWVAL1
FLOWPCT1
OPEN1
CLOSE1
MINIMUM1
MAXIMUM1
UNUSED24
UNUSED25
UNUSED26
UNUSED27
UNUSED28
UNUSED29
UNUSED30
UNUSED31
UNUSED32
POS_2
FLOWVAL2
FLOWPCT2
OPEN2
CLOSE2
MINIMUM2
MAXIMUM2
UNUSED40
UNUSED41
Table name
states
State
348 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Table ID
# of
Value
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------UNUSED42
43
UNUSED43
44
UNUSED44
45
UNUSED45
46
UNUSED46
47
UNUSED47
48
UNUSED48
49
BACnet_HVAC_T
<default>
AUTO
HEAT
WARMUP
COOL
NGT_PURG
PRE_COOL
OFF
TEST
EMERHEAT
FAN_ONLY
FREECOOL
ICE
MAX_HEAT
ECONOMY
DEHUMID
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BACnet_OBJECT_REQUEST_T
NORMAL
DISABLED
UPDATE_S
SELFTEST
UPDATE_A
REPTMASK
OVERRIDE
ENABLE
REMVOVRD
CLRSTAT
<default>
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------CLRALARM
11
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
349 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
ALNVYENA
ALNVYDIS
MANUAL
REMOTE
PROGRAM
CLRRESET
RESET
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
BACnet_OCCUP_T
OCC
UNOCC
BYPASS
STANDBY
<default>
4
<default>
3
<default>
12
1
2
3
4
BACnet_OVERRIDE_T
RETAIN
SPECIFY
DEFAULT
1
2
3
BACnet_PRIORITY_LEVEL_T
LEVEL_0
LEVEL_1
LEVEL_2
LEVEL_3
PR_1
PR_2
PR_3
PR_4
PR_6
PR_8
PR_10
PR_16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_RESET_SRC_T
<default>
5
NONE
RETURN
SPACE
350 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
1
2
3
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
OA_TEMP
PERCENT
4
5
BACnet_SCENE_T
RECALL
LEARN
DISPLAY
GRP_OFF
GP_ON
STAT_OFF
STAT_ON
STAT_MIX
GRP_STAT
FLICK
TIMEOUT
TMO_FLK
DELAYOFF
DLA_FLK
DELAYON
ENA_GRP
DIS_GRP
CLEANON
CLEANOFF
WINK
RESET
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
<default>
24
<default>
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
BACnet_SERIES_PARL_T
SERIES
1
PARALLEL
2
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_SETTING_T
<default>
6
OFF
ON
DOWN
UP
STOP
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
1
2
3
4
5
User's Manual
351 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
STATE
6
BACnet_SOURCE_TYPE_T
STAT_TMP
STAT_SPT
PVI_TEMP
PVI_PCT
NVI_TEMP
NVI_PCT
PID
MAP
COMPARE
NCI_TEMP
NCI_PCT
AIRFLOW
<default>
12
<default>
3
<default>
3
<default>
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BACnet_SRC_TMP_LOC_T
NONE
COLD_DCT
HOT_DUCT
1
2
3
BACnet_TEMP_SOURCE_T
RETURN
SPACE
FIXED
1
2
3
BACnet_THERM_MODE_T
NO_CTL
1
IN_OUT
2
MODULATE
3
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_T_CONTACT
<default>
2
NRM_OPEN
NRM_CLOS
1
2
BACnet_T_DO_OFFSET
NRM_OFF
352 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
<default>
2
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NRM_ON
2
BACnet_T_UNVT_AIR_TERMINAL
NO_FAN
SERIES
PARALLEL
<default>
3
<default>
2
<default>
4
<default>
5
<default>
2
1
2
3
BACnet_T_UNVT_COIL_CONTROL
VALVE
BYP_DMPR
1
2
BACnet_T_UNVT_DEVICE_MODE
MODULATE
CYCLE
OFF
ON
1
2
3
4
BACnet_T_UNVT_ENERGY_TYPE
ELECTRIC
HOTWATER
STEAM
CHILLWTR
OUT_AIR
1
2
3
4
5
BACnet_T_UNVT_SWITCH_METHOD
DEADBAND
PWM
1
2
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------BACnet_UNVT_UNIT_T
<default>
2
TEMP
PERCENT
1
2
BLEED_HOLD
<default>
BLEED
HOLD
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
2
0
1
User's Manual
353 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
BOOLEAN
FALSE
TRUE
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
6
<default>
2
0
1
BRINE_COMFRT
BRINE
COMFRT
0
1
CAL_RECAL
CAL
RECAL
0
1
CAV_VAV
CAV
VAV
0
1
CHILLER_T
OFF
START
RUN
PRESHUTD
SERVICE
NUL
0
1
2
3
4
255
CLEAN_DIRTY
CLEAN
DIRTY
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------CLEAR_LATCH
<default>
2
CLEAR
LATCH
0
1
CLEAR_RESET
<default>
CLEAR
354 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
2
0
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
RESET
1
CLG_HTG
CLG
HTG
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
CLOSED_ON
CLOSED
ON
0
1
CLOSED_OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
0
1
CLRBIT_EXTFLT
CLRBIT
EXTFLT
0
1
CLRBIT_RESET
CLRBIT
RESET
0
1
CNSTNT_VARBLE
CNSTNT
VARBLE
0
1
COLD_HOT
COLD
HOT
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------COOLNG_HEATNG
<default>
2
COOLNG
HEATNG
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
0
1
User's Manual
355 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
COOL_HEAT
COOL
HEAT
<default>
2
<default>
3
<default>
10
<default>
4
<default>
3
0
1
CR_ALARMSTATE1
0
1
7
0
1
7
CR_CHILLERSTAT1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CR_CONTROLMODE1
0
2
3
15
0
2
3
15
CR_CONTROLMODE2
0
0
2
2
3
3
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------CR_CONTROLMODE3
<default>
1
2
3
356 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
8
1
2
3
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
CR_CONTROLMODE4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
<default>
8
<default>
3
<default>
70
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CR_CONTROLTYPE1
1
2
3
1
2
3
CR_CURRENTALARM1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
357 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
358 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
CR_CURRENTALARM2
<default>
77
1
1
2
2
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
359 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
360 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
----------------------------------------------------------------------CR_CURRENTMODE1
<default>
18
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CR_DMDLMTSTAT1
<default>
0
1
2
3
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
5
0
1
2
3
User's Manual
361 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
4
4
CR_ERRORCODES
<default>
12
1
1
2
2
3
3
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
CR_LOADSHEDSTAT1
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
<default>
4
<default>
14
0
1
2
3
CR_RUNSTATUS1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Building Technologies
3
0
1
2
CR_OVRDSTATUS1
362 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
9
10
11
12
13
9
10
11
12
13
CR_RUNSTATUS2
<default>
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------CR_RUNSTATUS3
<default>
3
0
1
3
0
1
3
CR_RUNSTATUS4
<default>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CR_RUNSTATUS5
<default>
0
1
2
3
4
5
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
12
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
User's Manual
363 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
6
7
6
7
CURENT_DELTPP
CURENT
DELTPP
<default>
2
<default>
8
0
1
DAYS_OF_WEEK_T
SUN
0
MON
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------TUE
2
WED
3
THU
4
FRI
5
SAT
6
NUL
255
DAY_NIGHT
<default>
DAY
NIGHT
0
1
Default
L2SL
<default>
OFF
ON
<default>
OFF
ON
2
0
1
Default
LDI
<default>
OFF
ON
Building Technologies
2
0
1
Default
L2SP
364 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
2
2
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
Default
LDO
<default>
OFF
ON
2
0
1
Default
LENUM
<default>
NIGHT
DAY
SPECIAL2
SPECIAL3
SPECIAL4
SPECIAL5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------Default
LFSSL
<default>
3
STOP
SLOW
FAST
0
1
2
Default
LFSSP
<default>
STOP
SLOW
FAST
0
1
2
Default
LOOAL
<default>
OFF
ON
AUTO
<default>
OFF
ON
Building Technologies
3
0
1
2
Default
LOOAP
Siemens Industry, Inc.
3
3
0
1
User's Manual
365 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
AUTO
2
DEFROST_MODE_T
AMBIENT
FORCED
SYNC
NUL
<default>
4
<default>
6
0
1
2
255
DEFROST_STATE_T
STANDBY
PUMPDOWN
DEFROST
DRAINDWN
INJ_DLY
NUL
0
1
2
3
4
255
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------DEFROST_TERM_T
<default>
5
TEMP
TIME
FIRST
LAST
NUL
0
1
2
3
255
DIRECT_REVRSE
DIRECT
REVRSE
DISABLED
ENABLED
<default>
2
<default>
17
0
1
DISABLE_TYPE_T
NONE
BYPASS
DI1
DI2
Building Technologies
2
0
1
DISABLED_ENABLED
366 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
NVI_DIS
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------DISABL_ENABL
<default>
2
DISABL
ENABLE
0
1
DISCRETE_LEVELS_T
OFF
LOW
MED
HIGH
ON
NUL
DISPRS
AMBENT
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
3
0
1
DONE_READY
DONE
READY
0
1
DP_RANGE_T
DP2_INWC
Building Technologies
6
0
1
2
3
4
255
DISPRS_AMBENT
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
User's Manual
367 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
DP1_INWC
DP_HALF
1
2
ECON_CONTROL_T
NONE
MAT
DAT
INTLK
<default>
4
<default>
2
0
1
2
3
ECON_VENT
ECON
VENT
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------EMERG_T
<default>
7
NORMAL
PRESS
DEPRESS
PURGE
SHUTDOWN
FIRE
NUL
0
1
2
3
4
5
255
ENABLE_DISABL
ENABLE
DISABL
ENGLSH
SI
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
ENG_SI
ENG
SI
Building Technologies
2
0
1
ENGLSH_SI
368 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
EQS_OFF_ON
OFF
ON
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
4
0
1
ETS_STE
ETS
STE
0
1
EVAP_T
NO_CLG
COOLING
EMER_CLG
NUL
0
1
2
255
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------EVENT_MODE_TYPE_T
<default>
4
LIST_END
SCENE
MODE
NUL
0
1
2
255
EXTRNL_CHLR
EXTRNL
CHLR
False
True
<default>
2
<default>
4
0
1
FAN_COEF_SEL_T
CUSTOM
TYPE_3
TYPE_5
TYPE_7
Building Technologies
2
0
1
FALSE_TRUE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
User's Manual
369 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
FAULT_OK
FAULT
OK
<default>
2
<default>
8
0
1
FIRE_EST_STATUS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------FIRE_INDICATOR_T
<default>
10
UNDEF
STROBE_U
STROBE_S
HORN
CHIME
BELL
SOUNDER
SPEAKER
UNIVERSL
NUL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
255
FIRE_MXL_STATUS
0
1
2
4
8
0
1
Building Technologies
5
<default>
5
0
1
2
4
8
FIRE_SIMPLEX4100
370 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
2
5
6
2
5
6
FIRE_TEST_T
NORMAL
RESET
TEST
NOTEST
NUL
<default>
5
<default>
2
0
1
2
3
255
FIXED_AUTO
FIXED
0
AUTO
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------FIXED_VARBLE
<default>
2
FIXED
VARBLE
0
1
FLOAT_SPRING
FLOAT
SPRING
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
AVERAGE
<default>
3
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
2
FORWRD_REVRSE
FORWRD
REVRSE
0
1
FOUR_TWO
FOUR
TWO
Building Technologies
2
0
1
FNC_SELECT_T
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
371 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
FULL_LIMTED
FULL
LIMTED
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
FWD_REV
FWD
REV
0
1
GAUGE_PSI
GAUGE
PSI
0
1
GERMAN_ENGLSH
GERMAN
0
ENGLSH
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------HAND_AUTO
<default>
2
HAND
AUTO
0
1
HIGH_LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
NORMAL
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
HOLD_FILL
HOLD
FILL
0
1
HOT_COLD
HOT
Building Technologies
2
0
1
HIGH_NORMAL
372 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
COLD
1
HVAC_HVT_T
<default>
GENERIC
FAN_COIL
VAV
HEATPUMP
ROOFTOP
UNITVENT
CHILCEIL
RADIATOR
AHU
SELFCONT
NUL
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
255
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------HVAC_OVERID_T
<default>
50
OFF
POSITION
FLOW_VAL
FLOW_PCT
OPEN
CLOSE
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
UNUSED8
UNUSED9
UNUSED10
UNUSED11
UNUSED12
UNUSED13
UNUSED14
UNUSED15
UNUSED16
POS_1
FLOWVAL1
FLOWPCT1
OPEN1
CLOSE1
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
User's Manual
373 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
MINIMUM1
22
MAXIMUM1
23
UNUSED24
24
UNUSED25
25
UNUSED26
26
UNUSED27
27
UNUSED28
28
UNUSED29
29
UNUSED30
30
UNUSED31
31
UNUSED32
32
POS_2
33
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------FLOWVAL2
34
FLOWPCT2
35
OPEN2
36
CLOSE2
37
MINIMUM2
38
MAXIMUM2
39
UNUSED40
40
UNUSED41
41
UNUSED42
42
UNUSED43
43
UNUSED44
44
UNUSED45
45
UNUSED46
46
UNUSED47
47
UNUSED48
48
NUL
255
HVAC_T
<default>
AUTO
HEAT
WARMUP
COOL
NGT_PURG
PRE_COOL
OFF
TEST
EMERHEAT
FAN_ONLY
374 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
FREECOOL
ICE
MAX_HEAT
ECONOMY
DEHUMID
NUL
10
11
12
13
14
255
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------HW_ELEC
<default>
2
HW
ELEC
0
1
INACTIVE_ACTIVE
INACTIVE
ACTIVE
INACTV
ACTIVE
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
LEAD_AUTO
LEAD
AUTO
0
1
LOCAL_NET
LOCAL
NET
0
1
LOCAL_REMOTE
LOCAL
REMOTE
0
1
LOW_HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Building Technologies
2
0
1
INACTV_ACTIVE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
375 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
LOW_NORMAL
LOW
NORMAL
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
LOW_STNDRD
LOW
STNDRD
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------LO_HI
<default>
2
LO
HI
0
1
LT_51S_TO255
LT_51S
TO255
LVWTR
RETWTR
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
3
0
1
MANUAL_AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO
0
1
MASTER_SLAVE
MASTER
SLAVE
0
1
MC_CHLR_LDLGSP
MSTLEAD
SLVLEAD
AUTO
Building Technologies
2
0
1
LVWTR_RETWTR
376 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
MC_CHLR_LDLGSSP
<default>
SUNDAY
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNSDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------MC_CHLR_LDLGST
<default>
4
BOTHOFF
LEADON
LAGON
BOTHON
0
1
2
3
MC_CHLR_OPMODE
STOP
NETWORK
IDLE
RUN
MANUNOCC
MANOCC
MANFAN
MANOFF
AUTO
<default>
5
<default>
8
0
1
5
9
255
MC_HP_FAULTS
LOWDAT1
LOWRPRS1
HIRPRS1
RATSENSR
LOWDAT2
LOWRPRS2
HIRPRS2
Building Technologies
4
0
1
2
3
MC_HP_AUTMANMODE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
187
188
189
204
205
206
207
User's Manual
377 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NONE
255
MC_RCH_CHWRSTOPT
<default>
NO_RESET
RETURN
mA_4_20
NETWORK
ICE
OATEMP
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------MC_RMC_TPPRCALC
<default>
3
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
AVERAGE
0
1
2
MC_RTU_SYSMODE
RATEMP
SATEMP
NETWORK
OATEMP
NONE_MAT
NONE
SATEMP
RATEMP
OATEMP
mA_4_20
AIR_MAT
<default>
6
<default>
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
MC_SCA_HTGRESTYP
NONE
SATEMP
RATEMP
OATEMP
mA_4_20
Building Technologies
5
0
1
2
3
4
MC_SCA_CLGRESTYP
378 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
4
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
MC_SCH_OATMETHOD
LOCAL
NETWORK
<default>
2
<default>
3
1
2
MC_SCU_HUMCTRLTP
NONE
HUMIDITY
DEWPOINT
0
1
2
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------MC_SCU_SFANSTATS
<default>
3
OFF
LO_SPEED
HI_SPEED
0
1
2
MC_TIMESCHEDULE
SUNDAY
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNSDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
TEMPOK
COOLING
HEATING
<default>
3
<default>
3
<default>
2
0
1
2
MC_UV_SYSMODE
UNOCC
OCC
OVRD
0
1
2
MIN_MAX
MIN
Building Technologies
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MC_UV_HCMODE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
User's Manual
379 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
MAX
1
NCLOSE_NOPEN
NCLOSE
NOPEN
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
NEG_POS
NEG
0
POS
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------NIGHT_DAY
<default>
2
NIGHT
DAY
0
1
NOAUX_AUX
NOAUX
AUX
NOELEC
ELEC
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
NOFLOW_FLOW
NOFLOW
FLOW
0
1
NONLNR_LINEAR
NONLNR
LINEAR
0
1
NOPEN_NCLOSE
NOPEN
NCLOSE
Building Technologies
2
0
1
NOELEC_ELEC
380 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NORMAL_ALARM
NORMAL
ALARM
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
NORMAL_CLEAR
NORMAL
CLEAR
0
1
NORMAL_FAIL
NORMAL
FAIL
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------NORMAL_LIGHT
<default>
2
NORMAL
LIGHT
0
1
NORMAL_RESET
NORMAL
RESET
NORMAL
STNDBY
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
NORMAL_UNFAIL
NORMAL
UNFAIL
0
1
NOTOK_OK
NOTOK
OK
0
1
NOTRDY_READY
Building Technologies
2
0
1
NORMAL_STNDBY
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
User's Manual
381 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NOTRDY
READY
0
1
NO_AUTH
NO
AUTH
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
NO_ERR_DATA_E
NO_ERR
DATA_E
0
1
NO_FLT_FAULT
NO_FLT
FAULT
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------NO_LIMIT
<default>
2
NO
LIMIT
0
1
NO_READY
NO
READY
NO
RESET
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
NO_YES
NO
YES
0
1
NTO_ON
NTO
ON
Building Technologies
2
0
1
NO_RESET
382 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NTRAL_ACTIVE
NTRAL
ACTIVE
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
19
0
1
OATEMP_ENTLPY
OATEMP
ENTLPY
0
1
OBJECT_REQUEST_T
NORMAL
DISABLED
UPDATE_S
SELFTEST
UPDATE_A
REPTMASK
0
1
2
3
4
5
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------OVERRIDE
6
ENABLE
7
REMVOVRD
8
CLRSTAT
9
CLRALARM
10
ALNVYENA
11
ALNVYDIS
12
MANUAL
13
REMOTE
14
PROGRAM
15
CLRRESET
16
RESET
17
NUL
255
OCCUP_T
<default>
OCC
UNOCC
BYPASS
STANDBY
NUL
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
5
0
1
2
3
255
User's Manual
383 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
OCC_UNOCC
OCC
UNOCC
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
OFF_AUTO
OFF
AUTO
0
1
OFF_BRAKE
OFF
BRAKE
0
1
OFF_BYPASS
OFF
0
BYPASS
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------OFF_CLOSED
<default>
2
OFF
CLOSED
0
1
OFF_HEAT
OFF
HEAT
OFF
MNWMUP
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
OFF_ON
OFF
ON
0
1
OK_BAD
Building Technologies
2
0
1
OFF_MNWMUP
384 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
OK
BAD
0
1
OK_FAULT
OK
FAULT
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
OK_RESET
OK
RESET
0
1
OK_TRIP
OK
TRIP
0
1
OK_WARNNG
OK
WARNNG
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ONE_TWO
<default>
2
ONE
TWO
0
1
ON_OFF
ON
OFF
OPEN
CLOSE
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
OPEN_CLOSED
OPEN
Building Technologies
2
0
1
OPEN_CLOSE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
User's Manual
385 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
CLOSED
1
OPEN_LOCK
OPEN
LOCK
<default>
2
<default>
10
0
1
OPERATION_PHASE
OFF
HTDURVAC
CLDURVAC
STRT_HTG
STRT_CLG
REGULATG
STOP_HTG
STOP_CLG
POST_HTG
POST_CLG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
----------------------------------------------------------------------OVERRIDE_T
<default>
4
RETAIN
SPECIFY
DEFAULT
NUL
0
1
2
255
PAR_SERIES
PAR
SERIES
LEVEL_0
LEVEL_1
LEVEL_2
LEVEL_3
PR_1
PR_2
PR_3
Building Technologies
2
<default>
13
0
1
PRIORITY_LEVEL_T
386 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
PR_4
PR_6
PR_8
PR_10
PR_16
NUL
7
8
9
10
11
255
PURGE_RUN
PURGE
RUN
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
RATEMP_OATEMP
RATEMP
OATEMP
0
1
READY_DONE
READY
0
DONE
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
---------------------------------------------------------------------READY_YES
<default>
2
READY
YES
0
1
RECAL_CAL
RECAL
CAL
REMOTE
LOCAL
<default>
2
<default>
5
0
1
RESET_SRC_T
NONE
RETURN
SPACE
OA_TEMP
Building Technologies
2
0
1
REMOTE_LOCAL
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
User's Manual
387 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
PERCENT
4
RESTORED
NOT_REST
RESTORED
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
RETURN_SPACE
RETURN
SPACE
0
1
REVRSE_FORWRD
REVRSE
FORWRD
0
1
REV_FWD
REV
FWD
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------SCENE_T
<default>
25
RECALL
LEARN
DISPLAY
GRP_OFF
GP_ON
STAT_OFF
STAT_ON
STAT_MIX
GRP_STAT
FLICK
TIMEOUT
TMO_FLK
DELAYOFF
DLA_FLK
DELAYON
ENA_GRP
DIS_GRP
CLEANON
388 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
CLEANOFF
WINK
RESET
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
NUL
18
19
20
21
22
23
255
SECURITY_STATUS
<default>
0
1
4
5
20
5
0
1
4
5
20
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------SERIES_PAR
<default>
2
SERIES
PAR
0
1
SERIES_PARL_T
SERIES
PARALLEL
OFF
ON
DOWN
UP
STOP
STATE
NUL
<default>
7
<default>
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
255
SHARED_STNDRD
SHARED
STNDRD
Building Technologies
2
0
1
SETTING_T
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
389 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
SI_ENG
SI
ENG
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
SI_ENGLSH
SI
ENGLSH
0
1
SLAVE_MASTER
SLAVE
MASTER
0
1
SLC_LOCAL
SLC
LOCAL
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------SOFTWR_TSTAT
<default>
2
SOFTWR
TSTAT
0
1
SOURCE_TYPE_T
STAT_TMP
STAT_SPT
PVI_TEMP
PVI_PCT
NVI_TEMP
NVI_PCT
PID
MAP
COMPARE
NCI_TEMP
NCI_PCT
AIRFLOW
Building Technologies
12
<default>
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SRC_TMP_LOC_T
390 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NONE
COLD_DCT
HOT_DUCT
0
1
2
SSTO_OPERATION
NONE
HEATING
COOLING
BOTH
<default>
4
<default>
3
<default>
2
0
1
2
3
START_MODE
STRT_HTG
STRT_CLG
NO_START
0
1
2
STEAM_GAS
STEAM
GAS
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
-----------------------------------------------------------------------STNDBY_ACT
<default>
2
STNDBY
ACT
0
1
STNDRD_LOWTMP
STNDRD
LOWTMP
STOP
ENABLE
<default>
2
<default>
4
0
1
STOP_MODE
STOP_HTG
STOP_CLG
STOP_HOC
Building Technologies
2
0
1
STOP_ENABLE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
User's Manual
391 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
NO_STOP
3
STOP_RUN
STOP
RUN
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
STOP_START
STOP
START
0
1
STPT_FLOW
STPT
FLOW
0
1
SURGE_OK
SURGE
OK
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
----------------------------------------------------------------------TEMP_SOURCE_T
<default>
3
RETURN
SPACE
FIXED
0
1
2
THERM_MODE_T
NO_CTL
IN_OUT
MODULATE
NUL
TIME
NETWRK
Building Technologies
4
<default>
2
0
1
2
255
TIME_NETWRK
392 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
TREND_EVENT
OFF
ON
ALARM
<default>
3
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
3
0
1
2
T_CONTACT
NRM_OPEN
NRM_CLOS
0
1
T_DO_OFFSET
NRM_OFF
NRM_ON
0
1
T_UNVT_AIR_TERMINAL
NO_FAN
SERIES
PARALLEL
0
1
2
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
----------------------------------------------------------------------T_UNVT_COIL_CONTROL
<default>
2
VALVE
BYP_DMPR
0
1
T_UNVT_DEVICE_MODE
MODULATE
CYCLE
OFF
ON
ELECTRIC
HOTWATER
STEAM
CHILLWTR
OUT_AIR
Building Technologies
4
<default>
5
0
1
2
3
T_UNVT_ENERGY_TYPE
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
2
3
4
User's Manual
393 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
T_UNVT_SWITCH_METHOD
DEADBAND
PWM
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
<default>
2
0
1
UNLOCK_LOCK
UNLOCK
LOCK
0
1
UNOCC_OCC
UNOCC
OCC
0
1
UNUSED_USE
UNUSED
USE
0
1
UNVT_UNIT_T
TEMP
PERCENT
0
1
Table name
Table ID
# of
states
State
Value
------------------------------------------------------------------------VALVE_FBP
<default>
2
VALVE
FBP
0
1
VH_VECT
VH
VECT
0
1
Building Technologies
2
<default>
2
0
1
WINTER_SUMMER
394 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
<default>
0
1
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix B—Default State Text Table
YES_NO
YES
NO
<default>
2
<default>
12
0
1
ZONE_MODE
VAC
OCC1
OCC2
OCC3
OCC4
OCC5
WARMUP
COOLDOWN
NGHT_HTG
NGHT_CLG
STOP_HTG
STOP_CLG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
End of report
>Log, Display, Edit, Quit? -
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
395 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix C—Error Message Types
Format of E-code and R-code Error Messages
Appendix C—Error Message Types
The field panel contains two major sets of error messages. The first set is known as Ecode errors. This type of message is prefixed with the letter "E" and relates to any of
the operations in the field panel.
The second set is known as R-code errors. This type of error is related specifically to
the PPCL editor and is prefixed with the letter "R".
Format of E-code and R-code Error Messages
E-code error messages report an error that has occurred in a non-specific area of the
system. This type of message uses the following format:
● Code number, hex value, and a brief description
For example:
E1
0x0001 No memory available
E2 0x0002 Invalid command
R-code error messages report an error that has occurred in a specific area of the field
panel. Only the error message description is displayed. For example:
PPCL line already exists
Field Panel (E-code) Error Codes
Code Number
Hex Value
Text Description
Explanation
E1
0x0001
No memory available
The field panel does not have enough memory to carry out our request.
E2
0x0002
Invalid command
Invalid operation. Your command cannot be executed. The most
common cause of this error is a point command which is inappropriate
for the point type being commanded.
Examples include commanding an analog point to ON, or attempting to
put a non-alarmable point into alarm-by-command.
E3
0x0003
Not found
This error displays for one of the following reasons:
The point is not found. The point entered is not defined in any online,
unfailed field panel.
The program line is not found. The program line entered does not exist
in any specified field panel.
The device is not found. The field panel entered cannot be found as a
member of that network.
E4
0x0004
Priority too low
The point cannot be commanded because the priority of the operator or
the control statement issued is lower than that of the current priority.
E5
0x0005
No change
The condition of the point (NORMAL, ALARM, FAILED, ALARM-BYCOMMAND, OPERATOR, DISABLED, PROOFING) has not been
changed by your program. This usually occurs during Point Operation
sequences. For example, you have attempted to DISABLE a point that
is already disabled.
E7
0x0007
FAILED
The point being commanded is failed. This usually indicates a hardware
problem. Either the field panel in which the point is defined is failed (not
communicating with other field panels on a network), the board on
which the point is terminated is failed, or a problem exists with the point
termination itself.
396 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix C—Error Message Types
Field Panel (E-code) Error Codes
E8
0x0008
Out of service
The point is currently operator disabled (out-of-service) and cannot be
altered until it is re-enabled.
E9
0x0009
Already exists
This error displays for one of the following reasons:
The point already exists. An attempt has been made to add a point
using a point name that already exists in some other field panel (or in
the current field panel if there is no network).
The field panel already has a database. This error indicates that a
database is being loaded on top of existing data. Coldstart the field
panel and attempt to reload the database.
An attempt has been made to add a field panel that is already defined in
the network.
E10
0x000A
Trend already exists
An attempt has been made to add a point to trending that is already
being trended.
E11
0x000B
Value unchanged
The point is already at the value or state to which you are attempting to
command it.
E12
0x000C
Value out of range
The digital value of an analog point is out of range. An analog point has
been commanded to a value which, according to the slope and intercept
defined for that point, causes the digital value to be outside the range of
0 to 32,767. Check for correct slope and intercept values for this point.
This error commonly occurs when commanding a virtual LAO point
defined with an intercept of zero to a negative case.
E13
0x000D
Not Hostcaller node
An attempt has been made to add a node telephone number to a field
panel that does not contain the Telecommunications Interface Unit (the
Hostcaller).
E22
0x0016
Line not traced
Line of program code was accessed but not traced. This line was not
executed.
E23
0x0017
Line not enabled
A line of code is disabled. This line of code must be enabled for the
system to access it.
E25
0x0019
Line already exists
An attempt has been made to add a program line that already exists in
the field panel.
The line should either be re-entered with a new line number, or the
existing line must be removed and the new line added again.
E26
0x001A
Has unresolved points
A program line references point name(s) that cannot be found in any
active, unfailed field panel on the network.
E27
0x001B
Not coded yet
The requested operation is not available in this version of the field
panel.
E28
0x001C
Bad statement type
Used in loop tune option. You have tried to tune a non-loop statement.
E30
0x001E
Not coded yet
Feature not available.
E31
0x001F
Not setup for TOD
The point is not set up for Time-Of-Day (TOD) functions.
E34
0x0022
Cannot override
Time-Of-Day error resulting when you try to override an override
statement.
E40
0x0028
Invalid DST pari
The dates entered for DST pair are invalid.
E50
0x0032
Too many commands
outstanding
Too many operator requests are waiting to be handled. Wait 10 to 30
seconds and try again.
E51
0x0033
Report active
A request to print a report at the network printer has been made while
another report is still printing. Either wait until the first report completes,
or cancel the first report and try again.
E52
0x0034
Tape load error
An attempt has been made to load a database from a tape that contains
data for a field panel with a different number (address switch) than the
one being loaded. Make sure you have the correct cassette tape for the
field panel receiving the data.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
397 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix C—Error Message Types
Field Panel (E-code) Error Codes
E53
0x0035
Tape header invalid
Indicates that the field panel cannot read the header block (or title) of
the tape.
This error commonly occurs because the bits per second is set higher
than 1200 during a Save option. The Save appears to complete
successfully, but fails to verify. Database Save operations (backups)
must be performed with the rate set at or below 1200 bps.
Check the volume setting on the cassette player and make sure that the
cassette interface switch is in the LOAD (PLAY) position and try again.
The error may disappear after repeated attempts to load the database.
If the error persists, try your second backup tape if available.
Corrupt or bad recording tape and excessive electrical noise may also
cause this error.
E54
0x0036
Tape trailer invalide
Indicates that the field panel cannot detect the end of the data on a
tape. This error usually occurs because the Save procedure on that
tape had been aborted. Use a tape that was verified at the time of a
Save option.
E55
0x0037
Cannot modify
An attempt has been made to directly modify an area of memory that
cannot be modified.
DO NOT attempt to modify memory without direct supervision from a
Siemens Industry representative. The results of direct modification of
memory on system operation are completely random.
E57
0x0039
Destinaion node failed
The field panel to which you sent a command has either failed, is not
defined on the network, has never been made ready, or is a remote
node (not connected).
E58
0x003A
No Give 1st active
Report error. The field panel providing data is no longer running the
report.
E59
0x003B
SCB outstanding
Data is ready, but the report is no longer running.
E60
0x003C
No slave SCB available
You are requesting information from a field panel that is busy providing
display information to other field panels and cannot start your display.
Wait several seconds and try again. More than one attempt may be
necessary to complete the request
E61
0x003D
Cannot remove self
An attempt has been made to remove the field panel through which you
are communicating. This is not allowed.
E62
0x003E
No report active
An attempt has been made to cancel a display at the system printer, but
no report is currently being printed there.
E63
0x003F
No report printer
No report printer has been defined for the network.
E64
0x0040
Invalid report ID
The particular report you requested is not available.
E65
0x0041
Report data lost
This error displays for one of the following reasons:
Report data was lost across the network.
Data was lost while transferring (saving) the database onto a cassette
tape.
E66
0x0042
Host ID security failed
Host ID security check failed. The host ID defined in the network does
not match the ID defined at the host. This error can only occur when an
operator manually initiates the call.
E67
0x0043
Bad trunk/remote
Remote connection attempt failed because trunk and remote
identification labels did not match.
E80
0x0050
Inavlid phone number
Invalid or unrecognizable telephone number was found or has been
used.
E81
0x0051
TIU busy
This particular Telecommunications Interface Unit (TIU) is already busy
with a call.
E82
0x0052
TIU no present
The specific TIU hardware is not present at the object field panel.
398 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix C—Error Message Types
Field Panel (E-code) Error Codes
E83
0x0053
No more alarm devices
No alarm devices are available.
E84
0x0054
Command error:
The system does not recognize the modem type and cannot connect to
the modem.
E85
0x0055
Alarm levels are full
An attempt has been made to add more than six alarm levels to a
particular mode.
E100
0x0064
Runer needs more data
An attempt has been made to "advance" the tuning process before
enough data has been collected.
E101
0x0065
Command not supported
The function you selected is not supported in this field panel.
E102
0x0066
Not set up for modes
Addition of a mode point that has not been setup for enhanced
alarming.
E104
0x0068
Bad category number
The destination number entered was invalid.
E112
0x0070
Point is in HAND mode
An attempt was made to command a point in HAND mode.
E128
0x0080
Invalid user id
An attempt was made to log in with an invalid user ID, or the user ID
was misspelled.
E129
0x0081
Invalid password
An attempt was made to log in with an invalid password, or the
password was misspelled.
E130
0x0082
User accounts database
is full
User accounts database is full. To correct this problem, remove inactive
accounts.
E171
0x00AB
E172
0x00AC
E182
0x00B6
Operation aborted due to a warmstart of the field panel.
E183
0x00B7
Too many communication framing errors over the network. Information
sent was garbled. Try again.
E184
0x00B8
The field panel cannot accept a tape load without being coldstarted.
This error usually occurs during a tape load. You must coldstart the field
panel and try again.
Invalid command
SCU fails to answer
P2 or P3 command is not supported by the server field panel.
This error displays for one of the following reasons:
Previously unfailed field panel fails to answer. This error indicates that a
field panel has failed in the middle of a network operation. A field panel
failure message should follow at the alarm printer.
A condition similar to error code E183 exists.
E249
0x00F9
Invalid point address
This error displays for one of the following reasons:
A checksum error has occurred during a database save, load, or verify
operation. If this error occurs, try the operation a few more times. If the
error continues to appear, follow the directions for treating error code
E253.
Either the physical point address is not valid for the point type, or a point
has been assigned an address that is outside the range of valid point
numbers. Check the point definition.
E250
0x00FA
Failed I/O device
Failed input/output board. The point appears failed (*F*) because the
standard termination board or AO-P board in the field panel or on the
FLN trunk is failed or missing.
When the board is repaired or installed, the point status corrects itself.
E251
0x00FB
No Change-Of-Value to report.
E252
0x00FC
This error condition may occur on the first attempt to characterize a
point within a set. Either the physical point address is not valid for the
point type, or a point has been assigned an address that is outside the
range of valid point numbers. Check the point definition.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
399 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix C—Error Message Types
Field Panel (E-code) Error Codes
E253
0x00FD
Framing error occurred while reading a record from a tape during a
database load or verify. More than one attempt may be necessary.
Verify the switch on the cassette interface box is in the correct position
and the communication speed for the operator terminal matches the
rate used to record the tape. If you are verifying a tape, make certain
that the tape was not recorded above 1200 bps (also see error code
E53). Make another attempt.
In some cases, fast forwarding the tape to the end, rewinding it, and
then retyping the operation is effective.
E254
0x00FE
Input/Output timeout. This error generally occurs during a database load
or verify operation when a valid character has not been read from the
tape in a specified time.
Follow the directions for clearing error E253.
E512
0x0200
Monitor list full
Point monitor list is full.
E514
0x0202
FLT transfer in progress
An attempt was made to start a second database transfer with FLT.
Wait for the first FLT database transfer to finish.
E515
0x0203
FLT transfer killed
An error caused the FLT database transfer to abort.
E517
0x0205
TEC <name> not added
Failure during point addition because field panel does not support long
point name functionality.
E518
0x0206
Connection lost
A field panel failed while a command was in progress.
E519
0x0207
Warm started
Warmstart occurred while a command was in progress.
E521
0x0209
Protocol error
Low level protocol error occurred during a command.
E528
0x0210
Time-out error
Time-out on a command occurred. The server field panel did not
respond to a command during the allotted time.
E3600
0x0e10
Invalide FLN number
FLN number used was outside the range of 0 through 3.
E3601
0x0e11
Invalid drop number
Drop number of the FLN device is invalid (Note: 99 is an invalid value
for drop number).
E3602
0x0e12
Device failed
FLN device is failed.
E3603
0x0e13
Invalid point number
Point address is outside the range of a specific physical device.
E3604
0x0e14
Physical point failed
Physical point failed.
E3605
0x0e15
Phyisical point not
commandable
An attempt was made to change the value of a physical point that
cannot process commands.
This error most often occurs when you attempt to command certain
point s on FLN devices.
E3606
0x0e16
Value out of range
An attempt was made to command a point to a value that is outside the
physical range for that point.
E3607
0x0e17
Application invalid for
device
An application defined for a particular FLN device is invalid. Verify the
application that resides on the FLN device.
400 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix C—Error Message Types
PPCL (R-code) Error Codes
PPCL (R-code) Error Codes
Code Number
Explanation
R0
A program line was not accepted, but the field panel cannot determine the specific problem. Carefully
examine the line, recompose if necessary, and re-enter the line.
R1
A program line was entered without a valid line number. Re-enter the line with a number from 1 to 32,767.
R2
Unrecognized statement. A statement in the program line entered is not recognized. A typographical
mistake is the most common cause (for example, typing ONN instead of ON, or typing LOP instead of
LOOP).
R3
Invalid RETURN statement. The RETURN statement has been used incorrectly in the program line.
R5
Invalid control statement. The most common cause of this error is an attempt to command an analog
point with a digital control statement, or vice versa (for example, 100 OFF(DAMPER)).
R6
Invalid IF statement. The IF statement in the program line has been used incorrectly or has been
improperly constructed.
R7
Invalid ASSIGNMENT statement. The program line is trying to assign an illegal value to a point (for
example, assigning a decimal value to a digital point).
R8
Unbalanced parentheses. The number of left parentheses in the program line is not equal to the number
of right parentheses.
R9
Line numbers are out of order. The program line numbers are not in ascending order.
R10
Too many arguments in the statement.
R11
Too many operands in the statement.
R13
Invalid binary operator. The binary operator in the program line is not recognized. The most common
cause of this error is incorrectly typing the relational operators: EQ, GE, +, -, *, /, etc.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
401 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined
Engineering Units
Appendix D contains the list of pre-defined engineering units accepted by TALON
BACnet/IP, the corresponding BACnet engineering unit number, and the meaning or
unit of measure for each unit. BACnet accepts pre-determined values for engineering
units only. For this reason, TALON BACnet/IP devices do not accept user-defined
engineering units. You can type an exact value from the pre-determined list of TALON
BACnet/IP engineering units, or use a query to select an engineering unit for the point.
For example, ? C* will display all pre-determined TALON BACnet/IP engineering units
that begin with the letter ‘C’. If you type an exact value that is not in the pre-determined
list, you will be re-prompted for the engineering unit.
The Engineering units prompt also accepts the BACnet engineering number in
place of the TALON BACnet/IP name.
Unit of Measure
TALON BACnet/IP Engineering Unit
BACnet Engineering Unit Number
square-meters
m2
0
square-centimeters
cm2
116
square-feet
ft2
1
square-inches
in2
115
currency1
crrncy1
105
currency2
crrncy2
106
currency3
crrncy3
107
currency4
crrncy4
108
currency5
crrncy5
109
currency6
crrncy6
110
currency7
crrncy7
111
currency8
crrncy8
112
currency9
crrncy9
113
currency10
crrncy10
114
milliamperes
mA
2
amperes
A
3
amperes-per-meter
A/m
167
amperes-per-square-meter
A/m2
168
ampere-square-meter
A/m2
169
farads
farads
170
henrys
henrys
171
ohms
Ohms
4
ohm-meters
Ohm-m
172
Area
Currency
Electrical
402 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units
milliohms
mOhms
145
kilohms
kOhms
122
megohms
MOhms
123
siemens
S
173
siemens-per-meter
S/m
174
teslas
telas
175
volts
V
5
millivolts
mV
124
kilovolts
kV
6
megavolts
MV
7
volt-amperes
VA
8
kilovolt-amperes
kVA
9
megavolt-amperes
MVA
10
volt-amperes-reactive
VAr
11
kilovolt-amperes-reactive
kVAr
12
megavolt-amperes-reactive
MVAr
13
volts-per-degree-Kelvin
V/Deg K
176
volts-per-meter
V/m
177
degrees-phase
Dg-phase
14
power-factor
pf
15
webers
webers
178
joules
J
16
kilojoules
kJ
17
kilojoules-per-kilogram
kJ/kg
125
megajoules
MJ
126
watt-hours
Wh
18
kilowatt-hours
kW h
19
megawatt-hours
MW hour
146
btus
Btu
20
kilo-btus
k Btus
147
mega-btus
M Btus
148
therms
Therms
21
ton-hours
ton-h
22
joules-per-kilogram-dry-air
J/kg Air
23
kilojoules-per-kilogram-dry-air
kJ/kg A
149
megajoules-per-kilogram-dry-air
MJ/kg A
150
btus-per-pound-dry-air
Btu/lb A
24
btus-per-pound
Btu/lbs
117
Enthalpy
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
403 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units
Entropy
joules-per-degree-Kelvin
J/DEG K
1127
kilojoules-per-degree-Kelvin
k J/DG K
151
megajoules-per-degree-Kelvin
M J/DG K
152
joules-per-kilogram-degree-Kelvin
J/kg K
128
N
153
cycles-per-hour
cycles/h
25
cycles-per-minute
cycles/m
26
hertz
Hz
27
kilohertz
kHz
129
megahertz
MHz
130
per hour
/h
131
grams-of-water-per-kilogram-dry-air
g/kg
28
percent-relative-humidity
r/h
29
milimeters
mm
30
centimters
cm
118
meters
m
31
inches
in
32
feet
ft
33
candelas
cd
179
candelas-per-square-meter
cd/m2
180
watts-per-square-foot
W/ft2
34
watts-per-square-meter
W/m2
35
lumens
Lm
36
luxes
Lx
37
foot-candles
ft cd
38
kilograms
kg
39
pound-mass
lbs
40
tons
tons
41
grams-per-second
g/s
154
grams-per-minute
g/m
155
kilograms-per-second
kg/s
42
Force
Newton
Frequency
Humidity
Length
Light
Mass
Mass Flow
404 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units
kilograms-per-minute
kg/m
43
kilograms-per-hour
kg/h
44
pounds-mass-per-second
lbs/s
119
pounds-mass-per-minute
lbs/m
45
pounds-mass-per-hour
lbs/h
46
tons-per-hour
ton/h
156
milliwatts
mW
132
watts
W
47
kilowatts
kW
48
megawatts
MW
49
btus-per-hour
Btu/h
50
kilo-btus-per-hour
k Btu/h
157
horsepower
hp
51
tons-refrigeration
T
52
pascals
Pa
53
hectopascals
hPa
133
kilopascals
kPa
54
milibars
mbar
134
bars
bar
55
pounds-force-per-square-inch
psi
56
centimeters-of-water
cm H2O
57
inches-of-water
in H2O
58
millimeters-of-mercury
mm Hg
59
centimeters-of-mercury
cm Hg
60
inches-of-mercury
in Hg
61
degrees-Celcius
DEG C
62
degrees-Kelvin
DEG K
63
degrees-Kelvin-per-hour
DEG K/h
181
degrees-Kelvin-per-minute
DEG K/m
182
degrees-Fahrenheit
DEG F
64
degree-days-Celcius
DEG-d-C
65
degree-days-Fahrenheit
DEG-d-F
66
delta-degrees-Fahrenheit
^ DEG F
120
delta-degrees-Kelvin
^ DEG K
121
yrs
67
Power
Pressure
Temperature
Time
years
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
405 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units
months
mos
68
weeks
wks
69
days
days
70
hours
hrs
71
minutes
mins
72
seconds
secs
73
hundredths-seconds
1/100s
158
milliseconds
ms
159
newton-meters
N-M
160
millimeters-per-second
mm/s
161
millimeters-per-minute
mm/m
162
meters-per-second
m/s
74
meters-per-minute
m/m
163
meters-per-hour
m/h
164
kilometers-per-hour
km/h
75
feet-per-second
ft/s
76
feet-per-minute
ft/m
77
miles-per-hour
mph
78
cubic-feet
ft3
79
cubic-meters
m3
80
imperial-gallons
Imp gal
81
liters
l
82
us-gallons
gal
83
cubic-feet-per-second
ft3/s
142
cubic-feet-per-minute
ft3/m
84
cubic-meters-per-second
m3/s
85
cubic-meters-per-minute
m3/m
165
cubic-meters-per-hour
m3/h
135
imperial-gallons-per-minute
Imp gpm
86
liters-per-second
lps
87
liters-per-minute
lpm
88
liters-per-hour
lph
136
us-gallons-per-minute
gpm
89
Deg-ang
90
Torque
Velocity
Volume
Volumetric Flow
Other
degrees-angular
406 | 408
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
588-580
2016-08-02
Appendix D—BACnet/IP Pre-defined Engineering Units
degrees-Celcius-per-hour
DEG C/h
91
degrees-Celcius-per-minute
DEG C/m
92
degrees-Fahrenheit-per-hour
DEG F/h
93
degrees-Fahrenheit-per-minute
DEG F/m
94
joule-seconds
Js
183
kilograms-per-cubic-meter
kg/m3
186
kilowatt-hours-per-square-meter
kW h/m2
137
kilowatt-hours-per-square-foot
kW h/ft2
138
megajoules-per-square-meter
MJ/m2
139
megajoules-per-square-foot
MJ/ft2
140
no-units
95
newton-seconds
Ns
187
newtons-per-meter
N/m
188
parts-per-million
ppm
96
parts-per-billion
ppb
97
percent
PCT
98
percent-obscuration-per-foot
PCT/ft
143
percent-obscuration-per-meter
PCT/m
144
percent-per-second
PCT/s
99
per-minute
/m
100
per-second
/s
101
psi-per-degree-Fahrenheit
psi/DG F
102
radians
rad
103
radians-per-second
rad/s
184
revolutions-per-minute
rpm
104
square-meters-per-Newton
m2/N
185
watts-per-meter-per-degree-Kelvin
W/m Dg K
189
watts-per-square-meter-degree-Kelvin
W/m2 K
141
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies
User's Manual
407 | 408
588-580
2016-08-02
Issued by
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Building Technologies Division
1000 Deerfield Pkwy
Buffalo Grove IL 60089
+1 847-215-1000
Document ID: 588-580
Edition: 2016-08-02
© Siemens Industry, Inc., 2016
Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
588-580(FA)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement